E3D Training File PDF

CHAPTER 1
1 Introduction
AVEVA Everything3D™ (AVEVA E3D™) Pipe Router is a rule-based tool which enables the routing of pipe
networks by automatically positioning piping components.
Before using Pipe Router the pipes must be created, and their Heads and Tails connect or positioned. Pipe
Router begins routing from the head of a pipe and ends the route at the tail. The flow direction is always
forwards (from Head to Tail).
Pipe Router will automatically:
 Create clash-free orthogonal routes which use the minimum length of pipe and as few elbows and bends
as possible. The user can include non-orthogonal sections of pipe manually.
 Add elbows, reducers, flanges, gaskets and welds, providing they are available in the catalogue.
 Position piping components such as valves.
1.1 Aim
The aim of this training guide is to provide designers with the knowledge and skills necessary to use Pipe
Router to create simple pipe routes using simple rules.
1.2 Objectives
 Create a simple pipe route
 Use Routing Points to control the pipe route
 Route pipes along Routing Planes and Pipe Racks
 Create and use simple Routing Rules
© Copyright 2014. 7 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
Pipe Router TM-1850
1.3 Prerequisites
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D Foundations and TM –
1810 AVEVA Everything3D Pipework Modelling training courses. Trainees who can demonstrate a suitable
understanding of other AVEVA E3D applications and techniques may also be permitted to undertake the
training.
1.4 Course Structure
Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises.
Each workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees
to practice their methods and complete the set exercises.
1.5 Using this Guide
Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document.
Button clicks are indicated by bold turquoise text.
Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.
Where supplementary information is provided, or reference is made to other documentation, the following
symbols and styles will be used.
 Additional information
 Refer to other documentation
System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function'.
Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.
© Copyright 2014 8 www.aveva.com

Pipe Router TM-1850
1.6 Setting Up the Training Course
Login to AVEVA E3D using the details provided by the Trainer. They will typically be as shown below:
Project: Training
Username: A.PIPER
Password: A
MDB: A-PIPING
Click the Model tile.
On the TOOLS tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the
Training Setup form.
From the Piping tab select the Router radio button to indicate the current training course and check the
Setup Training Course checkbox. Click the Apply button followed by the Close button to close the form.
 Completed Exercises are available via the Training Setup form and may be accessed by the Trainer
if required.

Pipe Router TM-1850
This page has been intentionally left blank.

CHAPTER 1
1 Introduction
The AVEVA Everything3D™ (AVEVA E3D™) Cabling System application supports the creation of cableway,
cables, and cableway material. This course has been designed for people who are involved in the detail design
and layout of electrical systems. It will provide the necessary skills for the user to be able to create cableways,
cables, cableway material, and cable tray penetrations.
1.1 Aim
Over the duration of the course the participants will learn to use the AVEVA E3D Cabling System application,
and become familiar with cableway, cable and cableway material creation and modification.
1.2 Objectives
 To have a clear understanding of the AVEVA E3D Cabling System application.
 To be able to create Cableways and Cableway branches.
 To be able to modify the Cableway route using route points and the model editor.
 To be able to create electrical connections for equipment items.
 To be able to create and route a cable using various methods of routing.
 To be able to use the Cableway data checker utility.
 To be able to apply Cableway material to the Cableway branch.
 To be able to create and manage cable tray penetrations.
1.3 Prerequisites
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D™ Foundations training
course. Trainees who can demonstrate a suitable understanding of other AVEVA E3D applications and
techniques may also be permitted to undertake the training.
Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations and set exercises. Each workstation will
have a training project, populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to practice their
methods, and complete the set exercises.
1.5 Using this guide
Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary;
Button clicks are indicated by bold dark turquoise text.
Information the user has to key-in will be in bold red text.
Annotation for trainees benefit:
© Copyright 2013 www.aveva.com

9
Cableway & Cable Modelling TM-1815
System prompts will be displayed in italics and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function'
Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.
1.6 Setting up the Training Course
Login to AVEVA Everything3D using the details provided by the Trainer, for example:
Project: Training
User: A.CABLEMAN
Password: A
MDB: A-CABLE (MDB for User

A.CABLE)
Click the Model button
From the Tools tab, click the Setup button located in the Training group to display the Training Setup
form.
Select the Cable tab and select Cableway and Cable radio button under the section Training Setup.
Check the Setup Training Course checkbox.
© Copyright 2013
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. www.aveva.com
All rights reserved. 10
Click the Apply button.
© Copyright 2013
This page is intentionally left blank
© Copyright 2013
CHAPTER 2
2 Cable Tray Design – Basic Concepts
There is a separate design hierarchy for cable tray routing which follows the same principles as for pipe routing;
i.e. each cable tray element may own a number of branches. In turn, branches may own a number of tray
components like bends, risers and reducers.
The difference between cable tray and branches is that a branch is only considered to have two ends, while a
cable tray may have any number of ends, depending on the number of branches it owns.
The diagram below shows a cable tray with three ends and
two branches. The second branch is connected to the first at
the tee.
Although a branch only has two ends, it may own components

(in this case a tee), which connects to other branches.
These simple concepts enable any number of cable tray

configurations to be developed, and form the basis of all the
AVEVA E3D cable trays encountered.
© Copyright 2013
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. 11 www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D (2.1)
Cable Tray Modelling TM-1816
2.1 Accessing the Cable Tray Application
A default screen layout will be displayed comprising the Microsoft® Office Fluent™–based user interface and
a Model Explorer showing all the objects from the current project databases.
Once the Model module has been started, it must be checked that the Cable Tray application is running. This
can be seen on the options list at top of the model framework; in the screenshot below it shows the General
application. This can be changed by selecting Cable Tray from the options list as shown.
Selecting the Cable Tray application will add the Cable Tray tab to the Microsoft®
Office Fluent™ based user interface.
2.2 Cable Tray Specifications
In the same way that design offices have standard cable tray specifications for different materials,
AVEVA E3D has a set of specifications from which the Designer can choose. In fact all components used
must be defined in the Catalogue and placed in a Specification before the designer can select them.
The Training Project is supplied with a series of Cable Tray Specifications including several from the
manufacturers Vantrunk and OgLaend.
2.3 Setting the Appropriate Specification
The first task when building a cable tray is to decide which specification to use. Having decided, the appropriate
specification is set as an attribute of the cable tray. Any subsequent branches will automatically be assigned
with the same specification, although this can be re-specified if required.
On the Cable Tray tab click the Defaults button located beneath the Settings group to access the Default
Specifications form.
Select VANTRUNK-SW5-SS from the Cable Tray list and click the OK button.
 To change default specification, reselect the Defaults button as above and select the new specification
© Copyright 2013
12
www.aveva.com
2.4 Creating the Cable Tray Hierarchy
Prior to creating a cable tray the correct hierarchy must be present in the Model Explorer.
Navigate to the SITE-CABLE-AREA03 in the Model Explorer. From the Home tab click the Zone button
located within the Create group to display the Create Zone form.
Set the Name to ZONE-CTRAY-POWER-AREA03 and

Purpose to CABL Cabling.
Click the OK button.
2.5 Cable Tray Creation Form
Selecting the ZONE just created, click the Cable Tray button located within the Create group under the Cable
Tray tab to display the Create Cable Tray Main form.
Set the Name to CTRAY-AREA03-POWER.
The form displays the current default specification. This can be

changed by clicking the Specifications… button to display the
Default Specifications form and selecting the required specification.
Clicking the Attributes… button displays

the Cable Tray Attributes form where
various Cable Tray attributes can be set.
Set the Tray Width to 600mm
Click the OK button on the Create Cable

Tray Main form. This creates the
administrative elements for the cable tray in
the model hierarchy. It will also display the
Create Cable Tray Branch form.
© Copyright 2013
The Create Cable Tray Branch form is automatically populated with

a branch name and specification inherited from the owning cable
tray.
Click the OK button. This will create a new branch in the cable tray
and automatically open the Branch at Explicit Position form.
 Setting branch head and tail positions is discussed in section

2.8.
2.6 Cable Tray Branches
Branches serve two purposes:
 They define the start and finish points of a cable tray route (known as the Head and Tail in AVEVA Plant).
 They own the cable tray components, which define the route.
The position and order of the cable tray components below branch level determine the physical route. In
AVEVA E3D, it is only necessary to consider the fittings, because the cable tray that appears between fittings
is automatically selected according to the specifications of the fittings.
2.7 Cable Tray Branch Heads and Tails
All branches need to have a start and end point. These can be a position in space (3D co-ordinates), the
flange face of an equipment nozzle or pipe, a tee or various other points in the design. Heads and tails are set
up via a series of attributes that belong to the branch element.
The attributes for heads of branches are: -
HPOS The position in the zone where the branch starts.
© Copyright 2013
14
www.aveva.com
HCON The connection type of the branch end (BOXI or OPEN).
HDIR The direction in which the start of the branch is pointing (as if you were looking down the tray
/ ladder).
HBOR The width of the cable tray.
HREF The name of the item to which the branch head is connected (e.g. Href TEE 1 of BRANCH
/CTRAY_YY2/B1). If this is not set, then the branch is open.
HSTU This is a reference to the catalogue, which determines the material of the first piece of cable
tray, between the start of the branch and the first fitting (this still needs to be set, even if there
is a fitting connected directly to the head).
The attributes for tails of branches are: -
TPOS The position in the zone where the branch ends.
TCON The connection type of the branch end (BOXI or OPEN).
TDIR The direction in which the end of the branch is pointing (as if you were looking back down the
tray / ladder).
TBOR The width of the cable tray.
TREF The name of the item to which the branch tail is connected (e.g. Tref TEE 1 of BRANCH
/CTRAY_YY2/B1). If this is not set, then the branch is open.
It is not necessary to specify each of these attributes every time a branch is created. On most occasions the
attributes for the head or tail are set automatically (e.g. where a branch is connected to a tee).
2.8 Cable Tray Branch Head / Tail Positioned Explicitly
Each new branch must have its two ends (its Head and its Tail)
positioned in the model.
When a branch is created, the Branch at Explicit Position form

is displayed. This form is used to position and orientate the
branch head and tail explicitly and define the connection type for
each.
The Branch at Explicit Position form may also be shown by

selecting the specific branch in the hierarchy and selecting the
Branch button from within the Modify group on the Cable Tray
tab.
The form can be used to:
 Set the Head / Tail option button to show the end of the branch to be positioned and orientated.
 Set the explicit Position co-ordinates for the selected Head/Tail.
 Set the Width of the Branch Head/Tail based upon the chosen specification.
© Copyright 2013
 Enter the Direction in which the head / tail is to be orientated.
 Use the Connection option button to select how the tray is to be terminated at the Head/Tail. If the option
is set to Open, the end will be left open for connection to another tray length (in another branch) or if set
to Boxing the end will be closed to terminate the tray length.
Setting the Cable Tray Branch CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B1

Head and Tail.
Select Head
Position West 289250mm
North 311000mm
Up 104880mm
Width 600mm
Direction S
Connection Open
Click Apply
Select Tail
Position West 289250mm
North 289000mm
Up 104880mm
Width 300mm
Direction N
Connection Boxing
Click Apply
Close the form by clicking Cancel
© Copyright 2013
16
www.aveva.com
2.9 Cable Tray Branch Components (Fittings)
On initial definition of a branch head and tail, the branch will consist of one piece of cable tray running in a
straight line between the head and tail positions. This will appear as a dotted line between the two points
unless the head and tail are aligned along a common axis and have equal bore size. (The dotted line indicates
that the branch route is geometrically incorrect.)
Head
Tail
The next step in designing a cable tray is to create and position a series of components, which define the
cable tray route required. It is necessary to decide which cable tray components are needed in order to satisfy
the requirements of the process and the design needs. It is not necessary to know specific fitting dimensions,
as AVEVA E3D derives these automatically from the catalogue.
To create cable tray fittings the user must select an item from the list of fittings available from the associated
cable tray specification. The main types of fitting available are Bends, Elbows (Risers), Tees, Reducers,
Crosses, and Fixed Tray (FTUB).
For all cable tray components the user must:
 Select the component from the cable tray specification.
 Position the component and set the orientation.
2.9.1 Creating Branch Components (Cable Tray Fittings)
With the new branch selected within Model Explorer click the Components button from within the Create
group on the Cable Tray tab to display the Cable Tray Components form.
This form shows all the component types that are available in the
current cable tray specification.
It is possible to select components from an alternative specification

by reselecting from the Cable Tray options list.
© Copyright 2013
Normally Branch Members are defined in Forwards mode, that is, one after the other, starting at the Head.
Sometimes it is more convenient to build the branch from the Tail first, in which case, Backwards mode is
more appropriate.
Ticking the Auto Conn check box ensures that components are automatically connected to the previous
component in the design hierarchy.
Components are created by selecting the required fitting from the scrollable list and then clicking the Create
button.
Select Forwards mode, tick the Auto Conn checkbox and select
Tee.
Click the Create button.
On the CHOOSE TEE form Select 600.00 300.00 and click the OK
button.
The Choose form displays all available components for the

specification selected.
After selecting the initial component from the Choose form, the
Open Tray Direction form will be automatically displayed.
The user must set the tray direction by entering a valid direction.
Enter U in the text box and then click the OK button.
2.9.2 Selecting the Component from the Specification
On selection of a component from the catalogue, there are often a number of choices available. The
description of the component item can be presented in one of three ways
 Basic the least amount of information is displayed.
 Text description and material displayed.
 All all available data is shown.
The manner in which component information is displayed is changed by selecting Options from the Tools
group beneath the Cable Tray tab
© Copyright 2013
18
www.aveva.com
This selection criteria setting will determine the amount of information

displayed. Auto Connect can also be set from this form.
Selection Criteria: Basic
Selection Criteria: Text
Selection Criteria: All
© Copyright 2013
2.9.3 Branch Component List Order
With equipment and structures, the order in which items are created is of no importance to the final design.
With cable tray components, the order in which they are laid out, as well as their individual positions and
orientations, determines the final cable tray route.
Below is a Model Explorer window showing the components of a typical cable tray. The current element is
selected.
Any new item in the branch appears after the current element once Create is clicked. The new item then
becomes the current element. The only slight deviation from this is for a new branch, in which case the new
item will be the first item in the branch.
List order will become second nature after the creation of a number of branches, but for the time being remain
aware of it and consider carefully where the next item is going to be inserted.
2.9.4 Automatic Positioning and Orientation of New Components
On selection of a component, in many cases, it is not necessary to go through the stages of positioning and
orientation. This is because the component is automatically connected to the previous one.
2.9.5 Positioning and Setting the Orientation of Components
Having created and chosen a component, the next stage is to position it. If it is the first component in the
Branch the Open Tray Direction must be specified.
On component creation, there is an option ‘Auto Conn’ which automatically connects the component to the
previous component (or to the Branch Head if it is the first component).
Components can be positioned using the lower button on the Cable Tray Components form, or by using any
selection from the Modify, Position or Orientate options from the Cable Tray Application menu.
© Copyright 2013
20
www.aveva.com
2.10 Arrive and Leave Points
Cable tray components have P–points (similar to those for equipment primitives). The significance of P–points
is two–fold. First, they define the connection points, and second, they determine the branch flow through the
component by means of Arrive and Leave attributes.
For the reducer shown below, the large end is at P1 and the small end is at P2. If this component is used to
increase the width of the branch, the flow in the direction of the branch will be from P2 to P1. In order to specify
in the flow direction in AVEVA E3D, set the two numeric attributes, Arrive and Leave, to the p–point numbers
required. In this case, Arrive would be set to 2 and Leave would be set to 1. (The default is Arrive 1 Leave 2).
Reducer Bends
Elbows or Risers
Tees
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 1 - Create a Cable Tray
Prior to creating a cable tray the correct hierarchy must be present in the Model Explorer. Navigate to the
SITE-CABLE-AREA03 level and then create a new ZONE named ZONE-CTRAY-CONTROL-AREA03.
Add SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA03 to the 3D view.
Create the Cable Tray Main CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL and set the specification to VANTRUNK-SW5-SS.
Position the Head W 288500mm, N 311000mm, U 104310mm and the Tail W 288500.0mm, N 289000.0mm,
U 104310.0mm.
Set the width as 600mm for the Head and 450mm for the Tail and the direction to S for the Head and N for
the Tail.
Set the connection to Open for both Head and Tail.
Create a tee component by working forward from the Head position. Ensure the Auto Connect check box is
selected then add a 600.00mm bore 300.00mm bend radius Tee to the head of the branch. Set the tray
direction to U. The branch should look like this in ISO 1:
© Copyright 2013
22
www.aveva.com
CHAPTER 2
2 Clash Detection
One of the principal reasons for building a 3D model of a plant in AVEVA E3D is the ability to detect clashes
and thus produce a design that is as ‘clash free’ as possible.
Whilst a completely clash free design is almost impossible to achieve, it is many times more expensive to
resolve clashes during the fabrication, assembly or erection phase than it is in the design phase.
2.1 Overview of AVEVA E3D Clash Detection
Project wide ‘clash runs’ are normally made at frequent intervals during the design process. They are
generally timed events, set-up by the System or Project Administrator, and run during non-working hours.
This type of clash detection enables clash reports to be produced and certain clashes to be ‘approved’ so
that they are not reported again unless specifically requested. This type of clash detection is outside the
scope of this training guide.
AVEVA E3D also provides the user with interactive clash facilities so that clashes may be detected during
creation or modification of model elements, or retrospectively, following completion of a particular part of the
design (prior to it being checked or approved). These types of clashes cannot be approved.
There is no ‘magic button’ that resolves clashes. Clash detection is passive. Clashes will be reported when
asked, but actions that may cause a clash are not prevented. Therefore, if clashes are found in the design
steps must be taken to resolve them.
2.2 Obstruction Values
All model primitives and all catalogue primitives have an Obstruction attribute (Obst) that define the
physical type of obstruction the primitive represents. For catalogue items the Obstruction attribute value is
determined during the creation of the catalogue item. For design primitives (e.g. a primitive used in
equipment building and structural panels) the value is set by the user.
The Obstruction attribute may have one of three integer values: 2, 1 or 0.
 Obstruction = 2 – a hard obstruction. This value represents a solid element and is generally used for
‘real’ objects such as a piece of equipment, a steel beam, a pipe component, etc.
 Obstruction = 1 – a soft obstruction. This value represents a volume that is not solid but should be
kept clear for access purpose. This value is generally used for access/escape routes, valve wheel
access, stair headroom, tube bundle withdrawal volumes, etc.
 Obstruction = 0 – no obstruction. This value represents a freely accessible volume. It is generally used
for simplified structural profile definitions, etc.
In addition to the obstruction types defined by the Obstruction attribute, Insulation is treated as a special
obstruction type in its own right.
Copyright © 2013. 9 www.aveva.com

Model Utilities TM-1802
2.3 Classes of Clash
As well as the three types of clashing item, i.e. hard, soft and insulation, AVEVA E3D uses three classes of
clash depending on three values that may be set by the user, i.e. Overlap, Gap and Clearance.
The three classes of clash are:
 Physical Clash – the primitive volumes overlap by more than the Overlap value.
 Touch – the primitives either overlap by less than the Overlap value or are separated at their closest
point by less than the Gap value.
 Clearance – the primitives are separated at their closest point by more than the Gap value but less
than the Clearance value.
In the following scenarios the values are set to: Overlap = 5mm, Gap = 2mm and Clearance = 8mm.
 Care should be taken when setting the values for overlap, gap and clearance as, both individually and
in combination, they can make an enormous difference to the number of clashes detected.
 Scenario 1 - primitives overlap by more than 5mm, a clash is reported.
 Scenario 2 - primitives overlap, but by less than 5mm, a touch is reported.
 Scenario 3 - primitives do not overlap but are separated by less than 2mm, a touch is reported.
 Scenario 4 - primitives are separated by more than 2mm but by less than 8mm, a clearance is
reported.
If the primitives are separated by more than 8mm then no interference is found.
 The Clearance value, if set, must be greater than the touch Gap value. Setting the Clearance value to 0
switches off the clearance checking function.
2.4 How AVEVA E3D Reports Clashes
Physical clashes, touches and clearances occur between two elements. The element that is being checked
is known as the Clash Item and the element that interferes with it is known as the Obstruction Item.
When clashes, touches and clearances are reported the class of clash is prefixed by the type of obstruction
of the Clash Item and the Obstruction Item. The Clash Item is always specified first, for example:
 HHHard/Hard – the Obst value of both the Clash Item and Obstruction Item is 2.
 HS Hard/Soft – the Obst value of the Clash Item is 2 and Obst value of the Obstruction Item is 1.

 HI Hard/Insulation - the Obst value of the Clash Item is 2 and the Obstruction Item is insulation.
 SS Soft/Soft – the Obst value of both the Clash Item and Obstruction Item is 1.
 SH Soft/Hard - the Obst value of the Clash Item is 1 and Obst value of the Obstruction Item is 2.
 SI Soft/Insulation - the Obst value of the Clash Item is 1 and the Obstruction Item is insulation.
 II Insulation/Insulation – both the Clash Item and the Obstruction Item are insulation.
 IH Insulation/Hard – the Clash Item is insulation and the Obst value of the Obstruction Item is 2.
 IS Insulation/Soft – the Clash Item is insulation and the Obst value of the Obstruction Item is 1.
Therefore, interferences may be reported as HH Clash, HH Touch, HH Clearance, HS Clash, HS, Touch, HS
Clearance, etc.
Clashes between the following pairs of items are not reported:
 Primitives belonging to the same equipment.
 Two structure or substructure primitives having the same owner.
 Two piping components that are connected.
 A piping component and the nozzle to which it is connected.
 Any component or primitive that has its obstruction value set to 0.
2.5 Setting Clash Options
The number of clashes reported during a clash check depends greatly on the options chosen and the values
of the parameters discussed previously. Functionality relating to clashing is accessed from the Check group
when working in discipline specific modules.
The Clashes view can be accessed by navigating to the HOME tab and selecting Clashes > Clashes from
the Check group, this will open a new 3D view alongside the current view called Clashes. It is worth noting
that when the Clashes view current forms will remain open and may overlap the Clashes form. At this point
it is often helpful to hide all other forms; forms may be hidden by pressing F2 key or by pressing the Clear
Canvas button, located in the top right of the window. Pressing F2 or the clear canvas button again will
return all previously open forms.
The Clashing options are located on the Options tab.

Tolerances provide settings for Touch Gap, Overlap and Clearance are set by entering the required
values in the appropriate textboxes.
Clash options determine the behaviour of the clash checking operation, with the following settings.
Touches are option list enables the user to specify whether touches (and clearances) are to be Included or
Ignored.
The Clashes within Branch options list enables the user to specify how Branches are checked and has the
following options:
 are Included – this option runs the ACHECK function which performs a primitive-by-primitive check of
every component in each branch.
 are Ignored – this option ignores clashes within individual Branches but reports clashes between items
in different Branches.
 Ignore Adjacent – this option runs the BCHECK function which is a simplified check that ignores the
possibility of clashes between certain pairs of components within the Branches.
 The ACHECK and BCHECK functions are part of the DESCLASH command set. See the help files for
details of these commands.
The Connections options list enables the user to control clash checking at steelwork junctions. Clashes
between sections and attached joints are ignored automatically. However, if end preparations at steelwork
joints have been left until late in the design process, clash reporting at connections may be inhibited using
the following options:
 are Included – (default) includes all steelwork connections.
 are Ignored – ignores all steelwork connections.
 With Spec. are Ignored – ignores only those connections that have specifications, i.e. the SJOIs Spref
attribute is set.
The Clash Midpoint Position checkbox enables the position of the clash to be more accurately determined.
By default, the reported position of a clash depends on which part of the overlapping region is first detected.
In most cases this identifies with sufficient accuracy the clash. Checking the Clash Midpoint Position

checkbox makes the reported clash position the centre of a box surrounding the overlapping region. Using
this option will give more reproducible results but may be slower.
The Clash Colours determine the colour of the Clash Item, Obstruction Item and background Colour when
the clashes are displayed in the 3D view. Clicking the Major Clash Items button displays the Major Clash
Items Colour form, clicking the Obstruction Items button displays the Minor Clash Items Colour form and
clicking the View Background button displays the View Background Colour form. The required colour
may be selected from the palette and clicking Cancel on any of the forms sets the colour selection.
Presentation defines how the clash information is displayed.
Group Clash/Obstruction – if checked groups the clashes grid on the Clashes tab by clash and
obstruction item.
Clash Item Aid – if checked displays aid label within the 3D view detailing the name of the clash item.
Clash Obstruction Aid – if checked displays an aid label within the 3D view detailing the name of the
obstruction item.
Clash Position Aid – if checked displays an aid label within the 3D view detailing the position of the clash
using the current session coordinates.
Clashes Ignored Within enables clashes within certain elements to be ignored, but still report clashes
between different elements. Each applicable element type is shown with an adjacent checkbox. Checking a
box next to an element type will cause clashes within that element to be ignored. If the box is left
unchecked then clashes are included.
Clashes can be ignored within the following elements:
PIPE Pipework STRU Structure
BRAN Branch SUBS Sub-Structure
PTRA Pipe Track FRMW Framework
HANG Hanger SBFR Sub-Framework
REST Restraint SCTN Section
EQUI Equipment GENSEC Generic Section
TMPL Template PCOJ Primary Collinear Joint
CWBRAN Cableway Branch PLTFRM Platform
CPANEL Curved Panel SITE Site
HPANEL Hull Panel ZONE Zone
STRFLT Stair Flight HANDRA Handrail
RLADDR Rung Ladder
The Save/Restore frame allows the saving of current or retrieval of previous clash checking options.

The Reset System Defaults button resets the form settings to the system defaults which are read from a
system file when AVEVA E3D is opened.
The Save button saves the current option settings to a user options file.
The Restore button reads the saved user options file and sets the options accordingly.
2.6 Specifying What to Clash Check Against
Having set the clash options the items to clash check against must be specified. The items to check against
may be specified by an Obstruction list of explicit elements or by setting clash limits where all elements
within those limits are used.
2.6.1 Obstruction List
Selecting the Obstructions/Exclusions tab on the clashes form displays the Obstructions and Exclusions
Lists.
This tab defines which elements will be used to clash against. This can be performed in two ways. By
explicitly selecting all the obstructions to clash against, or by excluding the specific elements that will not be
clashed against.
The top half of the tab is the Obstructions list, where the obstructions the checked item(s) will be clashed
against are specified. The default content of the list is All, meaning that all Design items in the MDB will be
used to check against.
There are several ways in which items may be added or removed from the list. However, with All set, no
other elements can be added to the Obstructions list. All must be removed before other elements can be
added.
The Add button works in conjunction with the adjacent options list which has the following options:
 Current Element – with this option, clicking the Add button adds the CE to the Obstructions list.
 Pick Element – with this option, clicking the Add button displays the prompt ‘Pick element to Add’.
The required elements are graphically picked from the 3D view and are highlighted. Pressing the Esc
key will add the picked items to the Obstructions list.

 Current Selection – with this option, clicking the Add button adds all elements selected in the 3D view
to the Obstructions List. Multiple items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key when picking from
the 3D View.
 Current Collection – with this option set, clicking the Add button adds the contents of the current
collection to the Obstructions list.
 All – with this option set, clicking the Add button removes any elements currently in the Obstructions
list and replaced it with the key word All, meaning all elements within the MDB will be checked against.
The Remove button removes the current selection from the Obstructions list. The button is only available
when a selection is made from the list.
The Clear button removes all items from the Obstructions list. A
confirmation box appears before the List is cleared.
Clicking Yes on the message clears the list. Clicking No will cancel the
operation and retain the List.
 When an element is added to the Obstruction List, all elements and primitives below the specified item
(i.e. its members) are automatically incorporated in the list. If a Branch (or higher) element is added to
the Obstruction list, implied tube within the Branch is treated as part of the obstruction. If individual
piping components are added to the list, implied tubing connecting those components is not
automatically included and must be added explicitly if required.
The bottom half of the tab shows the Exclusions list, where the items selected are excluded from the clash
checking operation.
This list may be used to exclude specific elements from the clash check. For example, if the element’s
Owner has been included in the Obstruction list. Any elements in the Exclusion list will not be considered
during clash checking. The default Exclusion list is empty.
The Exclusions list options work the same as those for the Obstruction List; with the exception of the Add All
option as adding all items to the obstruction list would void the clash checking operation.
2.6.2 Clash Limits
By default, all parts of the model relevant to the current Obstruction List will be checked during a clash check
run. However, if the entire design is not required to be checked a restricted region of interest may be
specified using a Clash Limits box.
The Clash Limits box is defined from the Limits tab in the Clashes form.

The Limits tab enables two opposing corners of a box to be specified, defining the clash limits. The co-
ordinates of the box corners may be specified by entering values in the From and To textboxes.
Each co-ordinate direction can be swapped by selecting the drop down list adjacent to the relevant textbox.
A direction can be locked to preserve its value by checking the checkbox next to the relevant textbox.
The Clash Limits box may also be defined by using the Volume drop down list.
Current Element - this sets the Clash Limits box to the limits of the current element. The co-ordinates are
displayed in the relevant From and To textboxes.
Picked Elements – this displays the prompt ‘Pick element to add to list for enclosing box’. The required
elements are graphically picked from the 3D view and are highlighted. Pressing the Esc key will set the
Clash Limits box to the limits of the picked items. The co-ordinates are displayed in the relevant From and
To textboxes.
Defined by 2 picks - this displays the prompt ‘Pick First Clash Limit’ and activates the Positioning
Control form. This then allows the use of any of the positioning control functions to select the first, To,
corner of the limits box. Once the first point is picked the prompt is changed to ‘Pick Second Clash Limit’.
Once the second From point is selected the co-ordinates are displayed in the To and From textbox.
Current Selection – this sets the clash limits to all elements selected in the 3D view. Multiple items can be
selected by holding down the Ctrl Key when picking from the 3D View. The co-ordinates are displayed in the
relevant From and To textboxes.
Current Collection - This sets the clash limits to all elements contained within the current collection. The
co-ordinates are displayed in the relevant From and To textboxes.
 For a clash to be reported, both items involved in the clash must lie wholly or partially within the Clash
Limits box. A clash between items that lie partially within the Clash Limits box will always be reported,
even if the point at which they clash occurs outside the box.
The Clear button can be used at any time to reset all values from the To and From textboxes to 0.
The Display checkbox is used to toggle on and off an aid representation of the limits box. The aid shows the
clash limits as a wireframe box and marks the To and From corners of the limits box with aid labels.

2.7 Auto Clash
Auto Clash may be turned on by selecting HOME > Check > Clashes > Auto Clash button. When
Auto Clash is switched On, a clash check is carried out at the end of every command in which an
element has been modified in some way that could cause a clash to occur, for example:
 When a new element has been created.
 When an element's position and/or orientation has been changed.
 When an element's geometry has been changed.
Each clash check is carried out using the current clash options and Obstructions/Exclusions Lists. If the
Obstruction List is extensive, Auto Clash may have a small overhead in performance so it is good practice to
consider the contents of the Obstruction List or restrict the volume being considered using a Clash Limits
box. Auto Clash is very useful where a few new items are to be added to an existing design which has
already been checked for clashes.
Auto Clash starts checking when it is switched On. Any clashes that have occurred before that time are not
considered. Similarly, Auto Clash stops checking as soon as it is switched Off. Any clashes that occur after
that time are not considered.
When a clash is detected the Clash Item and Obstruction Item are highlighted in the colours specified in the
Clash Options. If a clashing element is already in the Drawlist it will be highlighted in the appropriate colour.
If the element is not currently displayed, it will be added to the Drawlist automatically, in the default visible
colour, and will then be highlighted in the appropriate colour. The element stays highlighted until another
clash is found, until all graphical highlighting is specifically removed, or the clash is resolved.
The results of each clash check replace those of any previous checks, so any reported clashes must result
from the actions of the last command. The user’s attention will normally focus on the current element, so
graphical highlighting is used to show the clash, rather than outputting the clash data to file.

 In order to avoid spurious clash reports when a new Branch is created, the last section of implied tube
in a Branch is checked only if the Branch LTAI attribute is set to True. (The LTAI attribute is set
automatically when the Branch Tail is positioned).
The clash-checking rules are as follows:
 If the current element is a Piping Component and is the last component in the Branch, then its leave
tube is checked only if the Branch LTAI attribute is set to True.
 If the current element is a Branch which has no members, then the tube which constitutes the Branch is
checked only if the Branch LTAI attribute is set to True.
2.8 Clasher
In addition to Auto Clash, AVEVA E3D provides the user with interactive clash detection utility which may be
used at any time. If Auto Clash is not used, it is good practice to use this utility whenever a significant part of
the model has been completed so that any errors in the design can be resolved before impacting on other
model elements.
Selecting HOME > Check > Clashes > Clashes displays the Clashes view. Clash information is found on
the Clashes tab.
The Clashes form, allows a graphical display of clashes and a Clash List of all the clashes found during the
clash check.
Clash checking and viewing of the results is controlled by the form tabs and the 3D view pop-up menu, as
described in the sections that follow.
 For use of the 3D View controls and functionality refer to the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D™
Foundations training guide.
2.8.1 The Clashes Form
The Clashes form contains options to initiate a clash check and modify the 3D view to show the clash. It
has the following options.
 Check CE – this option initiates a clash check of the CE against the Obstruction List.

 It is good practice to initiate clash checks on small items, e.g. a Pipe or Branch, a FRMW or SBFR, etc.,
so that the displayed results are manageable.
 Check – this option initiates a clash check of the Element defined in the adjacent text box against the
Obstruction List. An element Name can be directly entered into the textbox for checking.
The Clip Box check box toggles a clip volume within the 3D view. If checked the 3D view is clipped around
the position of the clash. The size of the clip box is defined by the text box adjacent to the checkbox. The
default value is 2000mm. This can be changed by entering a value or by using the slider. As the slider is
moved to the right the value in the box is increased and the 3D view is updated. Likewise moving the slider
to the left decreases the value within the textbox.
If the Clip Box checkbox is unchecked then the entire of the current drawlist will be displayed in the 3D
view.
 Any elements which are checked are automatically added to the current drawlist. Likewise any
obstructions found to be clashing with a checked item are also added to the current drawlist.
The Clashes form also displays the details of the current clash selected in the Clashes Grid. This is shown
as a label at the top of the form. The details shown update as the user navigates between clashes.
2.8.1.1 Clash Grid

The Clashes tab displays the resulting information following a clash check and allows the viewing and
organising of the results and navigation to the Clash and Obstruction Items.
The clash information is displayed within the Clashes Grid. The information within the grid is displayed with
the following headings.
 Clash number.
 Clash – Checked / Obstruction Item, i.e. HH or HS.
 Clash Type.
 Clash Item (Checked Item).
 Obstructer.
 Clashed low level elements.
 Clash Easting.
 Clash Northing.
 Clash Elevation.
 Clash Owning Element.
 Obstruction Owning Element.
The clash results can be sorted and grouped by one or more column headings. To group by a heading click
and hold the left mouse button on the heading and drag the heading into the grey area above the grid.
Any of the columns can be filtered using the standard grid gadget filtering, utilising the options available in
the cell below the heading title.
Selecting a clash from the grid automatically updates the 3D view to display the current clash. The
information for the selected clash is also displayed at the top of the clashes form.

The Navigate check box defines the relationship between the clashes grid and the Model Explorer.
Unchecked the explorer will remain unchanged as clashes are selected from the grid. If checked it activates
the adjacent drop down menu. This has two options:
 Clash Item – selecting this option will navigate to the Clash Item in the Model Explorer for the clash
highlighted in the clash gird and make it the CE.
 Obstruction Item – selecting this option will navigate to the Obstruction Item in Model Explorer for the
clash highlighted in the clash grid and make it the CE.
Right clicking anywhere in the clash grid shows a pop-up menu with two methods for the export of the clash
grid information.
Print Preview – Opens the standard print preview form allowing the page setup to be defined and the grid
printed.
Save to Excel – Prompts the user to browse to a file location and save the grid as a Microsoft Excel, .xls,
file. This then saves the file to the selected location.
 Any grouping or filtering applied to the grid is maintained within the export. However the print preview
only displays the group titles and not the lower information. Excel export provides all the grid
information in the same format as the grid gadget.
2.8.1.2 Clash Reporting

The clasher utility has the ability to generate a text report of the clash checking results. The reporting
functionality is located on the Report tab of the Clashes form.

The default setting when running a clash check is not to create a report. When this is the case the report
options are inactive. By checking the Report to file when checking for clashes checkbox the clash
checker will automatically create a report of its results and the options for this report are then activated.
The Position frame sets the presentation of the clash position.
World – Reports the position with respect to the world origin.
Site – Reports the position with respect to the owning site of the clash item.
Off – Position of clash is not reported.
The Duplicate frame sets the option for reporting clashes which appear multiple times within a clash check.
When clash checking it is possible for an obstruction in one clash to be the clash item in another. As such it
is possible for an item to be a both a clash item and an obstruction item and thus the same clash is reported
twice. These options allow the report to take this into account.
First – Reports only the first element within the clash and ignores the second.
Second – Reports only the second occurrence of the clash and ignores the first.
Both - Reports the first and second clash occurrences.
The Levels frame sets the types of clashes that will be reported.
Clashes – Will report any physical clashes found.
Clearances – Will report any clearance clashes found.
Touches – Will report any touch clashes found.
The Report Format frame allows the report layout to be customised.
Header – Adds header information to the top of the report such as Date and Time of clash check; the types
of clash reported; any non-default checking options and limits; the touch and clearance limits; any special
reporting options in use. An example is shown below.
Date 11 Mar 2013 Time 10:03

Report on All CLASHES TOUCHES CLEARANCES in:-
ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01
Touches defined as 2mm overlap to 0mm gap

No clearance defined
Branch check option ACHECK selected
Clashes included between connected SECTIONs
Clashes ignored within GENSEC, TMPL, CWBRAN, PLTFRM, SCTN, PCOJ, SITE, ZONE,
EQUI, CSURPX, CPANEL, HPANEL, STRFLT, RLADD
R, HANDRA
Primary clashes only are reported
All items specified as obstructions
Main Body – Details of the clashes found, including the clash type and extent and the identifiers of the two
design items involved. The clashes are grouped into sections, one for each significant element that
contains interference. An example is shown below.
ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01
PIPE /100-B-1
BRANCH /100-B-1/B1
1 HH =16410/37 FLANGE 2 with
=16432/513 BOX 4 of TMPLATE 1 of :PUMP /P1502B
AT WORLD COORDINATES W307299 N303517 U100557

Numbering – Adds the relevant clash number from the clash grid to the clash main body within the report.
Primary - Reports only the first or highest priority clash found between two significant elements (i.e.
suppresses multiple clashes, including those between different primitives of the same pairs of significant
elements).
Obstruction – Adds the obstruction list to the header information.
Reference – Adds database reference numbers to the clash and obstruction items in the main body.
Clash Summary – Lists the total number of clashes of each type found; the total number of elements
checked and the number of elements found to be interference free. If the Primary option was selected the
summary will be divided into the Primary clash summary and the Actual Clash summary. An example of this
is shown below.
***PRIMARY CLASH SUMMARY***

35 hard/hard clashes
1 hard/soft clashes
30 hard/hard touches
87 significant elements checked
48 significant elements interference free
***ACTUAL CLASH SUMMARY***

2 hard/soft clashes
The Listing frame allows a list of the selected element types that are checked to be incorporated into the
report. Checking the List Elements checkbox activates the list. The default value for all element types is
On. Clicking on a row in the list toggles the Check column On or Off.
The destination and name of the report file can be set via the Report to file frame. The default destination
and file name is, %AVEVA_DESIGN_USER%/MyReport.txt. This can be changed by typing in the required
filename and path or by navigating to the required location using the Browse button. This opens a standard
windows dialogue box, where the required location and filename can be entered.
 The AVEVA_DESIGN_USER folder can be thought of as a storage area for settings, files and defaults
created or setup by the user. The information held in the folder may interact with many aspects of
AVEVA E3D but is essentially independent of the programmes function. The AVEVA_DESIGN_USER
folder is typically located at C:\Users\Public\Documents\AVEVA\USERDATA.
The Reset System Defaults button resets the form settings to the system defaults which are read from a
system file when AVEVA E3D is opened.
The Save button saves the current user options.
The Restore button reads the saved user options file and sets the options accordingly.

Exercise 1 Clash Detection
Add the ZONE named /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 below the SITE /SITE-PIPING-AREA01 to the 3D view.
Drag to 11 O’clock on the PowerWheelTM to set Limits to Extents.
Select HOME > Check > Clashes > Clashes to display the Clashes form. Navigate to the Options tab in
the Clashes form. Check the Clash Midpoint Position checkbox. Set the Major Clash Items colour to
Yellow and the Obstruction Items colour to Cyan.
Select the Obstructions/Exclusions tab to display the Obstructions and Exclusions list. Click the Clear
button on the Obstruction List, then the Yes button on the confirmation message box. The Obstruction List
should now be empty.
Navigate to the ZONE named /ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01. Ensure Current Element is selected from
the add obstructions drop down box and click the Add button. Note that the ZONE has been added to the
Obstructions List. Repeat the operation to add the ZONE named /ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the
Obstructions List.
Select the Clashes tab on the Clashes form to display the Clash List.
Navigate to PIPE 150-A-57 in the Model Explorer to make it the CE. Click the Check CE link label from the
main form. There should be two clashes displayed in the Clash List and the 3D View should have updated
to show a clipped view around the clash area.
Note that in the main 3D view a structural section, coloured Cyan has been added, indicating that it is the
Obstruction Item. Also note that the two tubes on the selected Pipe are coloured Yellow, indicating they
are the Clash Items.

Check the Navigate checkbox. Then select Obstruction from the dropdown list. Select the second clash
and note that the Obstruction Item (i.e. the GENSEC) is now the CE in the Model Explorer.
To resolve this clash it may be necessary to raise the pipe to clear the beam or, lower the beam to clear the
pipe. The resolution would need to be agreed between the disciplines.
Remove the ZONE named /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 and the ZONE named /ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01
from the 3D view.
Navigate to PIPE 100-B-1 in the Model Explorer and again click the Check CE link label from the Clashes
form. There should be fifteen HH Touches in the Clash List. Sort by the results by the Clash Item column.
Select the fifth clash in the Clash List, i.e. HH TOUCH ELBOW 9 OF BRANCH /100-B-1/B1 (tube). The
detail of the clash can be found by sliding the grid gadget across to reveal all the columns in the grid. An
overview of the selected clash can be seen at the top of the clashes form.
This clash is a ‘touch’ between the leave tube of ELBOW 9 of the branch and a beam on ROW_J.
Select the North option on the PowerCompassTM to look north, then zoom in so that the touch between the
tube and the structural section is clearly shown:

This clash is classed as a touch because the default settings of Overlap 2, Gap 0 and Clearance 0 are
being used. The tube is not overlapping the section but resting on it, therefore, it is not a Clash but a touch.
Select the Options tab to display the Clash Options. Modify the Touch Gap setting to 1 and the Clearance
setting to 5 and click the Save button.
Select the Clashes tab. Navigate to PIPE 100-B-1 in the Model Explorer again and select Check CE to re-
run the clash check with the new settings. Note that three clearances have been added to the Clash List,
demonstrating the importance of getting the clash settings right.
 Select the Report tab. To create a clash report during clash checking check the Report to file when
checking for clashes checkbox. Uncheck the Primary and Reference checkboxes, as all clashes will
be reported on but the database reference for each clash item is not required. Click the Save button.
 Select the Clashes tab and navigate to the ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 in the Model Explorer to
make it the CE. Select Check CE from the Clashes form. The form should now display a considerable
number of clashes. A text report detailing the clash check findings can be found in the
AVEVA_DESIGN_USER directory with the default name MyReport.txt.

The clash summary at the bottom of the report should be as below.

1 hard/soft clashes
30 hard/hard clearances
Note the total number of clashes and close the report.
Change the default Touch Gap and Clearance settings on the Options tab back to 0 and save them. With
the ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 as the CE, again select Check CE from the Clashes form. As the name
for the clash report was not changed the old text file is overwritten. The summary from the clash report
should now be as below, again note that the number of clashes has been reduced.

1 hard/soft clashes
Check PIPE 100-B-8 and decide how the clashes might be resolved.

CHAPTER 2
2 Overview of the Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Application
The Stairs, Ladders, and Handrails (SLH) application allows designers to create and modify detailed access
and demarcation components within 3D models. The application is integrated with other AVEVA E3D
structural utilities.
2.1 Principles Employed in the Application
There are a number of features employed in the AVEVA E3D SLH application.
 Standards and Defaults.
 Pre-defined assembly elements.
 Two representation modes.
 Progressive disclosure concepts.
2.1.1 Standards and Defaults
AVEVA E3D SLH utilises Standards and Defaults to control the creation of stair, ladder and handrail
elements within the 3D model.
The Standards used by AVEVA E3D SLH are a set of geometric constraints. National, project, or industry
standards can be used in the determination of geometry for stair, ladder, and handrail elements. Any
number of standards may be used in a project.
Defaults provide an interpretation of a referenced standard and allow SLH Administrators to implement
preferred working practises. This gives SLH Administrators control over the displayed and pre-populated
options within forms for a number of SLH elements.
The values used within a Default must comply with the maximum and minimum values of the Standard it
references. In addition, SLH Administrators may stipulate valid values for certain geometric parameters. For
example, the width between stair stringers may be limited to a series of values that coincide with the width of
supplied stair treads.
Defaults are also used to associate assemblies with standards. The range of elements available for
selection in the Creation and Modification forms will be governed by the Default selected.
Forms relating to the settings Standards and Defaults are only accessible to SLH Administrators. An
example of these forms and a typical user form referencing a default and standard are shown overleaf.
11
Copyright © 2013. www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D (2.1)
Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Modelling TM-1813
 Detailed guidance on the administration of the AVEVA E3D SLH application is provided in the
TM-1864 AVEVA Everything3D™ Stairs, Ladders and Handrail Administration training guide.
2.1.2 Assemblies
AVEVA E3D SLH utilises a range of pre-defined assemblies to represent SLH model elements. A number
of sample assemblies are provided. Further assemblies can be created using SLH assembly constructors in
conjunction with standard catalogue and template functionality. A typical assembly selection is displayed
below.
12
The ability to modify the representation of SLH elements is subject to the mode of operation being used and
the degree of customisation applied to user defined assemblies.
2.1.3 Representation Modes

The AVEVA E3D SLH application enables elements to be created in Layout mode or
Detail mode, as described in the following sections.
2.1.3.1 Layout Mode

Layout mode allows designers to implement a range of SLH elements, compliant to the referred standard,
without the need to specify an exact representation. The representation is intended as an indicative
display and its representation cannot be significantly modified by the user. The created elements do not own
traditional structural elements (e.g. sections, panels) and assemblies containing such elements cannot be
selected.
As with all SLH elements, aid graphics are used
to provide an initial representation of the
elements geometry, position and orientation.
Elements created in Layout mode can be clash

checked, reported on, and displayed in
drawings.
 Due to the use of default representations,

detailed Material Take Off reports cannot
be generated for items created in Layout
mode.
Elements created in Layout mode can be converted to fully detailed elements at a later stage.
13
2.1.3.2 Detail Mode

Detail mode enables designers to provide greater accuracy and representation to modelled elements. A
range of assembly options, governed by the default selected, allow the designer to view and select the exact
representation of the element. The range of assemblies available in detailed mode is controlled by the SLH
Administrator.
Model elements created in Detail mode cannot be converted to Layout mode. Equally, Layout mode
elements that are converted to Detail mode can never be reverted to Layout mode.
14
2.1.4 Progressive Disclosure
Progressive disclosure concepts are used to provide the user with suitable information and options at
appropriate times in the design process. The forms used in the AVEVA E3D SLH application are designed
to guide the user through the design process while still allowing flexibility to review previously entered
information and allow editing. Each form utilises a number of context sensitive pages reflected in the top
section of the form.
Visual references, as to progress through the design process,

are provided at the top of the form. Successfully completed
pages are marked with a blue tick, while outstanding
mandatory information is noted by an orange triangle. The
user can navigate between pages using Next and Back link
labels or by clicking the link labels relating to successfully
completed pages.
Where possible, feedback relating to options selected and

information entered is provided within the form.
In addition, any fields that cannot be populated are greyed out.
Where mandatory fields are not completed, or incorrect

information is entered into the form, the user will be prevented
from navigating to subsequent pages.
15
2.2 Accessing the AVEVA E3D SLH Application
AVEVA E3D SLH may be started by using the start menu icons or the desktop icons (provided both options
were selected on installation). Both methods display the E3D Login form.
After entering suitable login credentials the E3D interface is displayed.
16
The SLH application is accessed by selecting STRUCTURES from the discipline

options list on the Quick Access Toolbar. The four tabs that make up the
STRUCTURES discipline are displayed.
The STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAIL tab contains the SLH application specific
functions.
 The STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAIL tab will generally be referred to as the SLH tab in this training
guide.
2.3 The SLH User Interface
As with many other AVEVA E3D applications, SLH is a Microsoft® Office Fluent™– based user interface.
A series of tabs are displayed at the top of the screen. Some tabs are common across all design disciplines,
while other tabs are specific to the application being used. The STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAIL tab is one of
four tab in the STRUCTURES discipline and is the focal point for creation and modification of SLH elements.
Within the STAIRS LADDERS HANDRAIL tab, key functions are held in Groups (e.g. Create, Modify,
Tools). Specific functions are invoked by clicking the appropriate button in each group.
Once the user clicks the required button a task form will be displayed. The form will usually be docked to the
right hand side of the UI.
17
2.4 SLH Form Layout and Features
Throughout the AVEVA E3D SLH application, common form layout and features have been used, an
overview of which is given in the following sections. The general layout of both the Create and Modify forms
are the same.
The top section of the form allows Representation Mode

selection and displays the pages to be completed as part
of the creation process. The number of pages will vary with
both the element type and Representation Mode being
used.
The mid-section of the form allows users to enter

information pertinent to the page being considered. This
may consist of text fields, graphical selection processes,
and checkbox options.
The lower section of the form provides summary

information (when available) and provides action buttons
and link labels to facilitate the creation or modification
process.
 A small number of forms available within the application do not adhere to the common functions. Where
this is the case additional explanation will be provided in the relevant section of the guide.
18
Some fields or buttons in the forms may be inactive.

Inactive fields or buttons are greyed out and usually arise
as a result of:
 Missing mandatory information in a page.
 Geometry errors in component creation.
 Default settings made by an Administrator.
On successful completion of a page the text displaying the name of the page in the top part of the form
changes to become a link label. This allows the user to navigate between completed pages and edit any
previous settings.
Similar functionality is reflected in the summary frame at the bottom of the form. Successfully selected
geometry parameters change to link labels; allowing the user to navigate to the appropriate page and edit
the parameter.
19
Some other common form functions are explained below:
Mandatory – indicates mandatory information is still required.
Completed – indicates that mandatory information is completed.
Autonaming – names the element being created using pre-defined naming rules.
Show Dimension – displays a graphical aid showing the geometry parameter being considered.
Checkbox – Allows users to toggle options in forms.
Flip – allows the user to change the direction of the element.
Next – link label that takes the user to the next page of the form.
Back – link label that takes the user to the previous page of the form.
20
2.5 Data Hierarchy and Element Types
The data hierarchy employed by SLH is similar to that used by other structural utilities. A brief overview of
the SLH hierarchy is provided below.
Before physical model elements can be created a number of administrative elements must be in place.
Administrative elements divide the model into structured areas and own the geometric elements that make
up the physical representation of the model.
As with all AVEVA E3D databases, the uppermost element is the World represented symbolically as /*.
SITE and ZONE elements are also required to own hierarchy elements relating to the structural disciplines.
Typical Stairs, Ladders, and Handrail Hierarchy
Structure (STRU), Framework (FRMW), or Sub-frame (SBFR) elements are all legal owners of SLH
elements. Within the SLH hierarchy further administrative elements exist for Handrail (HANDRA), Stair
Flights (STRFLT), and Ladders (RLADDR).
The data components owned by these items will vary depending on the mode used to create the elements
and the type of SLH element created.
 Mode and element specific hierarchies are provided in relevant chapters.
21
22
CHAPTER 3
3 Cableways
3.1 Cableway Overview
Cableways are the first phase in the creation of the Cabling System. A network of Cableway branches can be
owned by a Cableway.
Cableway Branches serve four main purposes:
 They define the start and finish points of a Cableway branch route (known as Head and Tail in AVEVA
E3D).
 They own route path elements which define the route of a Cableway branch in 3D view.
 They are used to route cables through them.
 They are used to place Cableway material (ladder/tray) elements based on its physical path
3.2 Cableway Hierarchy
Cableways (CWAY’s) as mentioned above can own any number of Cableway Branches, and the Cableway
Branch in turn has a number of elements, that combine to give it Start and Ends, Materials and its actual path
around the plant.
For Cableway modelling, the element types used below a CWAY listed below, and will be explained in more
detail as the training guide progresses.
CWBRAN Cableway branch RATTA Route attachment point
CTMTRL Cable tray material RTFEAT Route feature
CTSTRA Cable tray straight RNODE Route node
CTTEE Cable tray tee TATTA Tail attachment point
CTBEND Cable tray bend HATTA Head attachment point
CTRISE Cable tray riser RPATH Route path
CTRAY Cable tray POINTR Route Point
CONSEQ Connection Sequence

19
3.3 Creating a Cableway - A Worked Example
To create a Cableway, click the Cableway button

located under the Create group on the CABLING
SYSTEM tab. This will display the Cableway Create
Tasks form.
Alternatively, activate the PowerWheel, click on the

Cable tile and select Cableway. This will also display the
Cableway Create Tasks form.
In the Cableway Name textbox enter CWAY-AREA03-

POWER and press the Return key.
Set the Description to Area03 Power Cableway and

Purpose to CABL.
Click the Create Cableway link label.
This will create the CWAY element under the nominated

Cableway Storage Area (ZONE-CWAY-AREA03) which
was set in Exercise 1, and display the Cableway Branch
Create Tasks form.
In the Model Explorer, the Cableway is displayed under

the ZONE-CWAY-AREA03.
© Copyright 2013
3.4 Creating a Cableway Branch
After the Cableway has been created, the Cableway

Branch Create Tasks form is displayed. This can also be
loaded through clicking the Branch button located in the
Create group on the tab, or activating the PowerWheel,
clicking on the Cable tile and select Branch.
From this form the Branch Attributes can be set (shown

below).
Along with the Branch’s Volume Size, it’s Head (Start) and
End (Tail) positions and the way in which it will be routed.
Checking the Create Orthogonal Route sets the

Cableway route to follow an orthogonal route from Head to
Tail.
The Direction Sequence option allows the user to specify
the order in which the orthogonal route will be created.
It is important to ensure that the Direction Sequence and

the Open Direction are compatible (e.g. an Open Direction
of U could be invalid if the Direction Sequence was set to
U-N-E or U-E-N); otherwise a warning message will be
displayed.
3.4.1 Cableway Branch - Attributes
Cableway Branches have a number of attributes which can be defined upon creation. These attributes are
outlined below along with some examples.
Description, Function, and Purpose – general fields for the user to add the basic Branch information.
Beta Angle – this is the angle of rotation of the Cableway.
© Copyright 2013
Beta Angle = 90 Beta Angle = 0
Bend Radius – this is the bend radius that will be applied to the Cableway when created and also when
the Cableway is dressed with material.
Bend Radius = 300 Bend Radius = 600
Open Direction – this is the direction of the open side of the Cableway once it is dressed with material.
Open Direction N Open Direction U Open Direction D
 The Open Direction corresponds to the first section of Cableway i.e. from the Head, as the software
uses this as a reference to calculate any changes in direction.
Justification – this allows the cableway to be justified in the horizontal plane (Left, Centre or Right) and
the vertical plane (Bottom, Centre or Top).
Justification = Bottom - Right Justification = Bottom - Centre Justification = Bottom - Left
Cable Excess (%) – this is to allow for sagging when the cable is supported on the Cableway, e.g. if cable
ladder is used, the cable will sag between the rungs.
© Copyright 2013
Maximum Fill (%) – this is the maximum fill level allowed on the Cableway. It is calculated based upon
cross sectional area.
Current Fill Level (%) – this is the current maximum fill level on a Cableway branch.
Cable Route Rule – This rule is used to control the type of cables that can be routed along the Cableway
i.e. (IClass EQ ‘POWER’). If the Cable Route Rule only permits cables with an ICLASS of POWER to be
routed, then non-POWER cables will be routed on alternative Cableway branches. A more complex
example of this would be (ICLASS EQ ‘POWER’ AND FUNC EQ ‘HIGH VOLTAGE’) which again would
only allow cables with an ICLASS of POWER and Function of cable set to ‘HIGH VOLTAGE’. This can be
modified to any valid PML1 expression.
Standard IClass – this allows a predefined Route Rule to be selected
 The IClass (interference class) attribute set by the Cable Route Rule is very important. This attribute,
if different on the cable and Cableway, will stop the cable from being routed.
Shape Volume Size – this allows the user to select between Rectangular and Circular and key in the
dimensions for either Width and Height or Diameter.
Shape = Rectangular Shape = Circular
© Copyright 2013
3.4.2 Connections and Positioning
There are a variety of options for positioning and/or connecting the Head or Tail of a Cableway Branch.
Connect From: and Connect To: both have drop down lists containing five options:
Explicit – allows a position co-ordinate to be defined. User may

also pick a position using the Pick Head Position… link-label
and picking position from 3D view.
Head of Cableway Branch – allows the Branch Head/Tail to be

positioned at the head of a selected Cableway branch. The user
is prompted to ‘Pick CWBRAN’ from 3D view. Once picked, the
position co-ordinates and the connection references are
automatically updated for Head/Tail.
Tail of Cableway Branch – allows the Branch Head/Tail to be

positioned at the tail of the selected Cableway branch. The user
is prompted to ‘Pick CWBRAN from 3D view. Once picked, the
position co-ordinates and the connection references are
automatically updated for Head/Tail.
Branch Off – allows users to position branch Head/Tail at a

selected point on an existing Cableway branch. The user is
prompted to ‘Pick the segment on which the branch should
connect’. Once picked, a route attachment point is
automatically created at the picked point and connection
references are automatically updated.
Route Attachment Point – allows user to position and connect

Branch Head/Tail at a selected route attachment point. The user
is prompted to ‘Pick RATTA’. Once a RATTA has been picked,
the connection references are automatically updated.
 Route Attachment points are covered in detail later in the

training course.
© Copyright 2013
3.4.3 Creating a Cableway Branch – A Worked Example
The following example demonstrates how to create a Cableway branch using some of the connecting and
positioning options discussed before.
Navigate to the CWAY-AREA02-POWER under the ZONE-CWAY-AREA02 in the Model Explorer and add
this to the 3D view. The new branch to be created is highlighted in blue as shown.
From the tab, under the Create group, click the Branch button to
display the Cableway Branch Create Tasks form.
Expand the Attributes foldup panel and set the following attributes.
Set a Bend Radius to 600mm, and Open Direction to S WRT /*.
Set the Direction Sequence to U-N-E.
Enter the position settings for the Branch Head using Explicit position
co-ordinates as shown below.
West 289250.00mm North 289493.00mm Up 102902.00mm
As the branch tail is connected to a head of another Cableway branch,

set the Branch Tail Connect To: Head of Cableway Branch. A
Prompt is displayed to ‘Pick CWBRAN’
Pick CWAY-AREA02-POWER_B1 as shown above from the 3D view.
An aid line is created between the Head and Tail displaying the
proposed path of the Cableway branch.
Click the Create Cableway Branch link label. The new Cableway
branch is now displayed in the 3D View and in the Model Explorer. The
Cableway Branch Create Tasks form is also updated to display the
Branch Tasks form.
© Copyright 2013
3.4.4 Explaining the Cableway Branch
The new Cableway Branch will look as shown below.
Beneath the CWBRAN element is a selection of additional elements.
Routing Feature (RTFEAT) – Owns the Route Node (RNODE) elements. The two Route Nodes created
are auto named during the creation of the branch and they are positioned at the Head and the Tail of the
Cableway Branch. These provide the entry and exit points for cables. Route Nodes and their various
purposes are covered in more detail later in this chapter.
Head Attachment Point (HATTA) – Start (Head) reference point used for cable routing and branch
connections
Tail Attachment Point (TATTA) – Tail (End) reference point used for cable routing and branch connections.
Route Path (RPATH) – Owns the route points (POINTR) elements. These define the path that the branch
takes. They provide the position and the order of the route as well as Bend Radius information. The image
below shows the location of the POINTR’s for this branch.
© Copyright 2013
3.5 Branch Tasks
This Branch Tasks form is automatically displayed on clicking the Create Cableway Branch link label on
the Cableway Branch Create Tasks form. Alternatively, this form can also be displayed by selecting the
Branch Tasks option under the Branch button options list, located under the Tools group on the Cabling
System tab.
There are a variety of tasks that can be found on the Branch Tasks form and are as explained below.
Define Path / Route… – allows the user to create and

modify route points.
Create Route Node… – allows the user to create and

modify route nodes.
Create Route Attachment Points… – allows the user to

create route attachment points.
Delete Branch – displays a Confirm message dialogue

box before deleting the branch.
Disconnect Branch – allows a selected branch to be

disconnected from the connection points.
Check Connections… – displays the Cableway

Branch Connection form (covered later in the course).
Dressing… – displays the Create Material form

(covered later in the course).
© Copyright 2013
3.6 Creating a Route Attachment Point
A Route Attachment point (RATTA) is a reference point which is used to allow branches to be connected at
a position other than the branch Head/Tail. The RATTA element sits beneath the Connection Sequence
(CONSEQ) element which is owned by the CWBRAN.
The main information held by the attributes of the RATTA, is the name of the POINTR it was positioned
from and the offset distance from that point.
The Route Attachment Points Create Tasks form is displayed by clicking the Create Route Attachment
Points… link label on the Branch Tasks form or by selecting the Attachment option under the Route
button options list, located under the Create group on the tab.
The form allows the position of the RATTA to be defined.

It also allows the user to select whether a new RATTA is
being created, or an existing one modified.
Reference Point: – allows the user to select a Reference

Point or to use the Pick… link to graphically pick a position
on the branch. The Reference Points are the POINTR
elements on a cableway branch.
Offset Distance: – this is the offset distance in the flow

direction from the selected reference point. This is
populated by keying in the offset required or by using the
Pick… link and picking and offset distance from 3D view.
Move Offset: – this allows the user to increase/decrease

the offset distance by a specified value using the arrow
buttons.
Proportional Distance: – is a value between 0 and 1

where a value of 0.5 would be the midpoint between the
reference point and the next point.
Mode: - allows users to switch between Creation and

Modification mode.
Mark Route Points: - checkbox toggles the display of the

Route Point names in the 3D View.
© Copyright 2013
3.7 Creating a Route Attachment Point – A Worked Example

From the 3D View select the Cableway Branch created
in the example before, and then select the Attachment
option under the Route button options list, located
under the Create group on the tab.
On the Route Attachment Points Create Tasks form,

first ensure that Creation mode has been selected and
then change the Reference Point to 2 and enter an
Offset Distance of 15656.60mm. The <RATTA> label
along with an aid sphere is displayed at the selected
position.
Click the Create Route Attachment Point link label to

create the route attachment point.
The RATTA can also be seen in the Model

Explorer as well as the 3D view.
© Copyright 2013
Add the SITE-ELECTRICAL-AREA03 and

SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA03 to the 3D
view.
On the Route Attachment Points

Creation Tasks form, set the Reference
Point to 2 again, but this time select the
Pick… link label next to the Offset
Distance field.
Navigate to the Positioning Control

toolbar and set the Pick Type to Any and
the Pick Method to Snap.
Graphically select ST-003 (circled on the

left) from the 3D view.
The <RATTA> label should automatically be positioned in line with the equipment item. Click the Create
Route Attachment Point link label and close the form.
3.8 Creating a new branch from a Route Attachment Point – A Worked Example
Select the CWAY-AREA03-POWER Cableway

in the Model Explorer, and then click the Branch
button options, located under the Create group
on the tab to display the Cableway Branch
Create Tasks form.
Set the Open Direction to U WRT /*, Bend

Radius to 600mm and the Direction Sequence
to E-U-N.
Enter the position settings for the Branch Head using Explicit position co-ordinates West 303000mm,
North 305750mm and Up 105950mm. A <Head> label will now be displayed at the head position.
For the Branch Tail section of the form set the

Connect To in the pull down list to: Route
Attachment Point.
At the top of the graphical display area, the user

is prompted to ‘Pick RATTA:’
Using the cursor graphically pick the first RATTA

created in the previous worked example (RATTA
2). Press F11 on the keyboard to switch to
Wireline Mode to make the selection easier.
A <Tail> label will now be displayed at the tail

position.
© Copyright 2013
Click the Create Cableway Branch link label to complete the worked example. The final result should look as
shown below:
3.9 Define the Route / Path
The Define Path / Route Tasks form allows route points to be created and positioned on a Cableway branch.
This form can be displayed by clicking the Point option under the Route
button options list, located under the Create group on the tab. Alternatively
this form can be accessed through the PowerWheel; click the Point tile
located in the Cable sub menu.
There are a range of options for defining/modifying POINTRs.
Direction/Distance from Current Point – this shows the direction/

distance from the selected route point from the next route point in the list.
Route Point Position:

 Pick Position… – this allows the position of a route point on the
Cableway branch to be picked in the 3D view.
 Copy Previous – copies the position of the previous route point.
 Copy Next – copies the position of the next route point.
Mode - allows users to switch between Creation and Modification mode.
Fillet Radius – this sets the radius for the bend/riser
Backwards – Reverses the list of POINTR’s
Mark Route Points – Labels the POINTR’s in the 3D view.
Create Route Point / Apply Changes – creates/modifies the route point.
© Copyright 2013
3.9.1 Creating/Modifying the Route points – A Worked Example
The aim of this worked example is to re-route the Cableway branch such that it creates a TEE at the tail
rather than dropping down onto the connected branch. It will also help to demonstrate how to route a
Cableway. The completed branch should look as shown below.
First ensure that the Define Path / Route Tasks form is loaded, and Modification mode has been selected.
Tick the Mark Route Points checkbox to help see the POINTR’s in 3D view, and select POINTR 2 from the
Route Point list. The axes will appear at the position of the POINTR to aid with directional positioning.
The route point is currently position at W289250mm. This needs to be moved along in an East direction to
a co-ordinate of W292128mm as shown at the top of the page. A preview of the route will be displayed.
Select the Apply changes link label and the POINTR 2 will move to its new position.
© Copyright 2013
Next, a new POINTR element needs to be created on the same plane as the Tail (POINTR 3) to the East
of POINTR 2.
Switch to the Creation mode, and then select POINTR 2 from the Route Point list.
Enter a value of 291058mm for the West co-ordinate and tick the Lock checkbox.
As the North and Up co-ordinates are on the same plane as the Tail (POINTR 3), click Copy Next to copy
POINTR 3’s co-ordinates, into the new POINTR’s North and Up positions.
Enter the Fillet Radius with the value of 600mm.
Once again a preview of the route will be displayed.
Click the Create Route Point link label to finalise the route of the Cableway branch.
© Copyright 2013
3.10 Creating a Route Node
A route node (RNODE) is a multi-purpose reference point created on the Cableway branch which facilitates
the implementation of various activities such as defining take-off points, positioning glands and fittings, and
reporting.
The Route Node Create Tasks form is displayed either by clicking the Create Route Node link label on
the Branch Tasks form or by selecting the Node option under the Route button options list, located under
the Create group on the tab. Alternatively, activate the PowerWheel, click on the Cable tile and select the
Node option.
Aside from the basic fields, the user can define the following:
Route Node Type – this is the type of route node; this can be
selected from the drop down list.
Takeoff – this is a RNODE from which a cable can leave or

enter the Cableway.
Gap – this RNODE will force a gap to be left between the cable
tray materials, and is positioned at the centre point of the gap.
The Gap size is defined by the Gap (Y Offset) field.
Offset – this RNODE is used to position Transit Glands and

Fittings, and is created automatically for the user.
Penetration – this RNODE is used to hold references of

penetrations, and is created automatically for the user.
Report – this RNODE has no active function, but allows the

user to report on the passing Cables, and can be positioned
anywhere along the branch.
Reference Point – this is the reference point (POINTR) from

which the RNODE will be offset.
Offset Distance – this is populated by keying in the offset

required or by using the Pick… link label (this activates the
Positioning Control Toolbar).
Proportional Distance – a value of between 0 and 1 can be

entered (e.g. 0.5 would be the midpoint between the reference
points).
Gap / Offset – the Gap (Y Offset) becomes active when the Gap or Penetration Route Node Type is
selected. The X Offset and Z Offset are used by the RNODE of type Offset.
Connection – this allows a RNODE to be connected to a CNODE (Control Node).
Specification – this allows the user to apply a catalogue item to the RNODE to provide a graphical
representation beyond the simple 3D crosshair.
© Copyright 2013
The different Route Node specs are displayed below. Although the names PENE and SEAM are used,
selecting these will not have any effect on the function of the RNODE.
MAIN PENE SEAM
3.11 Creating a Route Node – A Worked Example
Navigate to CWBRAN CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B1 in the

Model Explorer, and then click the Node option under the Route
button options list, located under the Create group on the tab to
display the Route Node Create Tasks form. Alternatively,
activate the PowerWheel, click on the Cable tile and select Node.
Click the Autoname Route Node button to automatically name

the route node.
Set the Route Node Type to Gap, and select Reference Point
to 2 from the list, enter an Offset Distance of 4950mm and a Gap
(Y Offset) of 200mm.
Click the Choose… link label next to the Specification field, and
select the CABLEWAY_REPRESENTATION.MAIN_
TABITE item from the selection form.
Click the Create Route Node link label.
The Route Node is displayed in the Cableway with a small

primitive as shown below.
 The function of this Route Node will be visible later in the

training.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 2 – Cableway Routing
1. Add a RATTA to the main branch CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B1 with an offset from Reference Point
2
Set Offset Distance to 13815mm or pick /ST-003.
2. Create Branches from the two new RATTAs each routed down to the Junction Boxes /ST-003 and
/ST-001 as shown below:
Set the bend radius of the branches to 300mm.
Set the branch Width to 300mm and Height to 150mm.
The two branches will have the same North as the RATTAs, and the tail co-ordinates are as follows:
Name Head Tail
CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B3 RATTA 2 W287583mm U102445mm
CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B4 RATTA 1 W286557mm U102445mm
3. Create and Autoname two Route Nodes of type Takeoff, at offsets 9825mm and 14700mm from
POINTR 2 on the Cableway Branch CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B2.
4. Navigate to CWAY-AREA03-POWER_B2 and

create a RATTA on the branch with an offset
distance based on Junction Box /ST005 position.
Then create a new branch B5 off this RATTA with

a tail position of N309757mm U102445mm and
the following parameters.
Bend Radius: 300mm
Branch Width: 300mm
Branch Height: 150mm
© Copyright 2013
5. Add CWAY-AREA02-CONTROL to the 3D view.
6. Navigate to Zone ZONE-CWAY-AREA03 and create a new Control Cableway: CWAY-AREA03-

CONTROL. Set the Description to ‘Area 03 Control Cableway’ and purpose to CABL.
7. As the Cableway Branch Create Tasks form is displayed, set the Standard IClass to CONTROL.
The branch Width to 600mm, Height to 150mm and Bend Radius to 600mm.
8. Create a Cableway branch with its head positioned explicitly at W288500mm N289000mm
U104310mm and the tail connected to the Head of CWAY-AREA02-CONTROL_B1. This will facilitate
routing of other Cableway branches from this newly created branch and formulate a network of
branches which allows for the Control cables to be routed.
9. Create two new RATTAs on this branch with an offset distance based on the positions of the Junction
Boxes /ST-002 and /ST-004.
10. Now create two Cableway branches, which are connected to the main Cableway branch at the RATTAs
that have just been created.
Set the Bend Radius of the branch to 300mm.
Set the Standard IClass to CONTROL.
Set the Branch Width to 150mm and Height to 150mm.
Name Head Tail

CWAY-AREA03-CONTROL_B2 RATTA 1 W287583mm U102445mm
CWAY-AREA03-CONTROL_B3 RATTA 2 W286557mm U102445mm
The result should look as shown below.
© Copyright 2013
3.12 Quick Routing and Editing Route Points using the Model Editor
The Model Editor can also be used to route a Cableway

Branch once it has been created by using the Quick
Routing tool.
To modify the route of the newly created Cableway

branch, select the branch in the graphical display and
then right click and select the Quick Routing option from
the context menu.
The Quick Routing arrows are displayed at the Head

and Tail of the branch.
By clicking and holding the left mouse button, these

handles can be dragged along an axis to route the
Cableway. A preview of the route, including the distance,
is shown.
Releasing the left mouse button will confirm the

extension to the route, or alternatively, press the Esc key
to cancel the change.
Any bends created along the route via quick routing will
automatically inherit the bend radius set on the cableway
branch.
 Right clicking on the handles will provide the user

with a range of options for positioning and
orientating the next route point. These are similar to
those covered in the Foundations training course.
© Copyright 2013
To change the angle of the route, select the Show

Rotation Handles option from the right click context
sensitive menu.
The route of a Cableway branch can also be altered

using the Model Editor to manipulate the route points.
This can be done by selecting the Shape Editing option
from the right click context sensitive menu.
The POINTR elements will be highlighted, and they can

be selected and dragged with the Model Editor handles.
The user may select multiple route points on a cableway

branch by holding down the CTRL key.
When a route point is moved, the Cableway is modified

to follow the new position of the route point.
 Any cables routed through the Cableway branch will follow the newly defined route automatically.
© Copyright 2013
Clicking the right mouse button whilst in Shape Editing

mode will displays a context sensitive menu which enables
the user to perform tasks specific to this mode.
Delete Selection - deletes the selected points on the

branch.
Offset… - enables user to enter an offset value and moves

the entire cableway branch to the desired position.
Offset selection… - enables user to enter an offset value

and moves the selected points on the cableway branch to
the desired position.
Fillet Radius… - enables user to modify the fillet radius for

the selected points.
3.13 Quick Routing and Editing Route Points – A Worked Example
Create a new control Cableway branch and set the Name

to CWAY-AREA03-CONTROL_B4
Set the Bend Radius to 300mm, and the IClass to

CONTROL
Set the Width to 600mm and Height to 150mm (Shape left

at Rectangular).
Position the branch Head at:
West 288500mm, North 306850mm, Up 104310mm
And the Tail at:
West 290000mm, North 306850mm, Up 104310mm.
Click Create Cableway Branch.
Once the new branch has been created, activate the Model Editor and then right click on the branch. Select
Quick Routing from the context menu to display the Quick Routing handles.
Turn the feature Highlighting on by pressing the ‘F’ key once on the keyboard.
© Copyright 2013
Right click on the West routing handle, and from the context menu select Enter Offset. Enter a value of
2500mm and click OK.
© Copyright 2013
Next, right click on the Up routing handle, and from the context menu select Extend Through Feature…
Select the top edge of the steel section (SCTN 6 of FRMWRK AREA03_PR_ROW_10) as shown on the right.
To complete the route, use the Extend Through Feature… option again to extend the branch to the tail of
the parallel Power Cableway branch which marks the boundary of Area-03.
The completed view is as shown below.
© Copyright 2013
Add site SITE-PIPING-AREA03 to 3D

view. As the segment between the two
risers on the branch is clashing with a
pipe (as shown on the left), the two
route points will need to be modified in
order to resolve the position of the
segment.
With Model Editor turned on, click the

right mouse button and select Shape
Editing.
As the route points are now

highlighted, click on the second route
point (POINTR). Now hold the CTRL
key and select the third route point.
© Copyright 2013
Right click on the East handle and

select Enter Value. Enter a value of
300mm and click OK.
The clash is now resolved.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 3 – Cableway routing (Quick Routing)
1. Add Groupset (GPSET) Area01 to 3D view. Select the Cableway branch CWAY-AREA01-
CONTROL_B1 and create a RATTA at an offset distance of 10920mm from the head of the branch.
2. Create a new Control Cableway branch with its head connected to the RATTA and tail positioned with a
North co-ordinate of 305167.00mm and West and Up the same as the Head. Set the branch height and
width to 150mm and the bend radius to 300mm, and the IClass to CONTROL.
3. Using the quick router, route the branch as shown below, around the steelwork.
The completed view is as shown below.
© Copyright 2013
Optional Exercise:
1. Clear the Drawlist. Navigate to GPSET CABLE_OPTIONAL_EXCERCISE located in GPWL

TRAINING_GROUP_WORLD and add it to the 3D view.
2. Create a new Cableway, under the ZONE-CWAY-AREA02 and name the Cableway CWAY-
POWER-BUILDING-B01_B1. The branch needs to start at Equipment B01-HC-001 and run to the
Junction Box JBEP-2010 at the south east of the building. The Cableway will be used to route
power cables to Distribution Panels located on Levels 1 & 2 of the building and the Office Desk.
Create any additional take off route nodes needed on the Cableway for cable take-off.
The exact design of the Cableway is as shown below. Users should also refer to the detail drawing located in
the Appendix A – Detail Drawing for Building B01
3. Using the Training Setup form, select the Complete Cableway Network option under the Cable tab
and click Apply to complete the network of Cableways.
© Copyright 2013
CHAPTER 3
3 Equipment Modelling Using Primitives
This chapter explores a number of issues that designers should consider prior to commencing any
equipment modelling and describes how equipment elements can be created with basic modelling
methods using primitives.
3.1 Naming Equipment Elements
Conventionally, equipment items are named using the tag number, e.g. /E1101, /P1001-A, /D2016, etc.
However, any name or naming convention may be used. It is not usual to name primitives, except
nozzles, unless they need to be identified for some purpose.
Nozzles are named and generally prefixed by the equipment name to make them unique, e.g. /E1101-
N1, /P1001-A/N1, /D2016/1. Naming the nozzles also helps in identification when connecting pipework to
them. Nozzle names will also be referenced on Piping Isometrics.
Whatever names are given, the naming convention is usually defined by the project specification. It is
possible that the project may have Autonaming rules set up for items such as nozzles so that the project
conventions are followed in every detail.
3.2 Equipment Origin Position
The position of the equipment origin is a key consideration prior to commencing modelling. The point
selected for an equipment origin is often dictated by other project information, such as known co-
ordinates or adjoining structures and pipe elements. Understanding the position of the origin of
equipment, sub-equipment and primitive elements will help designers model more effectively.
Equipment elements, Sub-equipment elements and Primitive elements each have an origin. The origin
position is held within each elements Position attribute.
The EQUI element’s Position attribute holds the equipment origin position. By default, the position is
expressed in world co-ordinates, however the user can change this to other design elements if required.
If SUBE elements are used, the Position attribute defines the SUBE origin position with respect to the
equipment origin (default).
A solid primitive’s Position attribute defines the position of the primitive’s origin with respect to its
owner, i.e. the EQUI origin or the SUBE origin.
For all negative primitives, the Position attributes define the position of the negative primitive’s origin
with respect to its owning solid primitive’s origin.
3.3 Primitives
The following primitives are available for equipment modelling in AVEVA E3D.

Equipment Modelling TM-1811
Box (BOX) Cylinder (CYLI) Cone (CONE)
Snout (SNOU) Pyramid (PYRA) Circular Torus (CTOR)
Rectangular Torus (RTOR) Dish (DISH) Sloped Cylinder (SLCY)
Extrusion (EXTR) Solid of Revolution (REVO) Nozzle (NOZZ)
Equipment elements consist of a collection of

AVEVA E3D primitives, arranged in 3D space
to represent the real object.
When a new piece of equipment is to be built,
one of the first decisions to be made is which
primitives are going to be used to create the
representation required.
Generally the ‘internals’ of any equipment are
not modelled as it only the external
representation that is required.
In this simple example of a horizontal vessel,
seven primitives are positioned and orientated
such that they represent a vessel. There is no
‘connectivity’ between the primitives.

3.3.1 P-points
Each primitive has a set of P-points at fixed locations. A P-point is a point that has a position and
direction attribute as well as other attributes that are used by other modules and applications.
P-points are numbered, with P0 always being at the origin of the primitive. For example, a BOX has
7 P-points:
 P0 is in the middle of the box.
 P1 is in the centre of the top face of the box and points away from the face in a + ve Z direction.
 P2, P3, P4 and P5 are located on the four vertical faces. Each located at the centre of and pointing
away from its face.
 P6 is located in the centre of the bottom face of the box pointing away from the face in a -ve Z
direction.
For equipment modelling, P-points are used for locating and aligning primitives.
 Appendix A contains a list of primitives showing selected attributes and P-points.
3.3.2 Negative Primitives
To obtain a desired shape or effect in the model, negative primitives may be used to ‘cut’ a solid
primitive.
Primitive Type Element Type
Negative Box NBOX
Negative Cylinder NCYL
Negative Cone NCON

Negative primitives are owned by solid
Negative Snout NSNO primitives and will only negate their owner.
Negative Pyramid NPYR The negation is controlled using the Holes

Drawn checkbox on the Representation tab
of the Graphics Settings form.
Negative Circular Torus NCTO
All solid primitives, except Nozzles, have an
Negative Rectangular Torus NRTO equivalent negative primitive whose attributes
are the same but the names are different, as
Negative Dish NDIS shown in the table.
Negative Sloped Cylinder NSLC
Negative Extrusion NXTR
Negative Solid of Revolution NREV

3.4 Creating Equipment from Primitives – A Worked Example
This worked example builds a piece of process equipment, a Reboiler, tagged E1301, from the AVEVA
Plant training project.
The equipment locations for the project are shown on the following Equipment Location drawing below.

3.4.1 Information and Decisions
The dimensions for Reboiler E1301 are shown on the Equipment Arrangement drawing below.
Before starting to model E1301, or any equipment item, key decisions need to be made:
1. The location of the equipment origin.
The equipment origin can be placed anywhere. It could be placed on the bottom of one of the
saddles so that it may be located on a foundation, however, looking at the location information on
the Equipment Location drawing, it would be easier to place the origin on the centreline of the
equipment in line with nozzles NS1 and NS2.
This would give an equipment origin position of W 319150 N 296950 U 101470.
2. The orientation of the equipment.
There is little point in modelling the equipment in one orientation and then re-orientating it when
complete. From the Equipment Location end to the North, so this is the orientation that will be
used for the primitives. The equipment will use the default orientation of Y is N and Z is Up.
3. The primitives to be used.
Looking at the Equipment Arrangement drawing for E1301 it may be broken down to the following
primitives:
 6 x Cylinders
 2 x Boxes
 5 x Nozzles
 1 x Dish
Total 14 Primitives

3.4.2 Creating the EQUI Element
Clear the Drawlist, if required.
Make ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 the CE and on the

EQUIPMENT tab, in the Create group, click the
Equipment button to display the Equipment Creation
form.
In the Naming text box enter E1301.
Change the East/West options list to West and enter

319150 into the textbox,
Enter 296950 in the North textbox and 101470 in the Up

textbox.
Enter Reboiler in the Description textbox. All other

attribute fields can be left unset at this point.
Click the OK button to create the equipment element with

the specified name and at the specified co-ordinates.
At this time nothing is displayed in the 3D View as the

equipment does not own any primitives.
Right click on the newly created element in Model Explorer

and select Attributes… from the pop-up menu to display
the Attributes form.
Check the Position attribute.
The Orientation is the default orientation, i.e. Y is N and Z

is Up (X is East), as the Equipment Creation form does
not allow an orientation to be specified.
As this is the required orientation, the equipment does not

need to be re-orientated.
Close the Attributes form.

3.4.3 Creating the Primitives
Although it is not important in which order the primitives are built, it makes sense to model the main
‘body’ of the Reboiler first, i.e. the longest cylinder (Cylinder 1). From this base most of the other
primitives can be positioned.
Before beginning to model the primitives for this equipment, it is important to consider your working
plane. The cylinders modelled here will have their Z-axes’ as the North/South axis, thus we will use the
UW plane. This may be selected from VIEW > Local Coordinate System > UW or by selecting the plane
from the PowerCompassTM. We will remain in this plane for the entire worked example.
In the Create group of the EQUIPMENT tab, select the Cylinder

option from the primitive gallery.
This will activate the Contextual Editor, which will guide the user though the creation stages.
The southern end of the cylinder is 290 – 60 = 230mm South of the equipment origin. We will use this
as its base centre.
Enter E 0 N -230 U 0 in to the co-ordinates boxes. After typing each co-ordinate press the Tab key to
lock it and advance to the next co-ordinate. Once complete press the Return key to advance.
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, the length of this cylinder can be derived as 6590 – 60 –
60 = 6470mm and has a diameter of 835mm.
Enter 835 in the Diameter textbox, followed by the Return key.

Enter -6470 in the Height textbox followed by the Return key.
This will complete the cylinder creation. Right click and drag to 11 O’clock on the PowerWheelTM to set
Limits Extents.
The next primitive to be created is the flange on the southern end of the equipment (Cylinder 2). On the
Create Primitive form click Cylinder again to display the contextual editor.
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, the thickness of the flange is 60mm and the diameter is
960mm.
With equipment E1301 as the CE, type CYLI into the 3D View.
Position the base centre of the new cylinder at P1 of the first cylinder. P-point snaps may be turned on by
holding <Shift>, right clicking and dragging to 12 O’clock on the snaps PowerWheelTM.

Enter 60 in the Height input box and 960 in the Diameter input box.
3.4.3.1 Using Copy

The next primitives to create are the second and third flanges (Cylinder 3 and 4), just North of the
equipment origin and at the north end of Cylinder 1 respectively. These primitives could be created, as
described previously. However, they may also be created by copying the first flange cylinder.
Double click the equipment, then double click Cylinder 2.

Type CO into the 3D View. When asked to specify base
point of displacement, pick P1 of Cylinder 2.
Then choose P2 of Cylinder 1 to copy

Then enter E 0 N 640 U 0 into the displacement co- to.
ordinates.
Press the Return key to exit the copy
command.

Cylinder 5 may be created using a similar process to

Cylinder 2. Pick P2 of Cylinder 4 as the base centre, enter
910 for the diameter and -300 for the height.
Dish 1 is positioned at the north end of Cylinder 5.
The Create a Dish button may be found in the second row

of the Primitives Gallery. Pick P2 of Cylinder 5 for the
base centre. Note: A preview will not be visible since it will
be obscured by Cylinder 5, due to its default orientation.
Enter 910 for the diameter. When prompted for the dish
height, press the down arrow and select Knuckle Radius,
then input 75. Then input -200 for the height.
 See page 101 for more details regarding dish definition and knuckle radii.

3.4.3.2 Creating Nozzles

The Nozzle Schedule on the Equipment Arrangement drawing shows that Reboiler E1301 has five
nozzles named NS1, NS2, N1, N2 and N3. For this example the nozzles will be 180prefixed using the
equipment name and a forward slash, e.g. E1301/NS1.
A Nozzle (NOZZ) primitive has its origin, P-point P0, at the face of the nozzle
flange and is co-incident with P-point P1.
P-point P2 is at the bottom of the ‘stem’ of the nozzle and the Height attribute is
the distance between P1 and P2.
When a nozzle is positioned it is the origin position (P0) that is specified. A nozzle
orientation may be specified by setting the direction of P1 or the origin may be
rotated around another axis.
It is customary to model the nozzle ‘stem’ back to the centreline of the vessel.
The first nozzle to be created is NS2, a 100mm Nominal Bore, 150lb ANSI flange nozzle.
The Equipment Arrangement drawings shows that the nozzle is located at the equipment origin in both
the North/South direction and the East/West direction The face of the nozzle’s flange is 635mm above
the equipment centreline.
Make the EQUI element E1301 the CE and set the viewing
direction to Iso .
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Create group, click the

Nozzle button to display the Create Nozzle form.
Enter E1301/NS2 in the Name textbox.
Enter 635 in the Height textbox.
Select ANSI-Nozzles from the Specification options list.
Select 150lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options

list.
Select 100mm from the Bore options list.
Enter 635 in the Height textbox to model the stem back to the
centreline.
Click the Create button to create the nozzle at the equipment

origin and display the Modify Nozzle form.
 The entries in the Specification, Generic Type and Bore options list depend on the nozzle
specifications in the catalogue.
In the Position fold-up panel of the Modify Nozzle form, enter 635 in the Up
textbox.
With the Origin as the datum, rotate the nozzle 90° around the Y Axis using
the Rotate fold-up panel.
Click the Next button on the Modify Nozzle form to display the Create
Primitive form.

3.4.3.3 Using Copy and Rotate

Nozzle NS1 has the same specification and nominal bore as NS2
and is in the same location in the East/West and North/South axes,
i.e. at the equipment origin. NS1 may be, therefore be created by
rotating NS2 in copy mode.
With nozzle NS2 as the Current selection, type RO into the 3D View.
Press the down arrow and select Copy.
Then pick P2 of NS2 as the base point of rotation. Rotate by 180.
The nozzle is given a system name, NOZZ Copy-of-NS2, as the Rotate + Copy mode did not offer an
option to rename the copy elements.
Right click on NOZZ Copy-of-NS2 in Model Explorer and select Rename from the Model Explorer pop-
up menu to display the Name form. Enter E1301/NS1 in the Name textbox on the form, click the Apply
button to rename the nozzle and then close the form.
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, nozzle N2 is a 200 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle
positioned 350 + 460 = 810mm North of nozzle NS2.

With NS2 the current selection, type M

into the 3D View to begin the move
function. Press the down arrow and
select Copy. Pick P2 of NS2 as the base
point.
Enter E 0 N 810 U 0 into the co-ordinates

then press the Return key.
Rename the nozzle to /E1301/N2 and

make it the CE.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Modify

group, click the Nozzle button to display
the Modify Nozzle form
Select 300lb Ansi Flanges from the

Generic Type options list and select
200mm from the Nominal Bore options
list to re-size the nozzle.
Click the Next button and dismiss the

form.
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, nozzle N1 is 2440mm North of nozzle N2, rotated by 180º
and has the same specification and nominal bore.
Use the previous two techniques in

sequence to Rotate and Move a copy of
N2 180 degrees and offset by 2440 mm
North.
Re-name the new nozzle to E1301/N1
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, the final nozzle, N3, is 2440 + 2440 = 4880mm North of
nozzle N2 and is the same specification and nominal bore. Move with Copy the Nozzle N2 4880 North.
The Reboiler body is now complete with all nozzles.

3.4.3.4 Creating a Sub-Equipment (SUBE) element

The two supports for the Reboiler may typically be modelled as a Sub-equipment.
With the EQUI element E1301 as the CE, in the Create group, select
Sub-Equipment from the Create Equipment button options list to
display the Sub-Equipment form.
Enter E1301_SUPPORTS in the Naming textbox.
For the supports there is no reason to make the SUBE element origin
different from the owning EQUI element origin.
Leave the position as the default, i.e. the same as the owing element,
and click the OK button and then close the form.
The two supports are modelled as BOX primitives. From the Equipment Arrangement drawing, the
supports are 200mm wide x 460mm long and the bottoms of the supports are 630mm below the
centreline of the equipment.
With SUBE element

E1301_SUPPORTS as the CE, select
the Box primitive from the primitives
gallery.
Enter the first corner co-ordinates E -

230 N 1520 U -630.
Then specify the opposite corner co-

ordinates E 460 N 0 U 630.
Followed by 200 for the Z length.
The box primitive can now be copied to create the second support. From the Equipment Arrangement
drawing, the second support is 3660mm North of the first support.

With Box 1 as the current selection, type CO into the 3D View, then select a point on the box for the
base point, here P5 has been used.
Input E 0 N 3660 U 0 as the displacement co-ordinates.
Then press the Return key to exit the command.
3.4.3.5 Creating the Tube-Pull Obstruction Volume

The Equipment Location drawing shows a tube-pull area for the Reboiler which must be free of
obstructions so that the tube bundle maybe withdrawn from the equipment.
This kind of volume may be represented by a primitive, but is usually only required for clash detection
purposes and would not normally be displayed during modelling activities.
These kinds of primitives are called Obstruction Volumes and are placed on the obstruction display
levels, 9 10 by default. This type of volume may be used for such things as escape routes, walkways,
valve access, maintenance access, lifting access, etc.
From the Equipment Location drawing, the tube-pull volume must be 6500 long. Although no diameter
is given, making it the OD of the main vessel, i.e. 835, will adequately cover the tube bundle.
Before creating the obstruction volume

primitive, go to EQUIPMENT > Defaults and
Choose the Obstruction Volume option from
the Representation Styles drop down list.
Then select Soft from the Obstruction Level
list.

With the EQUI element E1301 as the CE, from the

Primitives gallery click the Cylinder button.
Choose P1 of Cylinder 2 as the base centre.
Enter 835 in the Diameter input box.
Enter 6500 in the Height input box.
Then press the Return key to finish the command.
The cylinder cannot be seen in the 3D View as

the viewing level is set to the default of 6. On
the VIEW tab, in the Settings group, click the
Graphics button to display the Graphics
Settings form.
On the Representation tab, in the Level frame,

enter 9 in the Others textbox and click the
Apply button on the form but do not close it.
Although equipment primitives are not usually named, this cylinder has a particular function so re-name it
to E1301/TUBE_PULL.
On the Graphics Settings form, on the Representation tab, enter 6 in the Others textbox in the Level
frame. Note that the tube pull obstruction volume is no longer displayed.
Select 50% from the Obstruction Visibility/Translucency options list and click the Apply button. The
tube pull obstruction volume is now displayed at 50% translucency.
On the Graphics Settings form, select Off from the Obstruction Visibility/Translucency options list,
click the Apply button and close the form.
On the PROJECT tab, select Save Work and click the Yes button in the confirmation message.

Exercise 1 Create Column C1101
This exercise creates the Fractionating

Column, tagged C1101. The equipment is
comprised of a column and a skirt support,
which will each be a sub-equipment element
owning the relevant primitives. The Equipment
Arrangement drawing for C1101, together with
the Nozzle Schedule, is as shown. The view
on the right is an Elevation View Looking West.
Iso View

VIEW A-A
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C

C1101 Nozzle Schedule
Nozzle Size Type

N1 100 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
M1 450 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information
 Create one sub-equipment named /SKIRT and one sub-equipment named /COLUMN. The origins of
both sub-equipments should be the same as for the EQUI element as all dimensions are relative to
the underside of the baseplate.
 The skirt is constructed of a 1473 OD x 30WT tube and has a 600 OD x 20WT access sleeve on the
southern axis.
 Nozzle N1 and N14 are part of the skirt.
 The UV plane should be used to create this equipment.

Exercise 2 Create Reflux Drum D1201
This exercise creates the Reflux Drum, tagged D1201. The Equipment Arrangement drawing for
D1201, together with the Nozzle Schedule, are shown below.
Nozzle Schedule

CHAPTER 4
4 Surface Treatment
The Surface Treatment utility enables specific paint types and coatings to be applied to individual model
items such as piping, HVAC, structural elements, etc.
4.1 Definition of Surface Treatments
Surface treatments consist of surface preparation, primer, paint description, manufacturer and a coating
thickness. Surface treatments are defined in Paragon and stored in a Catalogue database.
 The definition of Surface Treatments is outside the scope of this training guide. Refer to TM-1867
AVEVA Everything3D™ Project Model General Administration for information on how to define and
modify surface treatments in Paragon.
The database MASTER/PIPECATA, in the AVEVA data project ACP, contains a number of pre-defined
surface treatments, for example:
Surface treatments are referenced by model elements via the attributes Inprtref and Ouprtref representing
the inside surface treatment and the outside surface treatment respectively. Only elements with these
attributes may have a surface treatment assigned to them.

4.2 Assigning a Surface Treatment
Selecting TOOLS > Assign > Surface Treatment displays the Surface Treatment – Assignment form.
4.2.1 Selecting Elements
The Scope definition area of the form assists in selecting database elements to assign surface treatment to
and displays them in the Selected elements area of the form in a grid.
The Scope definition options list may be used to filter by a particular element type. For example, if PIPE is
selected and a ZONE containing only EQUI elements is selected, the Selected elements grid does not
display any results. Similarly, if EQUI is selected and a ZONE containing only EQUI elements is selected,
only the EQUI elements are displayed in the grid. However, if ALL is selected the ZONE containing only
EQUI elements will display the NOZZ elements as well.

The radio buttons in the Scope definition area have the following functionality:
 CE mem - includes members of the current element, i.e. elements owned by the CE.
 ID – enables item(s) to be graphically picked from the 3D view.
 CE - includes the current element only.
 Collection – this radio button, and its associated options list, is only enabled if one or more collections
are defined. The options list adjacent contains all the currently defined collections. This option allows
the selection of items from predefined collections.
Clicking either the Select or Add Element buttons populates the Selected elements grid with the elements
based on the chosen method and criteria.
The Select button clears the grid of any existing elements and adds the selected items.
The Add Element button appends the selected items to the items already displayed in the grid.
 Only items which have Inprtref and Ouprtref attributes are added to the grid. Items without these
attributes are ignored.
Once the Selected elements grid is populated, elements from the grid must be selected to apply the
surface treatment to. Selections can be made from the grid using standard Windows selection methods.

4.2.2 Selecting the Surface Treatment
Once the elements required have been selected, the surface treatment to be applied and where it is to be
applied, can be selected from the bottom part of the Surface Treatment – Assignment form.
The database MASTER/PIPECATA contains four pre-defined Table groups (Selection Tables) which may
be selected using the Table group options list.
These options are:
 IPSP – Inside Paint Specification, rule based.
 OPSP – Outside Paint Specification, rule based.
 FACE – Face Code of Zone.
 GENE – General, non-rule based.
Each Table Group option has a number of specification based table items which are selected from the
Table item options list:

When a Table item has been selected the Specification, if applicable, Symbol code and Punch code
textboxes are automatically filled with the relevant information.
4.2.3 Applying the Surface Treatment
Having selected the elements to apply the surface treatment to and the required surface treatment, clicking
either the Inside, Outside or Both buttons will update the Selected elements grid with the appropriate
settings.
Clicking the Apply button on the form displays a warning message.
Clicking the OK button on the message assigns the

surface treatment to the specified items and removes
them from the Selected elements grid.
By Viewing the attributes of the processed elements it

can be seen that the Inprtref attribute has been
displayed accordingly.

4.2.3.1 Selected Elements Grid Pop-up Menu

Having selected items from the Selected elements grid, right clicking
in the grid item displays a pop-up menu which has the following
options:
 Add to 3D view – this option adds the selected elements to the

3D view.
 Change Inside Codes from Spec – this option populates the

inside codes, i.e. INPRTR, STINRF, STINCD and PUINCD
columns in the grid, for the selected items using the current Table
item data.
 Change Outside Codes from Spec - this option populates the

outside codes, i.e. OUPRTR, STOURF, STOUCD and PUOUCD
columns in the grid, for the selected items using the current Table
item data.
 Change IN/OUT Codes from Spec - this option populates both the inside codes and outside codes for
the selected items using the current Table item data.
 Change Inside Codes from Face – this option populates the inside codes, i.e. INPRTR, STINRF,
STINCD and PUINCD columns in the grid, for the selected items using the current Table item data.
 Change Outside Codes from Face - this option populates the outside codes, i.e. OUPRTR, STOURF,
STOUCD and PUOUCD columns in the grid, for the selected items using the current Table item data.
 Change IN/OUT Codes from Face - this option populates both the inside codes and outside codes for
the selected items using the current Table item data.
 The Apply button on the Surface Treatment – Assignment form will still need to be clicked to update
the attributes on the selected items after the grid is updated.
 Change codes from Table List – this option opens the Surface Treatment – Section form which is
described in detail in the next section.
 Remove Selected Element(s) – this option removes the selected element(s) from the grid.
 Remove All Elements – this option clears the grid.
 Export to Excel… – prompts the user to browse to a file location and save the grid as a Microsoft
Excel, .xls, file. This then saves the file to the selected location.
 Print Preview… – opens the standard Print preview box allowing the page setup to be defined and the
grid printed.

4.2.3.2 The Surface Treatment – Selection Form

Having selected items from the Selected
elements grid, clicking the SRF List button at
the bottom of the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form displays the Surface
Treatment – Selection form.
The form contains Table Group and Table Item

options list, whose functionality is the same as
previously described for the corresponding
gadgets on the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form. However, selecting a Table
Group and Table Item displays details and
coatings of the surface treatment.
Clicking the Inside, Outside or Both buttons

updates the selected items in the grid with the
details from the selected surface treatment.
The Clear button clears the details on the form.
 The Apply button on the Surface Treatment – Assignment form will still need to be clicked to update
the attributes on the selected items after the grid is updated.
4.3 Surface Treatment Calculation and Report
Once the surface treatments have been assigned to the required model elements, the inside and outside
surface area for each component may be calculated and reported on.
With the required element as the CE, selecting TOOLS > Report > Surface Treatment displays the
Surface Treatment – Report form.

The CE when the form is loaded is set automatically. Navigating to another element within the Model
Explorer and clicking the CE button will set that as the current CE for the form.
Clicking the Calculate button calculates the inside and outside surface area for each component owned by
the CE and displays the results in the Selected elements grid. Units for the calculated area derive from the
current session units for distance.
 The Units for Area displayed derive from the current session units for Distance, as defined in the units
setting form.
Having selected items from the Selected elements grid, right clicking in the grid displays a pop-up menu
which has the following options:
 Add to 3D view – this option adds the selected elements to the 3D

view.
 Remove selected list in Grid – this option removes the selected

items from the grid.
 Remove all list in Grid – this option clears the grid.
 Export to Excel… – Prompts the user to browse to a file location and

save the grid as a Microsoft Excel, .xls, file. This then saves the file to
the selected location.
 Print Preview… - Opens the standard Print preview box allowing the
page setup to be defined and the grid printed.

4.4 Surface Treatment – A Worked Example
Clear the Drawlist. Select TOOLS > Assign > Surface Treatment to display the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form.
Navigate to PIPE 100-B-1 in ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 to make it the CE.
In the Scope Definition area of the form select BRAN from the options list, make sure that the CE mem radio
button is selected, and click the Select button to populate the Selected elements grid with branches.
Select all branches in the grid to highlight them. Select IPSP from the Table Group options list and, as the
pipe spec for the branches is A3B, select /MAS-IPSP-PSPE-A3B from the Table Item options list.
Click the Inside button to populate the inside codes for the branches in the grid.

Select OPSP from the Table Group options list and /MAS-OPSP-PSPE-A3B from the Table Item options
list.
With the all branches still highlighted in the grid, right click to display the selected elements pop-up menu.
Select the Add to 3D view option to add the three branches to the 3D view.
Right click in the grid again and select the Change Outside codes from Spec option to populate the
outside codes for the branches in the grid.
Click the Apply button on the bottom of the Surface Treatment – Assignment form and click the OK button
on the subsequent warning message.
Navigate to BRAN 100-B-1/B1 in the Model Explorer. Right

Click and select Attributes… to display the Attributes form.
Scroll down to find the Inprtref and Ouprtref attributes to verify

that the change has been made.
Note that the three branches have been removed from the
Selected elements grid on the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form.
Dismiss the Attributes form.
Navigate to PIPE 150-A-3 in the Model Explorer and click the Select button on the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form to add two branches to the Selected items grid.
Navigate PIPE 80-A-11 in Model Explorer and click the Add Element button on the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form to add two branches to the Selected items grid. Repeat the process for PIPE 150-A-57.
There are now six branches in the grid.
Highlight all six branches in the grid and click the SRF List button on the Surface Treatment – Assignment
form to display the Surface Treatment – Selection form.
Select IPSP from the Table Group options

list and /MAS-IPSP-PSPE-A1A from the
Table Item options list to populate the
Coating Lists grid.
Click the Inside button to populate the

inside codes on the Selected elements grid
on the Surface Treatment – Assignment
form.
Select OPSP form the Table Group options

list and /MAS-OPSP-PSPE-A1A from the
Table Item options list to populate the
Coating Lists grid.
Click the Outside button to populate the

outside codes on the Selected elements
grid on the Surface Treatment –
Assignment form.
Close the Surface Treatment – Selection

form.

Click the Apply button on the bottom of the Surface Treatment – Assignment form and click the OK button
on the subsequent warning message to apply the selected surface treatments to the branches.
Click the Cancel button on the Surface Treatment – Assignment form.
Navigate to PIPE 100-B-1 in Model Explorer and select TOOLS > Report > Surface Treatment to display
the Surface Treatment – Report form.
Click the Calculate button to populate the Selected elements grid with the details of the pipe components,
assigned surface treatments and surface area for inside and outside.

Note that the gaskets have been assigned a surface treatment. To filter the gaskets from the report, on the
TYPE column, select the drop down list in the cell below the column header and uncheck the GASK option
from the filter pop-up menu.
Note that the gaskets have now been filtered out of the report.
Right Click in the Selected Elements grid and select Export to Excel… to display the Save Surface
Treatment Data As form. Click the Save button on the form. Click the OK button on the subsequent
message form.
Now open the saved Excel file and validate the contents against the Selected Elements grid.

Exercise 3 Surface Treatments
Assign appropriate surface treatments to the remaining pipes in the ZONE ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 and
create reports for them.

This page is intentionally left blank.

CHAPTER 4
4 Equipment Modelling Using Templates
The previous chapter described how equipment items can be created using primitives arranged in 3D space
but with no relationship between them. AVEVA E3D enables equipment templates to be created and
instances of the template placed in the model.
4.1 Equipment Template Overview
An equipment template is a collection of primitives that make up the equipment shape grouped together
under a Template (TMPL) element. The template definitions are held in a Design database which is
referenced when an instance of the template is created. Templates can be of two types:
 Non-parameterised templates - create elements of fixed design and dimensions.
 Parameterised templates – contain rules that allow the primitives of the equipment to be re-sized and
re-positioned or supports, if any, to be added or modified.
 The creation of equipment templates id outside the scope of this training guide.
4.2 Creating Standard Equipment Items
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Create group, selecting Standard from the Create Equipment button
options list displays the Create Equipment form. The form enables an equipment item to be created by
making a series of selections based on the styles of various equipment templates.
There are two methods are used to select the appropriate template, a Selection Table or a Specification.
4.2.1 Selecting a Template - Selection Tables
Clicking the Selection Table radio button on the Create

Equipment form enables the Selection Table options list
that contains the available selection tables.
Depending on the selected table, the Type options list

enables different types of equipment to be selected,
depending on the contents of the table.
Selecting a different Type from the options list changes the

contents of the grid.
Selecting a grid entry displays a model of the selected

template in the 3D View at the bottom of the form.

4.2.2 Selecting a Template – Specifications
Clicking the Specification radio button on the Create

Equipment form enables the Specification options list that
contains the available specifications.
The middle part of the form contains two lists. The upper
one is the Current Selection which is empty at the start of
the process, and the lower one is the Selection list from
which selections are made. The options in the Selection
list depend on the Specification selected.
Clicking a line in the Selection list places the line in the

Current Selection list and displays new options in the
Selection list.
Clicking a line in the Current Selection reverses the

selection.
The process continues until all choices have been made and a template has been selected. A model of the
selected template is displayed in the 3D View at the bottom of the form.
4.2.3 Properties and Plotfiles
If the selected template is parametrised, the

Properties button is active.
Clicking the button displays a Modify Properties

form that enables the specific dimensions to be
modified by changing the default values.
All primitives related to the property are modified,

thus maintaining the integrity of the equipment
template.

If a Plotfile has been created for the equipment item it can be displayed by
clicking the Plotfile… button.
The Plotfile usually contains information relating to key dimensions and the
equipment origin.
4.2.4 Creating an Instance of the Template
Clicking the Apply button displays the Positioning Control form and the prompt ‘Position Equipment Origin
Snap (Snap):’
The equipment may be positioned in the model using appropriate settings on the Positioning Control form.
4.3 User Defined Elements Types for Equipment
Equipment items can be created with more meaningful element types, other than EQUI, that better describe
their function. For example, model elements may be called :PUMP, :REBOILER, :TANK, or :FILTER. This
is achieved through the use of User Defined Element Types (UDETs).
UDETs are created based on a standard AVEVA E3D element type, in this case equipment (EQUI) items.
UDETs are defined in AVEVA Administration™ Lexicon module and generally have the same attributes
as the base type, although some of the attributes may be hidden at the time of creating the UDET.
UDETs are distinguished from standard element types by the prefix of a colon, similar to User Defined
Attributes (UDAs). They also have an ActType (active type) attribute which is set to the UDET type, e.g.
:PUMP. The standard Type attribute is set to the base type, e.g. EQUI.
In most respects UDETs may be used in exactly the same way as EQUI elements. However, in the current
User Interface there are no forms to create the UDET elements, other than where an equipment template is
used. UDETs can be created using the Command Window by entering the syntax NEW <UDET>, e.g. NEW
:PUMP.
On the Create Equipment form, the User Defined Type

options list displays any available UDETs.
Selecting, say, PUMP will create the equipment as an active

type of :PUMP.
Once a UDET has been created its ActType attribute may be changed by using the Command line syntax
CHANGETYPE TO <UDET>, where <UDET> is another valid UDET for the Type defined in Lexicon. An
EQUI may also be changed to a UDET using the same syntax.

4.4 Creating Equipment using Templates– A Worked Example
This worked example creates two stacked Heat Exchangers, tagged E1302A and E1302B, using pre-
defined equipment templates. The equipment will be created using a User Defined Element Type (UDET)
of :HEATEX.
4.4.1 Information
The Equipment Arrangement drawing for the two heat exchangers, together with Nozzle Schedules and
stacking arrangement, is shown below.
E1302A
E1302B - all dimensions are the same as E1302A.
Nozzle Schedule

Stacking Arrangement
4.4.2 Creating E1302B
E1302B will be created first as it is the top exchanger and only has one set of supports.
4.4.2.1 Selecting the Template
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Create group, select Standard

from the Create Equipment button options list to display the
Create Equipment form.
Enter the name E1302B in the Name textbox.
From the User Defined Type options list select HEATEX. This
will create the equipment as a UDET :HEATEX
Select the Selection Table radio button and from the Selection
Table options list select /AVEVA_STD_EQUIP.
Select HEAT Exchangers from the Type options list to display

the options in grid.
Select AVEVA_STD_EQUIP/EQUIP-/004 from the grid to display

the template in the lower part of the form.

4.4.2.2 Setting the Properties

Click the Properties… button on the Create Equipment form to display the Modify Properties form for the
heat exchanger.
Each property of the template has an assigned letter, a description and a default value. The drawing in the
graphics view may be zoomed, using the mouse scroll wheel, or zoomed in using a window by clicking and
holding down the left mouse button whilst dragging a rectangle on the view. When zoomed in, clicking the
middle mouse button will progressively zoom out.
The drawing shows the location of the

dimensional properties and the origin of the
template which, in this case, is on the
centreline of the heat exchanger (in the
centre of the body cylinder) and in line with
nozzles N1 and N2.
Using the Equipment Arrangement drawing for E1302B, enter the following values for the dimensional
properties on the form:
Property Description Value

A Flange Diameter 570
B Exchanger Diam 460
C Flange Thickness 25
D Head Height 305
E Exchanger Length 5655
F Dish Height 100
G Dish Radius 40
H Nozzle Height 460
J Distance Between N2 and N3 4625
K Distance Between N1 and N4 550

The drawing on the form shows the exchanger with no supports and the
Exchange Support property is set to a default of No Supports.
Click the small down arrow adjacent to the textbox to display the
Exchanger Support form.
Select the Horizontal Exchanger Feet option.
Click the Modify properties for Exchanger

Support button adjacent to the down arrow to
display the Modify Properties form for the
exchanger supports, which contains a number of
properties and a drawing of the supports.
This form will create the exchanger supports as a

sub-equipment of the UDET.
Referring to the Equipment Arrangement

drawing, enter the following values against the
properties:
A = Origin to Foot 1070.
B = Feet to Feet 2870.
C = Foot Thickness 150.
D = Foot Width 380.
E = Distance to CL 450.
Click the OK button to enter the values and close

the form.
On the Modify Properties form for the Exchanger click the OK button to enter the values and close the
form.
4.4.2.3 Specifying the Position

On the Create Equipment form, click the Apply button. The prompt ‘Position Equipment Origin Snap
(Snap):’ is displayed in the prompt area and the Positioning Control form activated. The exchanger origin
may be positioned using a graphical pick, however, it is more likely that an explicit position will be given.
Click the Explicit Position button on the Positioning Control form to display the Explicit Position form.
From the Equipment Location drawing, the following values can be derived
for the origin of E1302B:
E -312370 (this is a Westing, therefore –ve East)
N 294460
Up 109757
Enter the values in the Explicit Position form and click the Apply button and close the form.
The heat exchanger E1302B is created and displayed.

4.4.2.4 Finishing E1302B

During the equipment creation process certain data could not be specified, for example:
 The orientation of the heat exchanger.
 Nozzle names and specifications
This data must be corrected after the creation of the equipment.
The origin of the Heat Exchanger is in the correct position, however, from the Equipment Location drawing
it can be seen that the flanged end must be at the southern end of the equipment, i.e. the equipment needs
to be rotated 180º about the Z axis of the origin.
Double click E1302B to enter Editor mode and display the equipment grips at the origin of E1302B. Rotate
the equipment around the Z axis by 180°. Press <Escape> to exit Editor mode.
Right click on NOZZ 1 in Model Explorer to make it the current

element. From the Equipment Arrangement drawing this nozzle
should be named NS1.
Select Rename from the pop-up menu to display the Name form.
Enter E1302B/NS1 in the Name textbox and click the Apply
button. Close the form.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Modify group, click the Nozzle

button to display the Modify Nozzle form.
From the E1302B Nozzle Schedule, NS1 should be a 100 NB

150lb Ansi Flange nozzle.
Select ANSI-NOZZLES from the Specification options list,

150lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list and
100 from the Nominal Bore options list.
Click the Apply button to change the nozzle specification.
Repeat the operation for the remaining three nozzles, entering the following data:
 NOZZ2 – Name: E1302B/NS2, Specification: 150lb Ansi Flange, Nominal Bore: 100mm
 NOZZ3 – Name: E1302B/N2, Specification: 150lb Ansi Flange, Nominal Bore: 150mm
 NOZZ3 – Name: E1302B/N1, Specification: 150lb Ansi Flange, Nominal Bore: 150mm
Close the Modify Nozzle form.

4.4.3 Creating E1302A using Copy Mirror
From the Equipment Arrangement drawing it can be seen that E1302A is a mirror of E1302B with some
nozzle specification differences and additional ‘feet’ to support E1302B.
Rather than go through the creation process again, it is easier to copy and mirror E1302B and make the
required changes and additions afterwards.
With E1302B as the CE, select HOME > Create > Copy
Mirror display the Mirror form.
Select Rel. from the To options list to place the copy in the
same place in the hierarchy as the original.
Select Cursor > Element from the form menu and

graphically pick the main body cylinder of E1302B. This sets
the mirror plane origin at the origin of the cylinder. The co-
ordinates of the origin are displayed on the form.
Enter U in the Plane direction text box to make the plane

an Up plane.
From the Stacking Arrangement on the Equipment GA, it

can be seen that the centreline of E1302A is 922 mm below
the centreline of E1302B.
The plane must, therefore, be moved to an elevation of 109757 – (922 / 2) = 109296, i.e. in the middle of the
two centreline elevations.
Enter the value in the Up textbox and click the Apply button to create the new heat exchanger. Click the
Yes button on the confirmation message to retain the copy and close the Mirror form.
4.4.3.1 Finishing E1302A

During the copy mirror process there was no opportunity to rename the equipment or the nozzles, therefore,
the renaming must be done after the heat exchanger has been created.
Right click on E1302A in Model Explorer and select Rename from the pop-up menu to display the Name
form. Enter E1302A in the Name textbox and click the Apply button. Do not close the form.
The nozzles also need to be renamed in accordance with the Equipment Arrangement drawing for
E1302A.
Navigate to NOZZ 1 of E1302A in Model Explorer. Click the CE button on the name form and enter
E1302A/NS2 in the Name textbox, press the Return key and click the Apply button to rename the nozzle.
Repeat the process, entering the following values for the remaining three nozzles:
 NOZZ 2 enter E1302A/NS1
 NOZZ 3 enter E1302A/N1
 NOZZ 4 enter E1302A/N2
The nozzle specification for Nozzle N2 on E1302A is different from that of Nozzle N1 on E1302B and must
be re-specified as an 80 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle.
Navigate to the nozzle in Model Explorer and On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Modify group, click the
Nozzle button to display the Modify Nozzle form. Verify that the Specification is already set at ANSI-
NOZZLES. For the Generic Type select 300lb Ansi Flanges and select 80mm from the Nominal Bore
options list, click the Next button and close the form.

E1302A requires two additional feet to support E1302B. The new feet will be created by copying and
rotating the existing feet.
Before beginning make sure working plane is set to the UW plane. This may be set by selecting the green
plane from the PowerCompassTM.
Double click E1302A to enter Editor mode for the equipment, then double click one of the Box supports of
E1302A to enter the editor for the SUBE. The SUBE should now be the current selection.
Type RO into the 3D View then press <Enter>. Press the down arrow key and choose the Copy option.
Pick a point on the centreline of E1302A for the base point, here P0 of Cylinder 6 has been used.
Then enter 180 in the angle input box, a preview may be seen. Pressing <Enter> will complete the
command and create the rotated copy of the supports.
E1302A and E1302B are now complete.

Exercise 3 Create Pumps P1501A & B and P1502A & B
This exercise creates the four pumps found on the Equipment Location drawing:
 The duty and standby Reflux Pumps, tagged P1501A and P1501B.
 The duty and standby Overhead Product Pumps, tagged P1502A and P1502B.
The Equipment GA for each set of pumps, together with the Nozzle Schedules, are shown below.
P1501A & B
Nozzle Schedule
Nozzle Size Type
N1 - Suction 100 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
N2 - Discharge 50 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information for P1501A & B
 The pumps are Centrifugal, Centreline Mounted, Tangential Outlet Pumps (AVEVA Standard,
template PUMP005).
 Use the Selection Table option for specifying the pump.
 To use the template, the origin position of the pump must be derived from the positional information
given on the Equipment Location drawing.
 Create the first pump as a UDET :PUMP and Move with copy this pump to create the second pump.

P1502A & B
Nozzle Schedule
Nozzle Size Type
N1 - Suction 100 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
N2 - Discharge 50 NB 300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information for P1502A & B
 The pumps are Centrifugal, Centreline Mounted, Vertical Offset Nozzle Pumps (AVEVA Standard,
template PUMP006).
 Use the Selection Table option for specifying the pump.
 To use the template, the origin position of the pump must be derived from the positional information
given on the Equipment Location drawing.
 Create the first pump as a UDET :PUMP and move with copy this pump to create the second pump.

4.5 Creating Electrical Components
An Electrical Component (ELCONN) in equipment terms is a connection point between equipment and
cables and can represent anything from an individual cable gland to a piece of electrical equipment, such as
a generator. Electrical components are catalogue items and are selected from the catalogue via a selection
table and are positioned and orientated within equipment in the same way as nozzles and primitives.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Create group,

clicking the Electrical button displays the Create
Electrical Component form.
The form enables an electrical component to be

made from the range of catalogue items
available.
The overall category of electrical component is

selected by choosing one of the Table options.
This table may be divided into sub-categories

selected using the Type options and can be
sorted and filtered to restrict the number of
components displayed for selection.
A component in the table can be selected by

clicking on a row in the table.
Clicking the Properties… button displays the

Modify Properties form on which to set any
parameterised data relevant to the selected
electrical component. If there are no
parameterised properties an error message is
displayed:
The Plotfile button is active if a plot file of the

component is available.

When the electrical component has been fully

specified, clicking the Create button creates the
component at the equipment origin.
The bottom part of the Create Electrical

Component form is changed to display a
Component Position frame.
The position of the electrical component may be

specified by entering appropriate values in the
co-ordinate textboxes or by graphically picking a
position in the 3D View using the positioning
control toolbar.
When the electrical component has been

positioned, clicking the Next button changes the
form to its original state, enabling another
electrical component to be created.
ELCONN elements appear in the Model explorer

as shown below.
Electrical components may be orientated by

selecting the Rotate in 3D View command.
 If the project has been configured with User Defined Element Types based on electrical component
(ELCONN) element type, they will appear in the User Defined Type list. When the electrical
component element is created, it will be created as the User Defined Type selected from this list.
Selecting a User Defined Element Type may change the content of the Selection Table if the table has
been configured to filter on element type.

4.6 Creating an Electrical Component – A Worked Example
Clear the Drawlist and add back pump P1501B. Use the PowerWheelTM to Limit Extents and set the view
direction to Iso .
With P1501B as the CE, on the EQUIPMENT

tab, in the Create group, click the Electrical
button to display the Create Electrical
Component form.
Select ELCONN-EQUI.TABGRO from the

Table options list, ELCONN is the only option
in the Type options list and select
/ELCONN_T3 from the displayed grid.
An image of the component is displayed in the

3D View at the bottom of the form.
Click the Create button to create the ELCONN

and display the Component Position area at
the bottom of the form.
Enter East 140 and South 800 in the

appropriate textboxes and click the Next
button.
Note, in Model Explorer, that the ELCONN has

been created.
To correctly orientate the ELCONN, double click

the connection to enter Editor mode and display
the grips.
Click the horizontal rotation grip, highlighted in

green here, then enter -90 into the input box and
press the Return key. Press the Escape key to
exit Editor mode.

CHAPTER 5
5 Mass Properties
5.1 Mass Properties Overview
The Mass Properties utilities are common across all applications in the Design module of AVEVA E3D 2.1.
They enable the user to obtain the Weight, Centre of Gravity (C of G), Surface Area and Volume for
individual items, parts of the model or the whole model.
Whilst the Surface Area and Volume utilities work in the same way for all disciplines, the weight data and
Centre of Gravity data for the Weight and Centre of Gravity utility is obtained from different sources
depending on the discipline.
5.1.1 Weight Data
For Piping, Cable Tray, HVAC and Cable, the weight data is stored against individual component weights
in the Properties database.
For Piping, the ‘wet’ weight, i.e. the pipe full of fluid, can only be calculated if the Fluref attribute is set on
the PIPE or BRAN elements.
For Equipment (EQUI), Volume Model (VOLM) and Sub Volume Model (SVOLM) elements, the weight
data is stored in the following attributes:
 Usrweight – the ‘dry’ weight of the element. A fixed value or an expression may be used.
 Usrwweight – the ‘wet’ weight of the element, i.e. the element ‘dry’ weight plus any fluids. A fixed value
or an expression may be used.
 Usrcogravity – the co-ordinates of the ‘dry’ centre of gravity from the elements origin, expressed in the
frame of reference of the element.
 Usrwcogravity – the co-ordinates of the ‘wet’ centre of gravity from the elements origin, expressed in
the frame of reference of the element.
A value or expression must be entered for each attribute on each element after it has been created.
For Structural elements and their soft types, the weight data is obtained by multiplying the volume (net or
gross) by the density of the assigned material stored in the Properties database.
5.1.2 Centre of Gravity Data
For Piping, Cable Tray and HVAC, the C of G position is taken from a Ppoint on the catalogue item whose
Purpose attribute is set to COFG. If the Ppoint does not exist then P0 is considered to be the items C of G
position.
For Equipment (EQUI), Volume Model (VOLM) and Sub Volume Model (SVOLM) elements, the C of G
position is stored in the following attributes:
 Usrcogravity – the co-ordinates of the ‘dry’ centre of gravity from the elements origin, expressed in the
frame of reference of the element.
 Usrwcogravity – the co-ordinates of the ‘wet’ centre of gravity from the elements origin, expressed in
the frame of reference of the element.
A value or expression must be entered for each attribute on each element after it has been created.

5.1.3 Accuracy of Mass Properties
The mass properties for Structural elements are calculated by the AVEVA E3D graphical engine and its
interpretation of the geometry. The accuracy of this calculation is defined by the graphics settings.
Selecting VIEW > Settings > Graphics loads the graphics settings form. Selecting the Representation tab
shows the representation settings.
The accuracy of the mass properties calculation is

influenced by the Arc Tolerance setting.
The default setting for arc tolerance is 1mm. The

minimum arc tolerance that may be defined is 0.1mm.
Arcs within AVEVA E3D are approximated as a series

of faceted edges. Reducing the arc tolerance increases
the number of faceted edges that must be considered. It
will also improve the accuracy of the result.
The user must make a judgement between calculation

speed/system performance and the degree of accuracy
required when setting the Arc Tolerance value.

5.2 Weight and Centre of Gravity
Selecting TOOLS > Mass Properties > WeightCofG displays the Weight and Centre of Gravity form.
The upper section of the form allows the user to select the
elements to be considered in the calculations.
The Add buttons allow the user to populate the grid in the
Selected Elements area of the form.
The top Add button allows the user to add elements using the
method selected in the adjacent textbox.
The Add Elements options list

provides the following element
selection methods:
 Current Element – this option adds the Current Element to

the list.
 Element Members – this option adds all members of the

Current Element.
 Members with Tubing – this option adds all members of the

Current Element that contain elements of the type TUBI
(implied tube).
 Current Collection – this option adds the current collection

(if one exists).
 Graphical Pick – this option allows the user to select

elements from the graphical display.
 Graphical Selection – this option uses the current graphical

selection.
 Within Area – this option allows the user to select an Area

from the 3D view.
 Within Volume of CE – this option adds all elements that fall

within the bounding box of the current element.
The lower Add button on the form allows the user to add elements using the Named Element textbox
adjacent. CE may be entered here as a valid name.
 The Within Area option has been designed to use AREADE elements. These elements are currently
only used for the Room Design application in AVEVA Marine and in AVEVA Plant Nuclear Applications.

Once the Selected Elements grid has been populated, right

clicking in any part of the grid displays a pop-up menu which
has the following options:
 Remove Selected Elements(s) – this option removes all

selected elements from the list.
 Remove all Elements – this option removes all elements

from the list.
 Enhance in 3D View – this option highlights all the

elements in the list in the 3D view.
 Unenhance in 3D View – this option will un-highlight all

elements in the list in the 3D view.
 Navigate To – this option is a toggle. When on, indicated by a tick to the left of the option, clicking on
any element in the list will navigate to it in the Model Explorer.
 Export to Excel… – this option enables the Selection grid to be saved to Excel. The user is presented
with a standard windows dialogue box to choose the filename and location for the Excel file.
 Print Preview… – this option produces a print preview of the Selection grid.
Initially the Selection grid has two columns, i.e. Type and Name. When the calculations are complete the
grid displays additional columns for Weight and C of G. The Grid can be filtered and sorted in the same
manner as any AVEVA E3D grid gadget.
The Settings area of the form enables adjustments to be made to

the Weight and Centre of Gravity calculations via a series of
options list and textboxes.
The Wet/Dry option list enables the selection of the Wet Weight
or Dry Weight to be used in the calculations.
The Negatives options list enables the user to select whether or not negative geometry (e.g. end
preparations, holes, etc.) will be considered in the calculations. The options are:
 Consider (net) – this option allows for negative geometry and produces the most accurate result. The
data returned is appropriate for determining as-built weights for loading calculations, transport planning,
etc.
 Ignore (gross) – this option ignores the effect of negative geometry. The data returned is appropriate
for material cost estimating, etc.
 Ignore (rough) – this option is similar to the Ignore (gross) option, however, this calculation makes a
number of simplifications (basic arc tolerances, less iterations of surface smoothing of complex primitive
configurations, etc.). It is quicker calculation and is a useful option for models with large amounts of
data or very complex geometry.
The Weight Of option list allows the user to specify whether the calculations will apply to the Element Only
or All Members associated with the element. For example, consider a section that owns several fittings.
Selecting All Members would include the geometry of the section and the fittings in the calculations.
Selecting Element Only would consider the section only and ignore the fittings.
When calculating mass properties the system uses the Representation Mass value which can be set in the
Representation Level textbox on the Weight and Centre of Gravity form or by using the Representation
tab on the Graphics Settings form.

The Refresh button adjacent to the Representation Level textbox will refresh the level setting if it is
changed on the Graphics Settings form.
Representation Mass is similar to other representation settings for different drawing levels of detail. For
example, a very simple shape may be represented at Level 1, whereas more complicated geometry may be
represented at Level 6. A more simplistic shape representation will return a mass property more quickly,
though it will be less accurate than the result obtained when a detailed representation is considered.
The CofG wrt textbox is used to calculate the centre of gravity of an element with respect to another, the
default is /* (World) coordinates.
The user can input, for example, an element Name and the calculations will use this for the list of individual
Centres of Gravities. If the user changes the CofG wrt value on pressing the Return key the total Centre of
Gravity will be refreshed. To refresh the individual Centre of Gravities displayed in the Selected Elements
grid the calculation must be performed again.
Once the appropriate settings have been chosen the calculations are made by selecting the Apply button. If
all elements are valid, the total Weight and Centre of Gravity coordinates are displayed in the appropriate
textboxes. The individual element data is displayed in the Selection grid.
 The Weight and Centre of Gravity use the current session units for Mass and Distance respectively, as
defined in the units setting form.
If a weight or C of G cannot be determined for a selected element,

i.e. a component weight cannot be found (Piping, Cable, HVAC), the
Matref attribute is not set (Structural) or the user data has not be
entered (Equipment), an error message is returned for that element.
5.3 Surface Area
Selecting TOOLS > Mass Properties > Area displays the Surface form.
The top part of the form, including the Selected Elements grid,
looks and functions in a similar way as the Weight and Centre of
Gravity form described earlier, with the following differences.
 The Add Elements options list does not contain the Within
Area option.
 The Selection grid, when populated and the calculation run,

displays a column for the Surface, rather than Weight and
CofG.
The Settings area functions in the similar way to those described

previously for the Weight and Centre of Gravity form. Except
instead of the CofG wrt text box the user is presented with a Units
option list.
Here the units displayed for surface area can be changed between
square mm, cm, m, inches and feet. This works independently of
the current session distance units.
Clicking the Apply button calculates the Total Surface area,

displaying the result in the Total Surface textbox and populating
the Surface column in the Selection grid for each element.

5.4 Volume
Selecting Tools > Mass Properties > Volume from the main menu displays the Volume form.
The top part of the form, including the Selection grid, looks and
functions in a similar way as the Weight and Centre of Gravity
form described earlier, with the following differences.
 The Add Elements options list does not contain the Within
Area option.
 After running the calculation the Selection grid displays a

column for the Volume rather than Weight and CofG.
The Settings area options functions in the similar way to those

described previously for the Weight and Centre of Gravity form.
Except, instead of the CofG wrt text box the user is presented
with a Units dropdown list.
Here the units displayed for surface area can be changed

between cubic mm, cm, m, inches and feet. This works
independently of the current session distance units.
Clicking the Apply button calculates the Total Volume, displaying

the result in the Total Volume textbox and populating the
Volume column in the Selection grid for each element.
5.5 Using the Mass Properties Utility – A Worked Example
Exit AVEVA E3D then re-enter AVEVA E3D as a Structural Designer using the details provided by the
Trainer, for example:
Project: Training (TRA)
Username: A.STEELMAN
Password: A
MDB: A-STRUCTURAL
Module: Model
Select the Structures module from the quick access

toolbar to enter the Structures application.

This worked example utilises the STRU PIPERACK to demonstrate the functions of the Mass Properties
utility.
Add the STRU PIPERACK, in ZONE ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01, to the 3D view. Select the Piperack
either from the model explorer or using a selection fence.
From the Properties Grid change the Material field to S355J0 Steel.
5.5.1 Calculating Weight and Centre of Gravity
Select TOOLS > Mass Properties > Weight CofG display the Weight and Centre of Gravity form.
With the STRU PIPERACK as the CE, select Element Members

from the Add Elements options list and click the Add button.
Each FRMW within the STRU is listed in the Selected Elements

grid. Note that the elements are highlighted in the 3D view.
Leave the Settings area of the form at the default values then click
the Apply button.
The Selected Elements grid now contains two further columns

listing the Weight and CofG coordinates for each FRMW.
Note the Total Weight and Centre of

Gravity at the bottom of the form for
all FRMWs and the axes aid
graphically showing the Centre of
Gravity in the 3D view.

In the Settings area of the form enter J1 in the CofG wrt textbox and
press the Return key.
Note that the overall Centre of Gravity coordinates have changed but
the individual Centres of Gravity are the same. Clicking the Apply
button updates the individual Centres of Gravity.
Right click within the grid, from the pop-up menu select Remove All
Elements to remove all elements from the Selected Elements grid.
In the Named Element text box enter /ROW_J-BRACING and press

the Return key then click the adjacent Add button.
In the Settings area of the form enter WORLD in the CofG wrt
textbox and press the Return key.
Leave the other settings at the default values and click the Apply
button. Note the calculated Total Weight.
In the Settings area of the form, enter 2 in the Representation Level textbox and click the Refresh button.
Click the Apply button again and note the calculated Total
Weight. The total weight should have increased from the
previous calculation.
Close the Weight and Centre of Gravity form.
The difference in weights is due to the use of different Mass

Representation levels. In this example Mass Representation
Level 2 has utilised simplified geometry (e.g. no radius at
corners of the RHS) when considering the section profile.
By contrast, Mass Representation Level 6 utilised more detailed geometry representation (e.g. radii at
corners) when considering the section profile. The geometry at different representation levels is set in the
structural profile catalogue.
In a similar manner to changing the way negative geometry is considered, the mass representation level
provides another tool allowing designers to choose between accuracy of result and speed of calculation.
 Care should be taken with the mass representation level and negative geometry. The designer must
consider how the returned information is to be used.
5.5.2 Calculating Surface Area
Change the viewing direction to a Plan North view. Use

the PowerWheelTM to set limits to extents.
Using a Wholly Within selection rectangle, select the

eastern most bay of the STRU PIPERACK.
Select TOOLS > Mass Properties > Area to display the Surface form. Select Graphical Selection from the
Add Elements option list and click the Add button to display the sections from the graphical selection in the
Selection grid.

Change the viewing direction to Isometric N-E and

note the elements are highlighted in the 3D view.
Enter 6 in the Representation Level textbox, press the

Return key and click the Update button.
Leave the other settings in the Settings area at the

default values.
Click the Apply button.
The Selection grid displays the Surface area for each

individual element and the surface area of all elements is
displayed in the Total Surface textbox at the bottom of
the form.
Right click in the Selected Elements grid and select Remove All Elements to remove all members from the
Selected Elements grid.
In the Model Explorer navigate to GENSEC 2 of FRMW ROW_J of the PIPERACK. Select Current Element
from the Add Elements options list and click the Add button.
This GENSEC owns a number of web stiffener fittings where the bracing members are connected to it.
In the Settings area of the Surface form select

Element Only from the Surface Of options list.
Click the Apply button and note the calculated Total

Surface area.
Change the Surface of setting to All Members and

click the Apply button again. Note the change in the
Total Surface value.

The Total Surface area calculated using the All Members option includes the area of the web stiffeners,
whereas, the Element Only option ignored the stiffeners and considered the surface area of the section
only. Close the Surface form.
5.5.3 Calculating Volume
Select TOOLS > Mass Properties > Volume from the main menu to display the Volume form.
In the Model Explorer navigate to FRMW ROW_7 of

the PIPERACK.
Select Element Members from the Add Elements

option list and click the Add button to display the
members of ROW_7 in the Selection grid.
Note the selected items are highlighted in the 3D

View.
Leave the settings in the Settings area at the default values. Click the Apply button to calculate the volume.
The Selection grid displays the Volume for each individual element
and the surface area of all elements is displayed in the Total
Volume textbox at the bottom of the form.
Close the Volume form.

Exercise 4 Calculating Mass Properties
This exercise adds weight and C of G data to the equipment in Area 01 and then uses the Mass Properties
utilities to determine weight, centre of gravities, surface areas and volumes.
Navigate to ZONE ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 and, using the Attributes form, add the following data to
the relevant equipment attributes.
Equipment Name Usrweight Usrwweight Usrcogravity Usrwcogravity

C1101 15000 16000 E 0 N 0 U 10350 E 0 N 0 U 9900
D1201 3000 3200 E 0 S 2400 D 50 E 0 S 2400 D 50
E1301 2250 3000 E 0 N 3250 D 5 E 0 N 3250 D 5
E1302A 1200 1500 E 0 S 2750 U 55 E 0 S 2750 U 55
E1302B 1250 1550 E 0 S 2750 D 10 E 0 S 2750 D 10
P1501A & B 250 300 E 10 S 605 D 180 E 10 S 500 D 150
P1502A & B 400 475 E 0 S 600 D 275 E 0 S 550 D 250
 The syntax for entering the C of G values is (EA NB UC) where A, B, C are the ENU coordinate values
respectively.
Calculate the dry and wet weights and C of G for :PUMP P1501A and note that the obtained values
correspond to the input values.
Calculate the weight and C of G of different combinations of equipment, with respect to the World and to
other elements.
Calculate the surface area and volumes of individual pieces of equipment and combinations of equipment.


CHAPTER 5
5 Modifying HVAC Branch
It is usual for the user to build up the HVAC design by adding components sequentially, starting at the branch
head, and positioning and orientating each component as they proceed.
The user can insert a component into an existing sequence by navigating to the item immediately before the
required location and then creating the new component.
This allows users to insert new Inline Plant Equipment or branch connecters along an existing branch.
5.1 Create Inline Plant Equipment – A Worked Example
The Inline Plant Equipment to be created is a Fire Damper which will be placed at the entry point of HVAC
into the building. In the Model Explorer 3D View, add FRMW /B01_LEVEL_03_FLOORS, located under
STRU /BUILDING_01_LEVEL_03, under ZONE /BUILDING_B01, which is within SITE-STRUCTURAL-
AREA02.This will add the roof to the 3D view, which will be used to position the Fire Damper.
Now, navigate to the first bend in the existing HVAC which is located just above the roof of the building.
From the HVAC form, select Inline Plant Equipment from the Categories list and then select CIRCULAR-
Fire Damper from the Available Types list to display the Circular Fire Damper form.
Set the FD Name(Ref) to FD1 and Curtain Direction to W.
Click the OK button to create the component.
On the HVAC form, select Position > Through ID Element from

the option list.
Now pick the roof of the building from the 3D view to reposition
the Fire Damper.
5.2 Adding a Circular Section Silencer – A Worked Example
To include a circular section silencer in the rectangular, a transformation piece either side of the silencer is
required.
Remove the building roof from the 3D view. Navigate to splitter SPLR 2 in the Model Explorer.

35
Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning Modelling TM-1817
From the HVAC form, select Transformations from the Categories list and then select Square to Round
from the Available Types list to display the Square to Round form.
Set the Duct Diameter to 450mm.
On the HVAC form, move the newly created component by

425mm.
From the HVAC form, select Inline Plant Equipment from the Categories list and then select Circular
Silencer from the Available Types list to display the Circular Silencer form.
Set the Name to SIL1. Leave all other values as the default
values.

A second transformation piece will now be added to revert back to the rectangular ducting. However, instead
of specifying this from first principles, a copy will be created of the first transformation piece and reversed to
achieve the desired round to square result.
Ensure the silencer SIL1 is the current element. From the HVAC form, select the Copy ID button. The user is
then prompted to ‘Identify Element’. Select the previously created square to round transformation from the
3D view. The Square to Round Transformation form will now be displayed.
Set the Flip Circ / Rectangle option

to Yes.
Click the Apply button to create the

component.
The HVAC system should look as shown below.

Exercise 2– Create HVAC Main Branch Components
1 Fire Dampers are required at each point the HVAC main branch penetrates through the building walls.
Using the previous worked example, navigate to the appropriate component in the hierarchy and create
suitable fire dampers for the given HVAC shape.
The complete result should look as follows:

CHAPTER 5
5 Branch Re-routing and Connection References
At the end of this session the user will be able to:
 Modify the offline leg direction of a TEE.
 Change branch direction and routing.
 Understand how to set/modify connection references for a multi-way component.
This session describes how to modify the off-leg direction of a TEE component and how to change branch
direction/routing at a TEE.
5.1 Swap Branch
The Swap Branch function allows the user to change the Offline leg Direction of a TEE.
Before carrying out the Swap Branch command it is

necessary to know the orientation of p-points at the
selected component.
To check the orientation of a component, open up the

Command Window by selecting the Commands button
located in the Display group of the TOOLS tab.
Make sure the required component is CE, enter Q P3 and

press the return key. This will populate the command
window with the location and orientation of p-point P3 of the
selected cable tray component.
After establishing the orientation of the p-points the user

can re-orientate the component. A tee can be rotated
through 180 degrees, so that the direction of its offline leg
(P3) is reversed, by navigating to the tee and selecting
Swap Branch from the Tools group on the Cable Tray tab.
The component immediately updates in the graphical view.

The new orientation can be confirmed by re-checking the
p-point orientation using the same method.
 In order to retain the correct orientation for the open

side of the tray, this operation results in the p-arrive
(P1) and p-leave (P2) directions being reversed. To
maintain connectivity, p-arrive is reset to P2 and p-
leave is reset to P1 automatically.
5.2 Change Exit
The Change Exit function allows the user to change the Branch Direction at a Tee or Bend
By default, p-arrive for a tee is set to P1 and p-leave is set to P2. The off-leg (for connection to another branch)
is set to P3.
The p-leave of a tee can be changed from P2 to P3. This is achieved by navigating to the tee then selecting
Change Exit from the Tools group on the Cable Tray tab. This function allows the user to toggle the p-leave
point between P2 and P3.
© Copyright 2013
The same function can also be applied to a Bend to change the direction of the p-leave point. It swaps the p-
arrive and p-leave, so that P1 is p-leave, and P2 is p-arrive.
Before Change Exit Selection After Change Exit Selection
5.3 Changing Branch Routing at a Tee
By default, the p-arrive of a tee is set to P1 and the p-leave is set to

P2, so that the branch route continues straight through the tee. It is
possible to change the p-leave such that the branch route enters or
leaves the tee via P3. This is achieved by selecting Route
Component located within the Tools group on the Cable Tray tab.
This then displays the Modify Route form.
Three radio button options are available to the user. As previously described the default setting is the Route
Through option. Selecting the Branch Off option will change the p-leave point to the orthogonal branch of
the tee (i.e. P3). Selecting the Split Route option will change the p-arrive point to the orthogonal branch of
the tee. The p-leave point will be at P2.
Route Through Branch Off Split Route
Once the desired configuration has been selected the user must click the Apply button to instigate the
change. The tee orientation will immediately update to suit the new configuration.
The form also contains a CE button which allows the user to modify the configuration of several tee
components without closing the form.
© Copyright 2013
48
www.aveva.com
5.4 Changing a Component Connection Reference Explicitly
On connection of a multi-way component within a branch to another item (such as a nozzle, or the head or tail
of another branch), the Connection Reference (CREF) attribute of the component identifies the connected
item.
To unset the component reference, or connect it to a different

item, the user must select Connection Ref. from the Connect
group on the Cable Tray tab. Doing so will open the
Connection Reference form.
The appearance of the Connection Reference form will vary

depending on the number of offline legs held by the cable tray
component being modified.
For a component with only one offline leg (e.g. a tee), the Connection Reference form will only display the
connection reference for the offline leg (usually P3).
Components with more than one off-line leg have a CRFA attribute which is used to store the connection
reference at each p-point. For components with more than one offline leg (e.g. a cross), the Connection
References form displays an options list and a reference text box. The connection reference for each p-
point can be checked by selecting the desired point from the options list.
The connection reference can be removed by selecting the Unset button adjacent to the reference text box.
The connection reference can be changed to another item by entering the item name in the reference text
box then selecting the Apply button. Selecting the Reset button will restore the last connection references
written to the database.
 Applied connection references will be written to the database when the form is dismissed.
 Changing the connection reference does not change the position or orientation of any components, so
it is also necessary to ensure that the resulting geometry makes sense.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 3a – Positioning Branch Components - CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B3
1. Navigate to TEE 1 of BRANCH /CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B1 in the Model Explorer and set the P3
direction to West by using the Swap Branch functionality.
2. Create a new branch CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B3 with its Head connect to the Tee modified previously
in the exercise and tail connected to the Head of Branch CTRAY-AREA01-POWER/B1
3. Create, position and orientate components to the branch as shown below using functionality explained in
the previous chapters.
View Looking South
View Looking Down
© Copyright 2013
50
www.aveva.com
Exercise 3b – Positioning Branch Components - CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B1
1. Add the zone ZONE-CWAY-AREA01-CONTROL in the Model Explorer and add the zone to the 3D view.
2. Navigate to TEE 1 of BRANCH /CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B1 and position the tee through branch
CTRAY-AREA01-CONTROL/B1 and set the P3 direction to West.
View Looking Down
Isometric View
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 3c – Positioning Branch Components - CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B2
1. Navigate to Cabletray main CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL in the Model Explorer and create a new
Cabletray branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B2. The branch head will be connected to the first tee on
branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B1 and the tail connected to the head of branch CTRAY-AREA01-
CONTROL/B1.
© Copyright 2013
52
www.aveva.com
Exercise 3d – Positioning Branch Components - CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B2
1. Navigate to Cable tray branch CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B2 in the Model Explorer and create a 90
degree Outside Riser 300mm Bend Radius and position it through the tail of the branch.
© Copyright 2013
© Copyright 2013
54
www.aveva.com
CHAPTER 5
5 Equipment Utilities
The Equipment discipline provides utilities that can aid productivity for equipment modelling and reporting,
including the Mechanical Equipment Interface, the Import Equipment Data utility and the Equipment
Report utility.
5.1 The Mechanical Equipment Interface
The Mechanical Equipment Interface (MEI) enables STEP (.stp) files generated by mechanical modeling
software to be imported into AVEVA E3D. Whilst the resultant equipment items are not ‘intelligent’, nozzles
may be created to overlay the imported model so that pipework may be connected to the equipment.
5.1.1 Importing Equipment with MEI – A Worked Example
On the TOOLS tab, in the Import group, click the MEI

button to display the MEI Import form.
Make ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 the CE and on

the Import tab of the form, click the CE button to set
the storage location for the imported model.
The model may be imported below a SITE, ZONE or

EQUI or into an Application Data World (APPLDW)
structure.
Click the Browse button to display the Select file to

Import browser and locate the file TM-1811_Pump-
AA5A.stp, typically located at:
C:\AVEVA\Plant\PlantTraining2.1\Training\userdat
a
Click the Open button on the browser to populate the

Import File textbox.
The model may be imported as an Equipment (EQUI) element or a Volume Model (VOLM) element,
selected from the Import Model As options list. Leave the setting as Equipment, the default.
Empty the 3D View and click the Import button to start the model import.
The import will take time depending on the size of the file to be imported.
Once processed, the imported model is displayed in the 3D View. The

orientation may not be correct, as in this case.
Set the viewing direction to Iso .
Right click on EQUI TM-1811_Pump-AA5A in Model Explorer and select

Attributes… from the pop-up menu to display the Attributes form.
Click in the Value cell of the Orientation WRT Owner attribute and edit
the attribute from Y is N and Z is U to Y is U and Z is E.
The pump is now orientated correctly. Close the Attributes form.

Select the Modify tab on the MEI Import form.
In the Create Connections frame click the Create Nozzle at Selected

Element… link label to display the MEI Create Nozzle form.
Enter AA5A/N1 in the Name textbox.
Select ANSI-NOZZLES from the Specification options list.
Select 300lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list.
Select 80mm from the Bore options list.
Enter 300 in the Height textbox.
With the pump as the CE zoom in to the vertical nozzle on the body of the
pump. Click the Position Nozzle link label to display additional information
on positioning at the bottom of the form:
Click and hold the left mouse button and select two opposing points on the
circumference of the nozzle, releasing the mouse button after each pick
The new nozzle is located in the centre of the model nozzle but is incorrectly
orientated.
Click the Flip Direction link label to orientate the nozzle correctly, as indicated by
the aid arrow.

Click the Create Nozzle link label to create the new ‘intelligent’ nozzle.
Close the MEI Create Nozzle and the MEI Import forms.
5.1.2 Exporting Equipment with MEI
Equipment (EQUI) or Volume Model (VOLM) elements in AVEVA E3D may be exported to a STEP (.stp) file
and imported by other 3rd Party packages.
On the TOOLS tab, in the Export group,

click the MEI button to display the MEI
Export form.
The buttons in the Element List frame

enable elements to be added to the
Element List for export.
The Clear All and Clear Selection

buttons below the list enable elements to
be removed from the Element List.
The textbox in the Output frame enables

a filename for the exported elements to
be entered.
Clicking the Browse… button adjacent to

the textbox displays a Select File
browser to locate and select a file or
filename.
Clicking the OK button creates the STEP file in the specified location.
5.2 Import Equipment Data Utility
The Import Equipment Data utility enables EQUI elements to be created in the database by importing data
from an Excel (.xls) or comma separated value (.csv) file. The import data may set any of the standard
attributes or UDAs of an EQUI element but will not create any primitives.

On the TOOLS tab, in the Import group,

clicking the Excel button displays the Data
Import form, a standard Windows browser
dialogue, where the file to be imported may
be located.
Once found, clicking the Open button on the

form closes the form and imports the data.
The data may take a short time to process,

depending on the size of the import file.
Once processed, the Data Import form is

opened, displaying the results of the import.
The Type column displays the element type, including UDETs, and each entry is prefixed by an icon which
represent the status of the data, as described in the following table:
This icon indicates that no equipment with the name exists in the database. If the data is loaded, an
element of this name will be created.
This icon indicates that equipment with the name already exists in the database. If the Load All Data
function is used, then attributes of the existing equipment will be modified. No action will be
taken on rows with this icon if the Load New Data button is used.
This icon indicates that the system has identified a problem with this row of data. No action will be
taken on rows with this icon when the Load All Data or Load New Data buttons are used.
Selecting this row in the table will display a message in

the Messages area of the form to indicate why this row
cannot be processed.

Clicking the Load All Data button will process all of the rows that create a new element or modify an
existing element. Clicking the Load New Data button will only process the rows that create new elements.
 New data is created at the current location in the database if an owning element field is not included in
the imported file. The owning element is considered to be the current element when the file was loaded
and the rows of data analysed, not the current element when a Load button is pressed. If an owning
element field is provided in the import file, the system will attempt to create elements under the
specified owner.
Once imported, the icons on the left of the form change to indicate the status of the loaded data.
This icon indicates that the creation or modification operation was successful, i.e. an element has
been created or modified in the database.
This icon indicates that the operation has not completed successfully because of an error found while
the system was trying to create or modify an element. If an attribute value is incorrect then the
element has been created, but not all of its attribute data has been loaded.
The Undo function may be used to remove all of the changes made by the load operation and revert
the database back to its state before the load, or the errors on the erroneous elements dealt with
individually.
Selecting a row in the table with this icon will display a message in the Messages area of the form to
indicate the error.
Another import file can be loaded by clicking the Open File button or by typing a name directly into the
filename textbox on the form.
The Reload File button reloads the file shown in the filename textbox. This may be necessary if the current
element was incorrect or an owner element was missing when the file was first loaded.
It is possible to load element types other than Equipment using this utility. If the imported file is carefully
constructed, following the rules listed below, it would be possible to import other element types provided that
fields in the file contain all of the required data. For example, a nozzle list could be loaded provided that the
owning equipment name is provided in an Owner field for each nozzle element, and the Type field identifies
the element as a nozzle.
5.2.1 Rules for the Content of Import XLS and CSV Files
 The file must be a valid .csv format or .xls format file.
 The first row of the file contains a list of headings. Each heading represents a column in the file
containing an attribute of the elements being loaded.
 There must be a NAME column; otherwise the file will not be loaded. The NAME column may contain
the name of a new element, or the name of an existing element. If an existing element name is used,
then this row is an update row for that element. The name used must obey the normal rules for element
naming in AVEVA E3D.
 There must be a TYPE column. This column contains the database element type of the element being
loaded, e.g. EQUI. If this column is absent, the file will not be loaded. If the Project has been configured
with User Defined Element Types, then this column could contain a valid UDET name (e.g. :PUMP). If
the named element already exists, but its element type does not match the TYPE in the file, then this
row will be ignored and an error raised.
 An OWNER column may be included. If this column is present, it must contain the name of an existing
element that will own each imported item when it is created. This owner name will be ignored if the
imported item already exists, i.e. it is not possible to change the owner of existing Equipment by using
the OWNER column. If the OWNER column does not exist in the file, then the owner is the current
location in the Design db hierarchy at the time that the file is loaded and analysed. In this case, the
current database element at the time that the file is loaded must be able to contain imported elements.
 The remaining headings in the file must be valid attribute names for the element type being loaded. The
attribute names may include User Defined Attribute (UDA) names.
 Columns cannot be added for array type attributes unless those attributes can be set using a list of
values in a single field in the file. For example, the string "10 20 30" in a DESP field would set design
parameter 1 to 10, 2 to 20 and 3 to 30.
 Every row following the heading row must contain the correct number of fields (columns) as defined by
the heading row.
 Every row must contain valid values, or no values, for each field.
 If a new element is being created, an attribute will be set to its default value if a field in the file is empty.
Two adjacent separators denote an empty field. The NAME and TYPE fields cannot be empty.
 If an existing element is being modified, an attribute value will remain unchanged if a field in the file is
empty.
 It is not possible to unset an attribute value from a file, other than by providing the default value. For
example "X0Y0Z0" for a position.
 Each field in the file must be a text field. Care must be taken with fields containing values that are
considered by Microsoft Excel to be a formula. For example a database reference number in the form
"=123/456" would be considered to be a formula because of the = character. This can be overcome by
proceeding the = character with a single quote character that forces the field to be treated as a text
string. If the file will not load successfully into Microsoft Excel, it will not load successfully using this
import utility.
Any import of new or modified element data will be subject to the data access control configuration
implemented for the current User and Project.
This utility will not attempt to claim data automatically in an Explicit Claim database. If the data is imported
into an Implicit Claim database, then the appropriate elements will be claimed, if not already claimed by
another user.
5.3 Equipment Report Utility
The Equipment Report utility is specifically designed to quickly generate configurable equipment reports
using the equipment elements and their attributes stored in the Design databases. The reports may be
exported to Excel for printing or additional enhancement.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Report group, clicking the Equipment Report button displays the
Equipment Report form. The form has two tabs, Columns and Output.

5.3.1 Selecting Attributes to Output
The Columns tab allows the definition of the report including the elements and their attributes to be
reported.
The Report Type options list sets the type of element to be reported. Reports can be generated for
Equipment items, Nozzles or Electrical Components.
The scope of the report is selected using the Scope options list and can be set to All, where the entire MDB
is used or the Current Element where the CE will be used.
The tab has two lists, the left showing Available Attributes and the right showing Chosen Attributes
which, by default, is empty.
The Available Attributes list shows the standard attributes and UDAs available for the selected report
element type, in alpha-numeric order, together with their Description, Data Type and Report Header, i.e.
the text that will appear at the top of the column if the attribute is selected to appear in the report.
The Pseudo Attributes checkbox, which is by default unchecked, may be used to include the pseudo
attributes of an element in the Available Attributes list, thereby making them available for inclusion in the
report.
Once the attribute selection process has commenced the checkbox is greyed out, therefore, the choice
whether to include them in the report must be made before attribute selection starts.
Emptying the Chosen Attributes list re-activates the Pseudo Attributes checkbox.
Between the two lists are four buttons that facilitate transfer of the attributes from one pane to another.
Adds the selected attributes to the Chosen Attributes list.
Adds all attributes to the Chosen Attributes list.
Removes selected attributes from the Chosen Attributes list.
Removes all attributes from the Chosen Attributes list.

Left clicking on an attribute in either list highlights the selection. Multiple attributes may be selected in either
list using the standard Windows selection methods. Attributes may only appear in one of the lists; therefore,
attributes added to the Chosen Attributes list no longer appear in the Available Attributes list.
The attributes will populate the Chosen Attributes list in the order they are selected. Multiple, non-
contiguous selections will appear in alpha-numeric order when added to the Chosen Attributes list. The
four buttons on the right hand side of the Chosen Attributes list may be used to modify the list order.
Moves the selected attributes to the top of the list.
Moves the selected attributes up the list.
Moves the selected attributes down the list.
Moves the selected attributes to the bottom of the list.
5.3.2 Outputting Attributes
Having selected the Element Type, Scope and Attributes, clicking the Output tab presents the data in a
grid where the columns are in the order specified in the Chosen Attributes list and the column headings are
the Report Header texts.
 The data in the Output tab grid may be grouped, filtered, sorted and summarised as per standard
AVEVA E3D grid functionality.

Once the data has been

manipulated to suit the report
requirements, clicking the Export to
Excel button on the Equipment
Report form opens a standard
windows Save As dialogue window,
where the location and filename of
the output may be specified.
Clicking the Save button on the

Save As dialogue saves the file with
the specified filename to the
specified location and closes the
form.
Saving the output activates the

Open in Excel button on the
Equipment Report form which
opens the saved file in Excel.
Grouped and filter operations on the Output tab are reflected in the resulting Excel file.

Exercise 4 Data Import and Equipment Reports
This exercise imports a csv file to create a number of equipment elements and generates various equipment
reports.
 Create a SITE named /New_Equipment and a ZONE named /Equipment_List.
 Import file TM-1811_Equip-Import.csv, located in the AVEVA E3D user folder typically
C:\AVEVA\Plant \PlantTraining2.1\Training\userdata, to the new Zone.
 Create, and export to Excel, equipment reports for:
a) all the equipment in the MDB.
b) all the equipment in SITE SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01.
c) all the equipment in SITE New_Equipment.
 The equipment reports should show the following attributes in the order given:
a) NAMN (Pseudo Attribute).
b) Owner.
c) ActType.
d) Description.
e) Position.
f) Orientation.

CHAPTER 6
6 Cable Tray Creation
Once the Cableway branches have been routed, they can be dressed with material. The material can be
applied to the Cableway regardless of whether cables have been routed or not.
The default specification selected defines the cross section to be used for space reservation and therefore the
cable tray material. In the Model hierarchy the material is situated below the Cableway Branch element. This
material element will own the Cableway material components such as Straights, Bends, Risers, Tees, Crosses
and Reducers.
6.1 How It Works
There are two distinct parts to the Cable Tray side of the application. The first is the Preliminary Dressing.
These elements are always created first, whether using the manual or automatic dressing options.
In the Model Explorer these appear as CTSTRA (Straights), CTBEND (Bends), CTRISE (Risers), CTTEE
(Tees), CTCROS (Crosses) and CTREDU (Reducers) elements, beneath the administrative CTMTRL (Cable
Tray Material) element.
The Preliminary Dressing items define the size and

basic parameters of the components that will be used.
When using the automatic dressing options, the system
assesses the Cableway Branch that has been selected
and, based on defined criteria, creates a Preliminary
Dressing item for each component. It will, for example,
calculate the distance between two CTBEND
components, and fill it with the appropriate number of
CTSTRA elements.
The basic parameters for each of these vary slightly; for

example, a CTBEND has Bend Type (Left of Right),
Radius, Angle and Width, to name a few.
Preliminary Dressing items appear as simple blocks, as

shown on the right.
Once the Preliminary Dressing has been created, the material components can be applied. The automatic
dressing options use the information from the Preliminary Dressing elements to select the correct
component. If working manually, the components are selected individually.
The material components appear in the Model Explorer

as CTRAY elements beneath the corresponding
CTSTRA, CTBEND etc…
Once the material component is added, the Preliminary

Dressing item will be automatically hidden from view.

85
6.2 Creating Cableway Branch Material
From either the graphical view or the Model Explorer select the Cableway branch to be dressed with Cable
Tray Material.
The Create Material form can be accessed either by clicking the Create Cableway Material button located
in the Create group. Alternatively it can be accessed by invoking the PowerWheel and selecting the Material
tile in the Cable sub menu.
 The Dressing link label on the Branch Tasks form also displays the Create Material form.
The Create Material form has a number of fields for

administrative functions e.g. Material Name, Description,
Function, and Purpose. There are also a number of
additional fields:
Specification – the material specification can be

selected from the drop down list.
First Gap – sets the size of the gap before every

material component except where there are two adjoining
straights.
Intermediate Gap – sets the gap distance between all

adjoining straights.
Last Gap – sets the size of the gap after every material
component except where there are two adjoining
straights.
Tier Heights – this allows the user to key in single or

multiple values for the tier height(s).
Width – this is the default Cableway width value; the

user can enter a new value if required.
Height – this is the default Cableway height value; the

user can enter a new value if required.
Clicking the Create link label creates the CTMTRL (Cable

Tray Material) element under the CWBRAN element, and
also displays the Modify Material form which allows the
user to make modifications to the Cableway branch
material.
 A Cableway branch material element (CTMTRL) must exist in the Design database for material elements
to be created.
© Copyright 2013
Attributes
 Autoname Elements – used to apply Autonaming to all

material elements below the CTMTRL element.
 Apply Changes – applies any changes made.
 Discard Changes – cancels any changes made.
Preliminary Dressing
 Dimensions defined by user… – this displays the

Preliminary Dressing (User Defined Dimensions)
form allowing the user to add or remove cable tray
material from the Cableway branch.
 Dimensions based on branch fill levels… – this

displays the Preliminary Dressing (Branch Fill
Level) form allowing the user to add or remove cable
tray material from the Cableway branch.
Other Dressing options
 Dress using templates… – this displays the Dress

using Templates form and allows the user to add or
remove template cable tray material from the
Cableway branch.
 Explicit Dressing… – This displays the Create

<element> form allowing the user to create straights/
bends/risers etc. as required.
Remove Dressing
 From Branch – this allows the user to remove the cable

tray material from the whole Cableway branch.
 From Segment… – this allows the user to remove a

complete segment of cable tray material from the
Cableway branch by graphical selection.
 From Point… – this allows the user to graphically pick a single segment of cable tray material to
remove from the Cableway branch, i.e. a single straight.
 All Straights from Branch – this allows the user to remove all cable tray straight material from the
Cableway branch and only leaves the tees, bends, etc.
 All Straights from Segment… – this allows the user to remove all cable tray straight material from a
segment of the Cableway branch.
6.3 Preliminary Dressing – Dimensions defined by user
Click the Dimensions defined by user link label from the Modify Material form to access the Preliminary
Dressing form. A message dialogue appears informing the user the catalogues for the Cableway Material
have been loaded.
Click the OK button to confirm this.
© Copyright 2013
Once the catalogues have been loaded, the Preliminary

Dressing (User defined Dimensions) form is displayed.
The attribute section can be opened by clicking the plus button.
A Tier Height can be entered from this form. To save the

changes click the Apply Changes link label.
Tier Height
If the Tier Height has been entered and is no longer required, right click on the down-arrow on the Tier
Heights field and click the Remove button from the pop-up menu. Click the Apply Changes link label again
to save this change.
© Copyright 2013
6.3.1 Dress Whole Branch
On the Dress whole branch section of the

Preliminary Dressing (User defined Dimensions)
form, there are a range of options for how the
branch should be dressed. Examples of the different
options are given below.
With Cable try components With Straights
With Straights (Do not cut) With only Bends and Risers
With only Tees and Crosses
Fill Gaps with Straights – this option will insert straight sections into any gaps that remain between existing
tray components.
Sort trays components – this option will reorder the elements in the Model Explorer to ensure they are in the
correct order.
© Copyright 2013
6.3.2 Dress part of Branch – Picked Point
From the Dress part of branch section of the Preliminary Dressing (User defined Dimensions) form click, the
Picked Point… link label. This option will dress an individual component at or near a selected point. The user
is prompted in the top left hand corner of the 3D view to ‘Pick near point to be dressed’. Using the cursor pick
the Cableway at the point for dressing. The preliminary material will be applied.
Repeat the process to add additional material.
 This option cannot be used for creating Straights. If a straight section is selected, then the nearest non-
straight component to the point of selection will be added.
6.3.3 Dress part of Branch – Picked Attachment Point
From the Dress part of branch section of the Preliminary Dressing (User defined Dimensions) form, click the
Picked Attachment Point… link label. The user is prompted in the top left hand corner of 3D view to ‘Pick
RATTA to dress’. Using the cursor pick a RATTA within the Cableway segment to add the preliminary
cross/tee.
6.3.4 Dress part of Branch – Straights between Picked Components
Straight between Picked Components… link label.
The user is prompted in the top left hand corner of the 3D view to ‘Pick First Component’. Select any existing
material component from the graphical display.
The user is then prompted to ‘Pick Second Component’. After picking the second material component, a
preliminary material straight will be applied between the two picked components.
© Copyright 2013
6.3.5 Dress part of Branch – Segment with Straights
Segment with Straights… link label. The user is prompted in the top left hand corner of the 3D view to ‘Pick
near the start of the segment to be dressed’. Using the cursor pick any undressed straight segment. The
preliminary material straight will now appear.
6.3.6 Dress part of Branch – Segment with all Components
Segment with all components… link label. The user is prompted in the top left hand corner of the 3D view
to ‘Pick near the start of the segment to be dressed’. Using the cursor, select part of the branch to add
preliminary material to that segment.
© Copyright 2013
6.3.7 Dress part of Branch – Multiple Segments in Line
This option allows user to create preliminary dressing for multiple segments in a straight line i.e. if a straight
in a Cableway has POINTR elements between the two bends/risers. Once clicked, the user is prompted to
pick near the POINTR elements on the straight. Once finished, the preliminary material straight appears on
the Cableway.
6.4 Preliminary Dressing – Dimensions based on branch fill levels
The Dimensions based on branch fill levels…, work in the same way
as the Dimensions defined by user… except that the cables inside the
cable tray are taken into account and a suitable sized cable tray material
will be applied.
6.5 Applying the Material
Once the user has dressed the branch with the preliminary Cableway material, this can be applied by clicking
the Apply link label from the Material section of the Preliminary Dressing (User defined Dimensions) form.
To remove the material from the cable tray click the Remove link label from the Material section on the
Preliminary Dressing (User defined Dimensions) form.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 7 – Cable Tray Material
1. Apply the Material ST/VANTRUNK-SW5-SS to the Cableways created earlier in the course using
combinations of the various options discussed in this section. The CWAYS can be found in the
ZONE-CWAY-AREA03, ZONE-CWAY-AREA02 and ZONE-CWAY-AREA01.
© Copyright 2013
© Copyright 2013
CHAPTER 6
6 Equipment Associations
This chapter gives an overview of associations and describes the use of the Equipment Association utility
within AVEVA E3D.
6.1 Overview of Associations
Associations are user defined constraints (restrictions) between two or more objects in the Model database.
The restrictions provide logic that can be evaluated to describe how the objects relate to each other.
Associations may include:
 Geometric restrictions, e.g. the origin points of two elements must be co-incident.
 Checking the existence of elements, e.g. a hole exists for a pipe to pass through.
 Attribute comparison, e.g. the material of the associated elements are the same.
AVEVA provides a set of core association definitions that are used in the AVEVA E3D utilities and
applications that use associations, i.e. Equipment Associations, Hole Management and MDS. The User is
also able to create alternative association definitions for user defined utilities and applications.
Associations are passive, i.e. they must be queried to see if they pass or fail their defined restrictions. An
association cannot resolve itself if it is broken. It must be clearly understood that association utilities and
applications are NOT geometric constraint solvers.
 For dynamic geometric constraints attribute rules should be used. Information on these can be found in
the AVEVA E3D help files and reference guides. Attribute rules are not discussed in this Training
Guide.
6.2 Associations Hierarchy
Association Definitions are stored in read only Design (DESI) database with the following hierarchy
elements.

Associations are stored in a Design database with the following hierarchy elements.
6.3 How Equipment Associations Work
When an Equipment Association is created, an instance of the selected Association Definition is created
in the first Association Group (ASSOGP) element with the Purpose attribute set to ASEQ and the
references set for the objects involved in the association. The restriction(s) of the association are tested and
if the results are valid the association is passed and if invalid, the association is failed.

6.4 Types of Equipment Associations
The Equipment Associations utility provides pre-defined associations for equipment based on the AVEVA
supplied core associations. The types of equipment associations are:
Two faces are touching (coplanar) or separated by a given distance.

Mate Directions defined by the two face normals are parallel and in the
opposite direction.
Two faces are aligned (coplanar) or separated by a given distance.

Align Directions defined by the two face normals are parallel and in the same
direction.
Two directions are parallel, pointing in the same direction or in opposed

Parallel
directions.
Parallel Offset Two lines are parallel and separated by a given distance.
True Distance Two points are coincident or separated by a given distance.
Elevation The elevation of two points is separated by a given distance.
Horizontal One point is vertically above the other point, or separated in the
Distance horizontal plane by a given distance.
Point Above
A point is vertically above or below a line within a given tolerance.
Line
The equipment associations outlined above require association reference planes to be established between
Model elements. The reference planes can be established on the standard P-points for primitives or on
additional design points created uniquely for associations.
6.5 Adding Design Points to Equipment
Although existing P-points of equipment primitives may be picked for the association reference planes, it can
be quite difficult to pick a particular graphical point in a 3D View where many elements are displayed. To
make it easier to select reference points or lines to be used in an Association, it is recommended that
Design Points are created in Design Templates, and P-points in catalogue items that identify themselves as
connection points for associations.

However, if these points are not available in the templates or catalogue items, Design Points may be added
to EQUI element, or UDETs based on an EQUI, at appropriate locations in the element so that they are
readily available to users when creating associations.
The Association Design Points must have their Purpose attribute set to a four character value where the
first two characters are chosen by the user defining the point, and the last two characters must be 'FA'.
For example, an Equipment may be created with three Association Design Points with Purpose attributes
set to CLFA for centre-line, BOFA for bottom face and TOFA for top face.
Any number of reference points can be created for each

element, but it is recommended that only the most
commonly used reference points on each type of equipment
or catalogue item are defined in this way, otherwise they will
become difficult to identify in a 3D View.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Tools group, clicking

Design Point button displays the Design Points form.
This allows the creation of a Design Point Set (DPSE),

owned by an EQUI or UDET based on an EQUI.
Three types of Design point may be created:
Cartesian Point (DPCA)
A Cartesian Point’s position is

specified in terms of X, Y and Z co-
ordinates from the origin.
Cylindrical Point (DPCY)
A Cylindrical Point’s position is

specified as a position on the surface
of a cylinder at a given position from
the origin and with given dimensions.
Spherical Point (DPSP)
A Spherical Point’s position is

specified as a position on the surface
of a sphere at a given position from
the origin and with given dimensions

6.6 Equipment Associations – A Worked Example
This worked example uses the Equipment Associations

utility to create and modify equipment associations using
the equipment elements of the training project.
Association Worlds (ASSOWL) and Association

Group (ASSOGP) elements are required for Equipment
Associations and Hole Management.
These elements are present in the Model Explorer but

are hidden by default.
On the PROJECT tab, select Options > System >

Explorer Settings to display the Explorer Settings
form.
Uncheck the Hide non-user System Data checkbox

and clicking the Apply button. The hidden elements are
displayed in Model Explorer

6.6.1 Creating an Association
Empty the Drawlist and add ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the 3D View.
Identify the two pumps named /P1501A and /P1501B in the 3D View. A Parallel Offset association will be
created for these two pumps to ensure that their centrelines remain parallel at a minimum distance.
With P1501B as the CE, on the EQUIPMENT tab, in the

Associate group, click Equipment button to display the
Equipment Associations form.
Note that P1501B is displayed at the top of the form as the

Association Item.
 If an EQUI item, or UDET based on an EQUI, is not the

CE when the form is opened, the majority of the form is
greyed out until the Select Association item… link label
is clicked and a valid element identified in a 3D View.
Click the Parallel Offset radio button to set the type of

association required.
Click the Pick Association Partner Element link label to

display the prompt ‘Pick an Element to associate with’ and
pick P1501A from the 3D View.
Note that a graphics aid arrow, labelled ZDIR is displayed on

each of the selected items.
 In this example the ZDIR points represent the default reference planes on the items, i.e. the origin of
the pumps.

When the partner item has been selected the Equipment

Associations form changes to display further creation details
for the association.
 The two selected element names involved in the

association are displayed in separate areas of the form.
Enter P1501A/B_POFFSET in the Association Name

textbox.
Select Min. from the Separation options list and enter 1800 in
the adjacent textbox. This means that the two pumps must
have a minimum centreline separation of 1800mm.
Check the Measure Association checkbox to display a

dimension aid in the 3D View.
The measured distance is between the selected reference

planes, or points, e.g. in this case the origins of the two pieces
of equipment.
Click the Create Association button to create the parallel

offset association between the two pumps. Note that the
association Test Result displays Passed as the measured
distance was 1830, i.e. greater than the minimum of 1800mm.
The association is now displayed in the Associations

Between These Objects list and the Create Association
button changes to the Apply Changes button.
Click the Back button to display the Participates in

Associations list in the Association Details frame.

Right click the newly created association in the list to

highlight it in blue and display the pop-up menu:
Select the Navigate To option and note in the Model

Explorer that the Association (ASSOC) element, stored in
the Association Group (ASSOGP), is now the CE.
Click the Modify Association link label to return to the

previous display mode.
Double click P1501A in the 3D View to invoke Editor

mode. Using the X Axis Linear handle move P1501A
towards P1501B by at least 200mm.
Without leaving Editor mode, right click on the association

in the Associations Between These Objects grid and
select Test this Association from the pop-up menu.
The Test Result column now displays Failed as the

distance between the pumps is now less than the required
1800mm minimum.
Right click the in the Associations Between These Objects

grid again and select Association Details… from the pop-up
menu to display the Association Detail form.
This form gives details of the selected association including

the Test Result for the association and for the restriction(s)
and the elements involved in the association.
In this example, the Parallel Offset association has only one

restriction. Other associations may have two or more
restrictions. If any one restriction fails the whole association
fails.
The Association Detail form will give details of the

restriction(s) which have failed, causing the association to fail.
Close the Association Detail form.
Click the Undo button on the Quick Access Toolbar to move P1501A back to its original position. Press
Escape to exit Editor mode.
Re-test the association to ensure that the Test Result is now Passed. Click the Back button on the
Equipment Associations form to return to the previous form display showing the association types.

6.6.2 Modifying an Association
Once created, an association may be modified at any time by

clicking the Modify Association… link label or selecting the
Modify… option from the pop-up menu in the associations list.
Select the P1501A/B_POFFSET association in the list and

click the Modify Association link label. Note that the form
changes to display the selected association as described in
the creation process.
Change the name of the association to

P1501A/B_POFFSET_MIN and enter a new minimum
dimension of 1500 in the textbox.
Click the Apply Changes button to accept the changes.
6.6.3 Creating a Second Association for the Same Items
Click the Back button to return the form to its previous

display. Note that P1501B is still the association item.
Click the Select new Association partner… link label to

display the prompt ‘‘Pick an Element to associate with’ and
select P1501A.
Enter P1501A/B_POFFSET_MAX in the Association Name

textbox.
Select Max from the Separation options list and enter 2200 in
the adjacent textbox.
Click the Create Association button to create the new

association.
Click the Back button to return to the previous display and

note that there are now two associations involving pumps
P1501A and P1501B.
Test the associations by moving either pump beyond the maximum and minimum constraints before
returning them to their original positions.

6.6.4 Selecting Reference Planes
For the associations created previously in this worked example the default ZDIR origin plane was used,
however, reference planes may also be selected from existing P-points on elements consisting of primitives
or Plines from structural profile elements.
Clear the Drawlist. Drag and drop pumps :PUMP P1502A and :PUMP P1502B from ZONE-EQUIPMENT-
AREA01 and :SLAB BASE_SLAB from ZONE ZONE-CIVIL-AREA01 into the 3D View and use the
PowerWheelTM to set Limits Extents.
Identify pump P1502B in the 3D View. A Mate association will be created between the pump and its
concrete base using selected reference planes.
Click the Select Association Item… link label at the top of the
Equipment Associations form and select P1502B from the 3D
View.
Click the Mate radio button to set the type of association

required.
Click the Select Association Partner Element link label to

display the prompt ‘Pick an Element to associate with’ and
pick P1502B_BASE from the 3D View.
Note that a ZDIR aid default reference plane is displayed on

each element; however, the plane on the pump is at its origin,
which is not in the correct position for the association.
Click the Pick reference Plane… link label in the Source

Element frame to display the prompt ‘Pick reference P-point’.
Left click and hold on the pump baseplate BOX primitive and
select the lowest of the three P-points displayed at the centre
of the primitive, i.e. P6.
 It may be necessary to use wireline mode to select the P-

point.
Click the Pick reference Plane… link label in the Partner

Element frame to display the prompt ‘Pick reference P-point’.
Left click and hold on the base BOX primitive and select the
upper of the three P-points displayed at the centre of the
primitive, i.e. P3.
Enter P1502B/BASE-MATE in the Association Name textbox.
Select Equal from the Separation options list and enter 0 in the adjacent textbox.
Click the Create Association button to create the association and check that the Test Result has passed.
Click the Back button on the Equipment Associations form.

Right click on the newly created association in the list and select
Association Details… from the pop-up menu to display the
Association Detail form.
Note that this association comprises of two restrictions, one that
the directions of the reference planes must be parallel and
opposite and one for the separation, i.e. Distance 1st member
point to 2nd member plane.
Move the pump up using the Editor mode and re-test the
association. Check the association details again and note that
only one of the two restrictions has failed, i.e. the separation.
Return the pump to its original position and exit Editor mode.
Close the Association Detail form and the Equipment
Associations form.
6.6.5 Creating a Design Point
Make pump P1502A the CE.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Tools group, click the Design

Point button to display the Design Points form.
Select Create > Cartesian Point… from the form menu to

display the Create – Cartesian Design Point form.
Note that a DPSE element has been created below the

:PUMP P1502A element in Model Explorer.
The Design Point will be placed in the centre of the bottom

face of the pump baseplate.
Enter Bottom Face in the Description textbox and BOFA in

the Purpose textbox.
The direction of the Design Point needs to be down, therefore,

enter D in the Direction of Design Point (Z) textbox. Leave
the Normal direction (Y) as N.
The co-ordinates of the point may be entered in the relevant

textboxes or picked graphically
Click the Pick… button to display the prompt ‘Define Position

(Snap) Snap:’ and left click and hold on the pump baseplate
BOX primitive and select the lowest of the three P-points
displayed at the centre of the primitive, i.e. P6.
The co-ordinates of the selected P-point (wrt /*) are displayed

in the relevant textboxes.

Click the OK button on the Create – Cartesian Design Point

form to create the Design Point.
Close the form and return to the Design Points form where
the Design Point is now displayed.
Note the DPSE and DPCA elements in Model Explorer:
Close the Design Points form.
6.6.5.1 Using a Design Point as a Reference Plane
Make P1502A the CE.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Associate group, click

Equipment button to display the Equipment Associations
form.
Click the Mate radio button and click the Pick Association
Partner link label.
Pick the P1502A_BASE element in the 3D View.
Select BOFA from the Use reference Plane options list in the
Source Element frame.
Click the Pick reference Plane link label in the Partner

Element frame. Left click and hold on the base BOX primitive
and select the upper of the three P-points displayed at the
centre of the primitive, i.e. P3.
Enter P1502A/BASE-MATE in the Association Name

textbox, select Equal from the Separation options list and
enter 0 in the adjacent textbox.
Click the Create Association button to create the association.
Move P1502A using Editor mode and test the association as

described previously.
6.7 Deleting Equipment Associations
Equipment associations may be deleted by highlighting the association in the list and clicking the Delete
Association link label at the bottom of the Equipment Associations form.
Alternatively, the association may be deleted by right clicking the association in the list and selecting Delete
from the pop-up menu.

6.7.1 Deleting an Association Member
If an element participating in an association is deleted, the Association test will return the result false to
indicate that the association has failed.
It is possible to find out which element has been deleted by inspecting the Association Member (ASSMBR)
elements for a bad reference in the Amemrf attribute.
6.8 Association Manager
The Association Manager enables the user to view all Equipment Associations or a selected subset of the
Equipment Associations in the project.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Associate group, clicking the Manage Associations button displays the
Association Manager form.
The Association Filter frame enables the associations to

be viewed to be filtered.

The Show options list entries are:
 Current Element – this option displays all associations which the current element is involved in.
 Selected Purpose – this option activates the Purpose options list where ASEQ can be selected to
display only Equipment Associations.
 Failed – this option displays all associations with a Status of Failed.
 Invalid – this option shows all associations where the settings are incorrectly specified and are
invalid.
 Contain Invalid References – this option displays all associations where one or more of the
ASSMBR elements has its Amemrf attribute set to an invalid reference.
The filtered associations are displayed in a grid in the Associations frame, displaying the Association
name of the association, the Description of the association type, the Purpose and the two elements
involved in the association. Clicking the Refresh button refreshes the list.
Right clicking any association in the Associations grid

displays a pop-up menu which has the following
options:
 View Association Elements– this option zooms into the association items in the 3D View.
 Navigate To – this option has a sub-menu that enables the user to navigate to the association
(ASSOC) or either of the association items in Model Explorer.
 Delete Association – this option deletes the selected association.
 Export to Excel – this option displays the Save Association Data As browser that enables the user to
select a folder and filename to save the entire association grid to an Excel (.xls) file
 Print Preview – opens a standard windows print preview dialogue and allows the grid to be printed.
Left clicking on any association in the list highlights it in blue and populates the Restrictions and
Associated Detail frames of the Association Manager form.
The Restrictions frame displays the Restriction Description and Status for the one or more restrictions
that make up the association in a grid.
Right clicking on any entry in the grid displays a pop-up menu with the same
Navigate To functions described previously.
The Association Detail frame displays the Target (reference plane) of each element, the Position of the
target, the Direction and XDistance, YDistsnace and ZDistance of the two reference planes and the
Actual Distance between the points.
Right clicking on any entry in the grid displays a pop-up menu with an option
to Navigate To Target, i.e. the primitive, and the same export and print
functions described previously.

6.9 Organising Equipment Associations
Association Worlds (ASSOWL) and Association Groups (ASSOGP) for the storage of Equipment
Associations (and other associations) may be created, modified, deleted and organised using the Organise
Association Store form.
On the EQUIPMENT tab, in the Associate group, selecting Browser from the Manage Associations
button options list displays the Organise Association Store form.
The form displays all ASSOWL elements in the project in a grid and has link labels to enable Association
World (ASSOWL) elements to be created, modified and deleted.
The Show Association Groups link label replaces the Association World grid with an Association Group
grid and link labels to enable Association Group (ASSOGP) elements to be created, modified and deleted.

Exercise 5 Equipment Associations
Create a Mate association between the bottom face of C1101 skirt and the top face of the :SLAB
BASE_SLAB element. Test the association by moving the slab element.

CHAPTER 7
7 Copying and Deleting Branches/Components
7.1 Copy an Inline Component
As with equipment and piping components, inline cable tray

components can be copied using the offset, mirror and rotate
functions. Select Copy Element from within the Common group
located on both the Cable Tray and Home tabs.
This will display a drop down menu which will enable the user to
select either With Offset, With Rotation or With Mirror
The user must ensure that they have selected the correct component, either from the Model Explorer hierarchy
or via a graphical selection, then select the appropriate option from the Copy Element menu.
In the example below, the copy offset function is applied to the reducer. As the screen shots demonstrate, the
steps involved in creating the inline component is the same as that in other standard AVEVA E3D applications.
Copy Offset Form Activated Confirmation Message Retained Copy
© Copyright 2013
7.2 Copy a Branch – A Worked Example
Many cable tray networks make use of components being regularly repeated in standard configurations. As
such, it is desirable for designers to be able to copy parts of the cable tray network and position them
elsewhere in the model. This can be achieved by copying a complete branch and moving it to another position.
Navigate to branch CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B2 in the Model Explorer. This branch will be copied and
placed at the southernmost Tee on the B1 branch as shown below.
Select Copy Offset from within the Create group located on the HOME tab to display the Copy with Offset
form.
From the form menu on the form click Offset > from
Element > to Element.
A prompt is displayed ‘Identify Element’.
© Copyright 2013
62
www.aveva.com
Graphically select TEE to which the Head of branch

CTRAY-AREA03-POWER/B2 is connected.
Then select TEE 3 of the branch as selected above.
Once complete, the Copy with Offset form will be

populated with the correct offset values.
Click the Apply button. A confirmation message is

displayed. Click Yes.
From the Model Explorer, right click the mouse on the new
branch (BRAN 4 ) and select Rename to display the Name
form.
Set the name of the newly copied branch to CTRAY-

AREA03-POWER/B5 and click the Apply button.
© Copyright 2013
The result should look as shown below.
 The Head and Tail positions of the branch also need to be connected to appropriate points in the model
once the copying process is complete.
With the new branch selected select Branch from the

Connect group located within the Cable Tray tab to display
the Connect Cable Tray Branch form.
The Head of the branch will be connected to the

corresponding Tee in the model. Set the fields on the form as
shown on the left and click the Apply button.
A prompt is displayed ‘Identify TEE’.
Graphically pick the Tee from the 3D view to set the

connection references.
Click the Cancel button on the Connect Cable Tray Branch

form to close the form.
A segment of this Cabletray will now be modified using the

model editor to achieve the final result.
Select Remove Straights from the Tools group within the

Cable Tray tab to display the Unfill Cable Tray Branch form.
Then select OK
© Copyright 2013
64
www.aveva.com
Drag a window to include the component and branch tail then

select Model Editor from the Common group located on both
the Cable Tray and Home tabs
Using the Model Editor handle, move the selected Cable Tray
segment in the West direction by 800.00mm.
Select Fill With Straights from the Tools group within the
Cable Tray tab to open the Fill Cable Tray Branch form.
Add all straights to the branch.
© Copyright 2013
7.3 Deleting a Cable Tray/Branch
It is often necessary to delete entire cable trays or

selected cable tray branches. The user can delete cable
trays/branches by selecting them from the Model Explorer
hierarchy, clicking the right mouse button and then
selecting Delete from the pop up menu.
Items can also be deleted by selecting them within Model Explorer and selecting Delete from the Common
group located within both the Cable Tray and Home tabs.
When the delete command is selected, a confirmation message box will be displayed. Selecting Yes will
delete the cable tray/branch and the graphical view will update.
© Copyright 2013
66
www.aveva.com
7.4 Deleting individual components
Individual cable tray components can also be deleted. The work flow
is the same as that outlined for branches above.
Components may be selected from the Model Explorer hierarchy or

the graphical view.
Items can also be deleted by selecting them within Model Explorer then selecting CE from the delete drop
down menu located in the Common group within both the Cable Tray and Home tabs.
7.5 Deleting a Range of Cable Tray Components
It is possible to delete a number of components in

the same cable tray or branch. Components must
first be selected, either by picking the components in
the graphical view whilst holding down the Ctrl key,
or by selecting the required components using a
graphical selection window.
Selecting Selection from the delete drop down

menu located in the Common group within both the
Cable Tray and Home tabs will delete the
components and the graphical display will
immediately update.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 5- Create and Copy Branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B4 – B5
1. Create a new Cabletray branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B4. The branch head will be connected to
TEE 2 of branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B1 as shown below and tail positioned explicitly at West
286657mm North 305725mm Up 102445mm.
2. Create a 90 degree Outside Riser 300 mm radius and position it through the Tail.
3. Fill the branch with straights.
4. Create a copy of this branch and set the name to CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B5. The branch should
be positioned and connected to TEE 3 of branch CTRAY-AREA03-CONTROL/B1 as shown below. Once
copied, modify the branch by moving the tail segment of the branch into the West direction by 800mm.
© Copyright 2013
68
www.aveva.com
CHAPTER 7
7 Status Control
From initial planning to completed construction, a typical AVEVA Plant project contains a number of design
disciplines and processes. In order to maximise productivity and minimise costs it is essential to control and
communicate the progress of design activities. The Status Control utility has been developed to assist
designers with this process.
7.1 Overview
The Status Control utility is a highly configurable tool that allows users to control and report on the
progress of model objects. It works by defining a number of Status Values, that describe the current state
of a model object, and applies them to appropriate elements in the constructor modules (i.e. Model, Draw,
Paragon, etc.).
Status Values can perform two functions. They inform the user of an objects current status and they can be
used to influence subsequent design activities.
The terms used to describe Status Values are defined by an Administrator. They may represent project
milestones, WBS elements, percentage completion rates, or they may be simple descriptive terms.
The Administrator will also define the object types that the Status Values can be applied to. The object
type will vary by constructor module e.g. in Draw the object type may be DRWG but in Model the object type
could be PIPE, EQUI, etc.
Data Access Control (DAC) is often applied in conjunction with status control to impose restrictions on
model objects that have reached a particular status. For example, certain activities, such as modifying an
objects position, may be prohibited once a certain status is reached.
Any model object that has one or more status values assigned to it is considered to be a Controlled
Object. It may not be necessary to control all instances of a model object type. As such the Status Control
utility allows the user to select which instances will be controlled.
7.2 The Status Control Data Model
The diagram below illustrates the relationships that are utilised in AVEVA E3D by the Status Control utility:

Status Values are created and stored in the dictionary database hierarchy. Within the Constructor Modules
a Status Link hierarchy is referenced by model objects. The Status Link also references the Status
Value held in the dictionary database. The status link hierarchy is hidden from designers, but it makes
extensive use of pseudo attributes which can be queried by the user if necessary.
7.3 The Status Controller Form
The Status Controller form is the primary tool used by designers to set, change, and report on the status
of model objects. Selecting MANAGE > Status > Control will open the Status Controller form.
 When the form is first displayed the title of the form is displayed as Status Controller. Once status
layouts have been created the title of the form will update to reflect the status layout being considered.
The status controller form will display status data in columns. The rows are populated with those objects
that are, or could be, controlled by the selected status definitions. The features of the status controller
form will now be considered in further detail.
7.3.1 The Status Controller Form – Option Lists
Two option lists are presented to the user in the Status Controller form; the Status Layout option list and
the Focus Status option list.
The Status Layout options list presents all available

saved status layouts and holds the option that allows the
user to create a new layout.
When the status controller form is first accessed the

options list will be blank and the user will only be able to
select the New Layout option.

Selecting the New Layout option displays the Select Status

Columns form from which the user can select the definitions
required for the layout by checking the appropriate
checkbox. That definition that will then be displayed in the
Focus Status options list
The user can also choose which of the default columns

they wish to display by checking the appropriate checkboxes
beneath the status definition selected.
Clicking the OK button will confirm the action and close the
form. It also opens the Set Layout Scope elements form.
The Set Layout Scope elements form allows the user to define sections of the model that the status layout
will apply to. Clicking the Add button will opens the Reference Browser form. Using the Explorer tab,
users can select from the hierarchy explorers areas of the model in which the status layout will be applied.
Alternatively, model areas and elements can be searched for using the Search tab. Clicking the OK button
will populate the Set Layout Scope Elements form with the selected element.
The scope can be set by highlighting the required element in the Set Layout Scope Elements form then
clicking the OK button.
The Status Controller form grid will then be updated to show the selected columns and the elements which
can be controlled by the selected definition within the selected scope.
The Focus Status options list will be populated with the names of each Status Definition that has been
selected in the layout setup. The Focus Status selected determines the status values that are available for
selection.

The status layout can the be saved by selecting the Save Status Layout button.
This opens the Save Layout As form. This shows the current
saved layouts which the user can select to overwrite, or allows
the entry of a new name in the bottom text box.
Clicking the OK button closes the form and saves the Status
Layout.
The title of the Status Controller form changes to that of the

current Status Layout.
7.3.2 The Status Controller Form – Toolbar
The Status Controller form contains several toolbars which allow the user to carry out a number of tasks
relevant to setting and changing status values, reporting, and saving layouts.
By default all toolbars are displayed on the Status Controller form. The
Status Commands toolbar consists of the following buttons:
Promote Promotes a controlled model object to a new status value.
Demote Demotes a controlled model object to a new status value.
Edit Status Allows the user to set a model objects status, in order to
control it. It also allows the user to select a status value from
the valid transition values associated with a status value.
Clicking the Edit Status button opens the Status form.
This form shows the element to which the status is applied,

when the status was last updated and who last updated the
status.
The current status is shown in the drop down Status list.

Expanding this list shows the available status values. At first
the elements loaded will read not controlled. Only once the
initial status has been set is the element controlled.
The status values from this point on will be those set by the
project administrator. However, once the element is controlled
the options to Promote and Demote the element to different
status levels become available (assuming the user has access
rights to do so).
Remove Status Removes the status from a controlled model object i.e. the
model object is no longer controlled by the status definition
selected.
Status History Allows the user to view the status history of a controlled object
(or a selection of controlled objects). Changes of status and
any associated comments will be displayed.
Statistical Reports Produces a graphical representation of the status values
assigned to a group of model objects. Non-controlled model
objects can be included and will appear as a group.

The Element Interaction toolbar allows the user to select elements in the Status Control
Grid from the Model Explorer or graphical view. The toolbar consists of the following
buttons:
Select CE in Grid When clicked the Current Element in the Model

Explorer will be selected within the Status Control
grid.
Select CE Members in Grid When clicked the members of the Current Element in
the Model Explorer will be selected within the Status
Control grid.
Select Graphical Selection in Grid When clicked any element(s) selected in the 3D View
will be selected within the Status Control grid.
The Select CE in Grid button only becomes active when a valid element is selected in the Model Explorer.
The Select CE Members in Grid is always active and the Select Graphical Selection in Grid button
becomes active when any element within the 3D View is selected. If either of these two buttons are pressed
and the selected element has no corresponding items in the Status Control Grid one following error
messages will be displayed.
7.3.3 The Status Controller Form – Context Menus
The Status Controller form contains context menus that allow the user to customise and save the status
layouts and change and report on status values.
Clicking the right mouse button when the pointer is positioned in the blank row below the Column
Headings will display a context menu. This menu allows users to manipulate how the status layout is
displayed.
Status Layout… This option will display the Select Status Columns form.
Users can adjust the default columns displayed in the status layout by
making an appropriate selection in each checkbox. A similar process can be
undertaken for status definitions. Selecting the OK button once the selections
are made will apply the changes and close the form.
Set Layout Scope… This option allows the user to define areas of the model
that the status layout will apply to.

Column Setup… allows the user to change the column

setup by opening the Column Setup form.
On opening, the Column Setup form will display the

position, expression, heading and Visibility of each
column currently displayed in the status layout.
The order in which existing columns appear in the status

layout grid can be adjusted using this form. Although
multiple rows can be selected, only one column can be re-
positioned at a time.
Select the row corresponding to the column to be shifted

using the cells located at the left side of the form. The up
and down arrows in the top right corner of the form can
then be used to manipulate the position of the column.
Two link labels in the lower section of the form allow the user to add or remove columns. Selecting the Add
Column link label will create a new row at the bottom of the list. The user must enter a suitable attribute in
the Expression column then enter a name in the Heading column.
If the user wishes to remove a column then the Delete Selected Columns link label should be selected. A
number of columns can be deleted at once. The appropriate row (or rows) must be selected using the cells
located on the left side of the form before the delete link label is selected.
The Add Standard Attributes link label adds columns for all the standard attributes for the controlled model
elements.
Settings options, including the resetting and refreshing of cells, behave in a similar manner to other grid
commands in AVEVA E3D applications. Editing functions with suppression of null values and interactive
feedback is supported.
Other commands available from this context menu allow the user to Save the layout, export the data to
Excel and print.
Clicking the right mouse button when the pointer is positioned in the main grid area
of the status layout form will display another context menu. This menu allows users
to set and change status values, report on status values, and save layouts.
It allows the same functionality as the Status Commands Toolbar. Users can set
and edit the status value of any model object(s) selected in the grid. Both the Status
History and Statistical reporting functions can be accessed.
The menu also has a Navigate To option. Selecting this option will navigate to the selected model object in
the Model Explorer.
 This function will only work if a single model object is selected in the layout grid.

7.3.4 Reporting Features
At any point a statistical report can be generated for the required elements. Selecting the required elements
in the grid and clicking the Statistical Report button on the Status Controller toolbar displays the default
graphical statistical report.
Each status value is reported on with a legend showing the colours used in the report. By moving the mouse
pointer over each category of the chart the segement is highlighted and the status value, number of
objects and percentage of controlled objects is displayed in a separate box.
Right clicking with the pointer in the chart legend displays a context menu. The Chart Type option enables a
variety of 2D and 3D report formats to be selected.
The Chart Legend option has a sub-menu that enables the user to change the
position of the legend around the Statistical Report frame or turn it off completely.
The default position of the chart legend is Right.
Selecting another option places a check mark on the sub-menu to denote the
current selection.

The right click pop-up menu also allows the chart to be Printed or Saved. Statistical reports are saved as an
XML file. Any reports that are saved can also be Loaded to view again using the Right click pop-up menu.
Right clicking on the statistical graphic provides another pop-up menu.
List Elements - will list all the elements which fall within the statistical group
currently selected.
Add To 3D View - adds the elements within the statistical group to the 3D view.
Edit Status - opens the Status form and allows the user to change the status for
the elements within the selected statistical group.
Status History - opens the Status History form for the elements within the
selected statistical group.
7.3.4.1 Status History

The Status History of model objects may also be checked. Selecting an object from the Status Controller
form grid then right clicking and selecting Status History… from the context menu, or clicking the Status
History button on the Status Commands Toolbar displays the Status History form.
All transition events associated with the object are listed. The comment field will display the last comment
associated with each status.

7.4 Using the Status Controller Form – A Worked Example
This example utilises the pipes created in AREA01 and a number of Status Definitions and Values stored in
a provided dictionary database.
Exit AVEVA E3D then re-enter AVEVA E3D as a Piping Designer using the details provided by the Trainer,
for example:
Project: Training (TRA)
Username: A.PIPER
Password: A
MDB: A-PIPING
Module: Model.
Select PIPING from the application option list in the quick access toolbar.
7.4.1 Creating and Configuring the Status Layout
Navigate to the MANAGE tab then click the Control button from the Status group to display the Status
Controller form.
Before setting the specifc objects to be contolled (in this case pipes) it is necessary to configure the Status
Controller form. This can be done by creating a new layout based around a Status Definition that has
already been created.
Select New Layout from the Status Layout options

list to display the Select Status Columns form.
All valid Status Definitions will be displayed in the

form. Expand the Status Definition DEFINITION
FOR CRITICAL PIPE WORKFLOW then select the
checkbox adjacent to it. Click the OK button.
The Set Layout Scope Elements form is

automatically opened.

Click the Add button on the right of the form.

The Reference Browser form will be displayed.
Ensure the Model tab is selected at the base of

the form. Expand the hierarchy tree and select
SITE-PIPING-AREA01 then click the OK button.
The scope will be displayed in the Set Layout

Scope Elements form. Click the OK button.
In the Status Controller form click the Save

Status Layout button on the status commands
toolbar to display the Save Layout As form.
Enter Critical Pipes in the textbox at the bottom

of the form and then click the OK button.
The default columns are now displayed in the Status Controller form along with all instances of the
controllable model object type (in this case PIPE) present in scope area selected. It is possible to controll a
sub-set of the selected PIPE model objects by filtering the displayed data.
This example will focus on pipes with a specification of A3B. To assist the user in identifying the correct
pipes, a further column will be added to the status controller form.
With the mouse pointer centred on the Name column heading, click the right mouse button to display the
context menu. From the menu, select the Column Setup option.
From the lower section of the Column Setup form select the
Add Column link label. A new row will be added to the form.
Enter PSPEC in the Expression and Heading fields then click

the OK button. The Column Setup form will close and the
Status Controller form updates to show the new PSPEC
column at the far right of the form.
Click on the PSPEC heading and drag it to a position adjacent

to the Owner column. Using the drop down list under the
PSPEC heading select A3B from the filter options.
The Status Controller form should now look similar to this:

 Model objects that are not already shown in the 3D display can be selected in the Status Controller
form and dragged into the display.
7.4.2 Controlling Model Objects and Status Values
Althought the Status Controller form has been configured and the data displayed has been filtered, no
model objects have a status value assigned to them. By default model objects will not be controlled. The
user must select the specific model objects they wish to control and set a status value for them.
Select all the A3B pipes displayed in the Status Controller form (standard Shift and
Ctrl key selections can be used).
Using the Edit Status button from the Status toolbar, or the right click context
menu of the main grid, select the Edit Status option. The Status form will be
displayed.
The Status form allows the user to set the status of the model
objects selected and make a comment that will be associated
with the Status Transition.
Selecting either the Apply button or the OK button will action the
status change.
Using this method the user can set the objects status to any of
the valid transiton values.
Select the AWAITING RESOURCES option and add a suitable

comment before selecting the OK button.
The pipes with specification set to A3B are now controlled

objects. Buttons and menu options associated with adjusting the
objects status are now active.
Select pipe 200-B-4 from the status controller form then select the Promote button from the Status
Commands Toolbar.
The Status form is again displayed, however this time the new
Status has been selected automatically as the Promote setting
was defined in Lexicon.
Enter a suitable comment then select the OK button.
The Status Controller grid will update to reflect the new status.

Continue to Promote /200-B-4 until it reaches status CONFIRM STRESS OK.
The status CONFIRM STRESS OK has two valid transitions.

Select the Demote option from the Status Command toolbar to
display the Status form.
The form is automatically populated with the Demote Status

Value set in Lexicon.
Enter a suitable comment then click the OK button.
It may become neccesary to remove Status Control from certain

model objects. This may be due to an initial selection error, or
perhaps a more appropriate status definition has been created to
suit the project workflow. In either case, the designer can remove
Status Control from model objects at any time.
The required objects must first be selected in the Status Controller form.
Once this is done, the user can select either the Remove Status button from
the Status Command toolbar, or select the Remove Status option from the
context menu.
A confirmation message is displayed for each item

selected in the Status Controller grid.
The user can accept or reject each error message

using the Yes or No buttons. If the user is certain
that all items should be changed they can select the
Yes to All Button.
 If Status Control is removed from a model object it will be recorded in the objects status history.
However, there is no comment facility associated with this status change.

Exercise 6 Status Control
Using the Edit Status option, promote the following pipes to the corresponding status values:
PIPES STATUS
100-B-1, 100-B-2, 250-B-5, 80-B-7 PROVISIONAL LAYOUT
150-B-6, 100-B-8, 40-B-10 CONFIRM STRESS OK
50-B-9 ISSUED TO DRAFT TEAM
80-B-14 Not Controlled
Prepare a series of statistical reports to show the status of the controlled objects and view the history of
several objects and verify this against the status changes made.


CHAPTER 8
8 Completing the Design
In this chapter some facilities for enhancing the basic HVAC design model are examined. The main features
described are:
 Replacement of implied ducting by catalogue straights.
 Addition of stiffening flanges to ductwork items.
 Item numbering of HVAC components.
This will be demonstrated using the duct work that was created in the previous worked examples,
SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001.
8.1 Filling Ductwork Gaps – A Worked Example
During the creation of the main branch components were specified with specific functions. These include
bends, side connection points, silencers and dampers. Most of the gaps between these components were left
undefined and were consequently filled by implied ducting to complete the representation shown in the 3D
view. To enable the design to be prefabricated, it is necessary to specify the fixed lengths of ductwork
(ductwork straights) required between these components. This will also enable a full material take-off to be
generated. The HVAC application is able to calculate the optimum combination of standard and non-standard
straights needed to fill each gap and then create the corresponding components in the design database
automatically.
Clear the 3D view.
Navigate to the main branch SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001 and add it to the 3D view.
To confirm the presence of gaps in the branch, Select Show Gaps from the Tools group located on the HVAC
tab to display the Highlight Implied Ductwork (HVAC) form and click the Apply button.
For each gap in the named branch, the scrollable

list area of the form shows the:
 Location (the preceding component)
 Length
 Calculated combination of straights to fill

the gap.
All corresponding lengths of implied ducting are

highlighted simultaneously in the graphical view.
 The CE button on the form allows multiple

branches to be checked.

71
If the user is presented with warning stating ‘This Gap

will not be filled’ within the form, then the arrangement
will need to be modified to allow for this.
Click the Cancel button to close the Highlight Implied Ductwork (HVAC) form. Select Fill with Straights
from the Tools group located on the HVAC tab to display the Autofill with Straights (HVAC) form. Click the
Apply button on the form.
A list of identified gaps is displayed and the specified straight lengths are created automatically to replace the
implied ducting. The Model Explorer shows the new elements.

Branch SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001 will now look as shown above.

Exercise 5 – Completing the Design – Filling Ductwork Gaps
1. Using the worked example, show and subsequently fill all gaps with straights for all HVAC branches
created during this training.

8.2 Adding Stiffening Flanges – A Worked Example
AVEVA E3D provides a utility for calculating the optimum number and positions of stiffening flanges needed
to support ductwork items. The configuration of the flanges is tailored to suit the component geometry in each
case. The user can then create and position such flanges automatically.
 In the branch membership hierarchy, they are treated as sub-components of the straight.
Navigate to the straight shown below (STRT3) from the Circular main branch RETURN_LEVEL02-001 and
make it the current element.
From the HVAC form, select Circular from the Categories list and then select Stiffening from the Available
Types list to display the Stiffening form.
Based on the selected specification and the dimensions of

the selected component, the number of required stiffeners
are automatically calculated and displayed as shown.
To create the stiffening flange, click the OK button on the

form.
The flanges are created and positioned automatically.

Exercise 6 - Completing the Design – Adding Stiffening Flanges
1. Using the worked example, check and add stiffening flanges to all HVAC branches created during this
training.
8.3 Automatic Item Numbering and Naming – A Worked Example
The item numbering facility automatically allocates sequential item numbers to all HVAC components and
gives each item a name of the format:
</PREFIX><number>, where /PREFIX is a user definable string and number is the sequential number.
Sub-components, air deflectors, stiffening flanges, etc. are numbered as decimalised subsets of their owning
components. Inline equipment items, silencers, fire dampers, etc. which are usually named, remain
unchanged.
To auto number all HVAC items in the current design model,

navigate to the owning HVAC Branch, SUPPLY_LEVEL02-
001/02. Care should be taken if the selected owning element
is the system element as opposed to the branch element.
This is because the branch order below may not be in
sequence. Again, this is important if the itemisation is to be
consistent with the branch numbering, i.e., B1, B2, B3 etc.

Select Item Numbering from the Tools

group located in the HVAC tab to display the
HVAC Itemising form.
Set the Naming Prefix to SUPP_LEVEL02-

001/02/ITEM, leave the Start Number set to
1, and click the Apply button.
The HVAC Command Output form is displayed, listing all

HVAC items and their allocated numbers.
Comparing the entries in this itemising list with those in the

Model Explorer, it can be seen that each item (with the
exception of any inline equipment components) has been
named in the Model Explorer using the specified prefix
/SUPP_LEVEL02-001/02/ITEM suffixed by the item number.
i.e., the straights in the main branch, and their stiffening
flange subcomponents, appear as follows:
8.4 Finishing Off Design Details
The design details for the ductwork straights can now be completed. This will entail:
 Modifying joint types to suit the final design.
 Inserting an access panel into the side of a length of ducting.
8.4.1 Modifying Joint Types – A Worked Example
When the lengths of implied ducting leading to the four fire dampers were replaced with straight components,
the connecting joints will have been assumed to remain as default flanged joints. In fact, the fire dampers
require raw edge joints, such that the ducting simply fits over the damper inlet and outlet.
The inlet joint for the damper is the leave joint for the straight that precedes it. To modify this joint, navigate to
the preceding straight element STRT 4 of branch SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001.
From the HVAC form, click the Modify CE button to display the Modify Rectangular Straight form.

Click the Leave Joint

Choose button to
display the Choose
Joint (HVAC) form.
Select Raw Edge Joint, slip over 40mm

(RE40) from the Choose Joint list and click
the OK button.
Click the Apply button and then click the

Cancel button on the Rectangular Straight
form.

To modify the outlet joint

between the damper and the
following straight (the arrive
joint of the straight), navigate to
the straight.
From the HVAC form, click the

Modify CE button to display the
Modify Rectangular Straight
form.
Click the Arrive Joint

Previous button. The Arrive
Joint field is set to RE40 by
automatic reference to the
previous component, namely
the fire damper.
Click the Apply button and then

click the Cancel button.

Exercise 7 - Completing the Design – Modifying Joint Types
1. Using the worked example, modify the joint types for the remaining Fire Dampers for BRAN
SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001. All joint types to be updated to Raw Edge Joint slip over 40mm (RE40) joint.
8.4.2 Inserting an Access Panel – A Worked Example
The final component of the HVAC ducting network is an access panel in the straight before the final Fire
Damper (FD4) of the main branch SUPPLY_LEVEL02-001. An access panel will be inserted; whose catalogue
definition includes a predefined working volume, into the side of the aforementioned straight.
Navigate to the appropriate straight. From the HVAC form, select Rectangular from the Categories list and
then select Access Panel from the Available Types list to display the Access Panel form.
Set the Select Size option to 300x200 and Dist from Leave to 200mm.

The amount of detail shown in the 3D for different components is controlled by the current graphical
representation settings. These can be checked by selecting Graphics from the Settings group on the
VIEW tab to display the Graphics Settings form.
On the Representation tab select 50% from the Obstruction Visibility / Translucency dropdown menu.
The obstruction volumes on all displayed components are now shown as a 50% translucency..


CHAPTER 8
8 Data Consistency Checker and Isodraft
If Isodraft is to be used to produce isometric plot files of cable trays there are a number of points that the user
must consider.
 The cable tray must be data consistency checked and any errors removed before an isometric plot is
generated.
 Any Branches that make up a cable tray must connect to the Main Branch. It is not possible to have a
branch off a branch, as this will cause ISODRAFT to fail.
8.1 Data Consistency
To carry out data consistency checking from within the

Cable Tray application, the user must select Data
Consistency from the Check group located on the
HOME tab.
Selecting the Cable Tray button from the Parameters

panel opens the Cable Tray Consistency Check
Options form.
The form allows the user to adjust the tolerances that

will be applied to the data consistency checks as
required.
Once the tolerances have been set the user must

navigate to the Cable Tray to be checked. The user
must then select the level of hierarchy at which the
checks will be made from the scrollable list on the Data
Consistency Check form.
Selecting Check will run the consistency check. If

errors are present in the design a series of diagnostic
messages will be reported to the user in the Data
Consistency Check form.
 Refer to the AVEVA Plant Piping reference

manual for a full description of data consistency
errors.

69
8.2 Isodraft
When the Cable Tray Design is complete, and data consistency errors have been checked and rectified, it is
possible to produce an Isometric plot of the Cable Tray. To do this the user must switch to the Isodraft module.
This is done by selecting the Projects tab, then selecting Modules and Isodraft.
Once the user has entered the Isodraft Module, ensure the explorer is set to Model Explorer within the Display
drop down menu.
Select the cable tray for isometric generation

within the model explorer.
© Copyright 2013
70
www.aveva.com
Select Isometrics > Standard from the main

application menu opens the Standard
Isometric form.
A basic drawing can be obtained by selecting

the TTF_with_backing_sheet.opt options file
then clicking the Apply button.
 Refer to the AVEVA Plant Isodraft Reference Manual for Isodraft functionality.
© Copyright 2013
Exercise 6 – Data Consistency and Isodraft
1. Select all of the main branch cable trays created previously. Run a data consistency check and correct
any errors that may occur.
Switch modules to Isodraft and create an isometric drawing for each of the cable tray.
© Copyright 2013
72
www.aveva.com
CHAPTER 8
8 Volume Modelling
Volume Models are similar to EQUI elements. They may be used for modelling any item in AVEVA E3D that
will be constructed from primitives but is not required to be displayed in the Model Explorer as an EQUI
element.
A typical use of volume models may include plant Civils items (e.g. concrete slabs, concrete plinths, site
roads) or the modelling of escape routes/access obstruction volumes. Volume models can also be used as a
method of reserving space within the plant layout for equipment items not yet ready for modelling.
8.1 The Volume Model Hierarchy
Volume Model (VOLM) elements are owned by ZONEs.
VOLM elements have some of the attributes of an EQUI and may own primitives
directly, with the exception of Nozzles.
VOLM elements may own one or more optional Sub-Volume Model (SVOLM)
elements which may own any primitive except Nozzles. The SVOLM elements are used
to break down Volume Models into sub-parts and are similar, and have some of the
same attributes, as SUBE elements.
8.2 Creating VOLM and SVOLM Elements
On the GENERAL tab, in the Volumes group, clicking the Volume button
displays the Volume Model form.
The form is similar to the Create Equipment form described earlier in the
training guide, except that there is no Attributes… button as VOLM
elements do not have the attributes that are set by this option.
VOLM elements may be named and positioned, the option lists and
textboxes enable its origin to be set with respect to any element, as for an
EQUI element.
With a VOLM as the CE, on the GENERAL tab, in the Volumes group,
clicking the Sub-Volume button displays the Sub Volume Model form.
This form is similar to the Create Sub-equipment form described earlier

in this training guide.
SVOLM elements may be named and positioned, the option lists and
textboxes enable its origin to be set with respect to any element, as for a
SUBE element.

8.3 Creating Primitives
All primitives, except NOZZ elements may be owned directly by VOLM or by SVOLM elements. Primitives
are created and modified using the functions on the EQUIPMENT tab.
8.4 Creating Volume and Sub Volume Models – A Worked Example
In the Training project all of the civil works and foundations are modelled using Volume Models and are
created in suitable Civils SITEs. Only members of the Civils team have access to these SITEs. In order to
carry out the worked examples and exercises it is necessary to switch user.
On the TOOLS tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training Setup form.
Navigate to the Setup Tools tab and enter the following details for the new user:
Username: A.CIVILMAN
Password: A
Click the Switch User button and close the form.
In this worked example volume models are added to the Civils works to represent reserved walkway areas
which in reality have no physical geometry but need to be used during clash checking to ensure appropriate
room and access is available for plant personnel and machinery.
8.4.1 Creating the Walkway UDET
Clear the 3D View and add /ZONE-CIVIL-AREA01 to it.
On the TOOLS tab, in the Display group, click the Commands button to display the Command Window.
In the Command Window enter NEW :WALKWAY /AREA01-WALKWAYS. This creates a user defined
element with the base type VOLM.
 User Defined Element Types can only be created using the Command line.
The User Defined Element Type :WALKWAY has been previously defined in the Lexicon module. Query
the attributes and note that the ActType is :WALKWAY and the Type is VOLM.
In the Modify group, of the HOME tab, from the Move button option
list, click the Position button to display the Explicit Position form.
Enter the Explicit Position
West 318000
North 302500
Up 100000.
Click the Apply button and close the form.

8.4.2 Creating the Walkway Primitives
The walkways will be made with a combination of BOX and Extrusion primitives. Extrusions are 2D shapes
that are extruded through a distance. An extrusion is made up of three elements:
 EXTR – the extrusion itself. The Position attribute holds the World position of the extrusion origin and
the Height attribute holds the extrusion distance.
 LOOP – this is the 2D shape that owns a series of vertices, one at each change in direction of the
shape.
 VERT – these are the vertices. Their position is expressed in local co-ordinates, i.e. with respect to the
EXTR origin.
From the EQUPMENT tab, Defaults group, change

the Representation style to Obstruction and the
Obstruction level to Soft
In the Create group, pick Extrusion from the second

row of the Primitives gallery.
Enter E 0 N 0 U 0 into the co-ordinates to define the

first point at the origin of the WALKWAY.
Using the Contextual Editor, continue creating the

remaining vertices using the data from the following
table. All vertices are at ground level, i.e. U 0.
Vertex No. East North

2 13000 0
3 13000 -13490
4 11500 -13490
5 11500 -1100
6 0 -1100
After creating vertex 6, press the Return key to

advance.
When prompted for the height, input 2600.

Right click the extrusion in the Model Explorer and click Rename. Using the rename element form, name
the extrusion WW-01_1.
On the VIEW tab, in the Settings group, click the Graphics button to display the Graphics Settings form.
On the Representation tab, select 50% from the Obstruction/Visibility Translucency options list and click
the Apply button to display the walkway.
Close the Graphics Settings form.

The next step is to add a second walkway. This will be modelled as a

box.
Set the Defaults to Obstruction Volume and the Obstruction Level

to Soft.
Enter the box creation function from the button in the primitives
gallery, then press the down arrow and choose the Explicit option.
Choose the origin at these co-ordinates E -316250mm N 293880mm

U 101300mm.
Then define the following dimensions:
Xlength 1500mm
Ylength 9600mm
Zlength 2600mm
Name the box WW-01_2.

Exercise 7 Create Stairway Volumes
The Equipment Support structure in /ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 requires access stairs which will be
added as a separate design process. Using Volume models create a suitable reserved volume for these
stairs which can be also used as an access reservation volume once the stairs are modelled.
Two flights of stairs should be modelled as two extrusions. The top flight is 1130mm wide and the bottom
1260mm wide. The positions, wrt World, for the required vertices are shown below.
Ensure that the extrusions are set as Obstruction Volume and Soft.
Both extrusions should sit under a single VOLM named STWAY-001, each extrusion should be named
STWAY-001_1 and STWAY-001_2.

CHAPTER 14
14 Preliminary Supports
The Piping Designer can create Preliminary Supports in a support zone to which they have been given
access, the Support Designer can use these Preliminary Supports and convert them into Ancillary Supports.
The image to the right shows a typical Preliminary

Support:
An optional Soft Obstruction volume can be created

to allow for access.
14.1 Creating Preliminary Supports
To Create a Preliminary Support, click on the Preliminary button in the Create group on the SUPPORTS
tab.
The Preliminary gallery will be displayed as follows:
Preliminary Supports are created in exactly the same way as Stand Alone Supports.
Copyright © 2015. 109

Supports TM-1818
14.2 Creating Preliminary Supports – A Worked Example
Login to the Training Project as Piping Designer typically A.PIPER password A and MDB A-PIPING
From the Model Explorer add pipe 150-A-3 and Structure PIPERACK to the 3D view.
Create a new Support Zone ZONE-PRELIMINARY-

SUPPORTS-AREA01 under Site SITE-PRELIMINARY-
SUPPORTS and set the Purpose to SUPP Supports
 This Site and Zone are in the database

ASSOC/DESI-A which both the Piping and Support
Designer have read and Write Access
Select the SUPPORTS Application and set the Support

Storage area to the newly created Zone
ZONE-PRELIMINARY-SUPPORTS-AREA01
Click on the Preliminary button in the Create group and from the displayed gallery, select Anchor.
Copyright © 2015.
www.aveva.com
110
Supports TM-1818
Identify the pipe after ELBO 3 as shown.
A Preliminary Anchor support is created and the

Support Editor form is also displayed.
Rename the preliminary support to A-ANCHOR.
Click the Position Through button to align the support with the
steelwork.
Select the GENSEC 3 of FRMWORK AXIS_P1.2, as shown.
Click on the Apply button.
Copyright © 2015.
111
www.aveva.com
Supports TM-1818
Change the Obstruction Graphic Settings to 50%.
Select Graphics from the Setting Group on the VIEW Tab, Select
the Representation Tab and 50% from the Obstruction
Pulldown and Apply and Cancel.
Follow the previous workflow and create a Preliminary Guide,

rename it to A-GUIDE and position it align with the GENSEC 3 of
FRMWORK /AXIS_P1.3.
Set the Obstruction Width and Height to 300mm
Click on the Apply button.
Save Work and exit E3D Project > Exit
Copyright © 2015.
www.aveva.com
112
Supports TM-1818
Login to the Training Project as Support Designer typically A.SUPPORTMAN password A and MDB A-
SUPPORT
Alternatively the login User can be changed using the Training Setup, switch the user to A.SUPPORTMAN
from the Setup Tools tab on the Training Setup form, The Training Setup Form is available by Selecting
Setup from the Training group of the TOOLS Tab.
From the Model Explorer add Structure PIPERACK and pipe 150-A-3 to the 3D view.
Add the Preliminary Supports to the screen.
Select Pipe 150-A-3 using the Right Hand Mouse

Button and Select 3D View > Add Supports
Change the Obstruction Graphic Settings to 50%.
Select Graphics from the Setting Group on the

VIEW Tab, Select the Representation Tab and 50%
from the Obstruction Pulldown and Apply and
Cancel.
Copyright © 2015.
113
www.aveva.com
Supports TM-1818
In the Supports Application make sure that the support creation zone in the Storage Area is set to ZONE-
PRELIMINARY-SUPPORTS-AREA01
Pick A-ANCHOR in the 3D view, select the Anchor type from the Stand Alone Supports gallery.
Select XAN07 from the Ancillary Selection form and click OK.
Copyright © 2015.
www.aveva.com
114
Supports TM-1818
As shown, the preliminary support is converted to the

ancillary support.
The Support Editor form is also displayed to allow for

modification.
Click Apply button on the Support Editor form.
Select the previously created Preliminary Guide from the 3D view.
From the Stand Alone Supports list, select Anchor rather than Guide.
Select XAN07.
As shown, a message displays to inform the user about the

wrong Ancillary selection.
Click on No to cancel the process and Cancel the Ancillary

Selection form.
Select the Guide type from the Stand Alone Supports gallery.
Copyright © 2015.
115
www.aveva.com
Supports TM-1818
Select XGT02 from the available guides. Click OK.
The Preliminary Guide is converted to the Ancillary Guide.
The Support Editor form is also displayed to allow for

modification.
Click Apply button on the Support Editor form
Copyright © 2015.
www.aveva.com
116
Supports TM-1818
Exercise 13 – Preliminary Supports
1. Using the above example add some typical Preliminary Supports to the Design and convert them to
Ancillary supports.
Copyright © 2015.
117
www.aveva.com
Training TM-1810
Guide Pipework Modelling
Pipework Modelling TM-1810
© Copyright 2012 to current year. 2 www.aveva.com

Revision Log
Date Revision Description Author Reviewed Approved
18/01/2013 0.1 Issued for Review AVEVA E3D™ (1.1) AH

13/02/2013 0.2 Reviewed AH PJH
05/03/2013 1.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D™ (1.1) AH PJH PJH
20/01/2014 1.1 Issued for Review AVEVA E3D™(1.1) CT
21/01/2014 1.2 Reviewed CT KB
21/01/2014 2.0 Issued for Training AVEVA E3D™(1.1) CT KB KB
Updates
Change highlighting will be employed for all revisions. Where new or changed information is presented
section headings will be highlighted in Yellow.
Suggestion / Problems
If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to AVEVA
Training & Product Support at tps@aveva.com
This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may
not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your
licence conditions.
Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free
from viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of
data or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages,
charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user
resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of
whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence)
or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall
take precedence.

Copyright
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this manual and the associated
software, (including source code, object code, and any data) belongs to or is validly licensed by AVEVA
Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this
document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is
granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the
beginning of every copy that is made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may also not
reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole, nor part of the
product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or
system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such
unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the
terms and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User
Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited.
Copyright 2012 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA
shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such
breach results from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
The AVEVA Everything3D™ user interface is based on the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ user interface.
Trademark
AVEVA™, AVEVA Everything3D™, and AVEVA E3D™ are registered trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or
its subsidiaries. AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions
Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of trademarks belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries
is strictly forbidden.
Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft
Corporation.
The Microsoft Office User Interface is subject to protection under U.S. and international intellectual property
laws and is used by AVEVA Solutions Limited under license from Microsoft.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its
name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.

CONTENTS
1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................11
1.1 Objectives........................................................................................................................................ 11
1.2 Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Course Structure............................................................................................................................. 12
1.4 Using this Guide ............................................................................................................................. 12
2 Piping in AVEVA E3D™ (Basic Concepts) .........................................................................13
2.1 Setting Up the Training Course..................................................................................................... 13
2.2 Accessing the Pipework Application............................................................................................ 14
2.3 Piping Tab........................................................................................................................................ 14
2.4 Pipe Model Hierarchy ..................................................................................................................... 15
2.5 Piping Specifications...................................................................................................................... 16
2.6 Pipe Editor:- Create Pipe Form...................................................................................................... 17
2.7 Pipe Creation – (Worked Example) ............................................................................................... 17
2.8 Pipe Branch Heads and Tails ........................................................................................................ 19
2.8.1 Branch Head Attributes ............................................................................................................. 19
2.8.2 Branch Tail Attributes ................................................................................................................ 19
2.9 Modify Pipe Form............................................................................................................................ 20
2.10 Updating Pipe & Branch Data .................................................................................................... 21
2.11 Pipe Branch Head/Tail Positioned Explicitly............................................................................ 22
2.12 Pipe Branch Head/Tail Connected – (Worked Example) ......................................................... 23
2.13 Modify Pipe Form - continued.................................................................................................... 25
2.14 Navigating Pipes and Branches ................................................................................................ 26
Exercise 1 – Create Pipes Head/Tail..........................................................................................28
3 Component Creation and Modification...............................................................................29
3.1 Pipe Branch Components (Pipe Fittings)..................................................................................... 29
3.2 Arrive and Leave Points ................................................................................................................. 30
3.3 Piping Component Editor Form - Creation .................................................................................. 31
3.3.1 Selecting from an Alternative Specification ............................................................................... 32
3.4 Piping Component Editor Form – Creation – (Worked Example) .............................................. 33
3.5 Piping Component Editor Form – Modification ........................................................................... 36
3.5.1 Forwards / Backwards Mode ..................................................................................................... 37
3.5.2 Positioning Functions ................................................................................................................ 38
3.5.3 Rotation and Direction Tools ..................................................................................................... 46
3.5.4 Orientation Functions ................................................................................................................ 51
3.5.5 Other Functions ......................................................................................................................... 55
3.5.6 Component Sequence List ........................................................................................................ 59
3.6 Piping Component Editor Form – Modification – (Worked Example) ....................................... 60
3.7 Branch Components List Order .................................................................................................... 62
3.8 Inserting Inline Fittings – Flanges................................................................................................. 64
3.9 Inserting Inline Fittings – Tees ...................................................................................................... 66
3.10 Inserting Inline Fittings – Reducers .......................................................................................... 68
3.11 Handling Multiple Wall Thicknesses ......................................................................................... 69
3.12 Deleting Components ................................................................................................................. 70
3.13 Deleting a Range of Piping Components ................................................................................. 71
3.14 Component Editor Form – Inline Fittings – (Worked Example).............................................. 72
Exercise 2 – Component Creation – Branch /100-B-8/B1.........................................................81
3.15 Component Editor Form – Reselection..................................................................................... 82
3.16 Component Editor Form – Reselection – (Worked Example) ................................................. 83
3.17 Piping Settings Form .................................................................................................................. 84
3.17.1 Piping Settings Form - Creation ................................................................................................ 84
3.17.2 Piping Settings Form – Selection .............................................................................................. 86
3.17.3 Piping Settings Form - Display .................................................................................................. 87
4 Using the Model Editor ........................................................................................................89
4.1 General Use of the Model Editor ................................................................................................... 89
4.2 Quick Pipe Router......................................................................................................................... 104
4.3 Extend Route Handle Menus ....................................................................................................... 105

4.4 Rotational Handle Menus............................................................................................................. 105

4.5 Fitting to Fitting Functionality ..................................................................................................... 106
4.6 Quick Pipe Routing Using Elbows – (Worked Example) .......................................................... 108
4.7 Pipe Routing Using Bends........................................................................................................... 111
4.7.1 Bends via Pipe Fabrication Machine ....................................................................................... 111
4.8 Pipe Routing Using Bends via Pipe Fabrication Machine – (Worked Example) .................... 112
4.9 Adding Bends Using the Form .................................................................................................... 116
4.10 Changing to Alternative Fabrication Machine Bend – (Worked Example) .......................... 117
4.11 Fabrication Machine Bends – General Information ............................................................... 118
Exercise 3 – Quick Pipe Router – /100-C-13............................................................................121
5 Sloping Pipes .....................................................................................................................123
5.1 Overview of Variable Angle P-Point Method.............................................................................. 123
5.2 Variable Angle P-Points ............................................................................................................... 124
5.2.1 Setting the Nominal Direction on a Component ...................................................................... 125
5.2.2 Variable Angle P-Points with Quick Pipe Router..................................................................... 126
5.3 Creating a Sloping Pipe using Quick Pipe Router – (Worked Example)................................. 128
5.3.1 Setting the Nominal Direction – (Worked Example) ................................................................ 130
5.4 Retrospective Sloping of Pipes................................................................................................... 132
5.5 Retrospective Sloping of Pipes – (Worked Example) ............................................................... 137
Exercise 4 – Creating Sloping Pipes - /100-C-17 ....................................................................140
6 Advanced Positioning Forms............................................................................................143
6.1 Move Form..................................................................................................................................... 144
6.1.1 Distance Tab............................................................................................................................ 144
6.1.2 Through Tab ............................................................................................................................ 147
6.1.3 Clearance Tab ......................................................................................................................... 148
6.1.4 Towards Tab............................................................................................................................ 149
6.2 Move Branch ................................................................................................................................. 150
6.3 Drag Move and Drag Move Branch ............................................................................................. 150
6.4 Advanced Positioning Forms – (Worked Example) .................................................................. 151
Exercise 5 – Advanced Positioning – Pipe /100-C-13.............................................................153
7 Further Concepts ...............................................................................................................155
7.1 Copying an Inline Component..................................................................................................... 155
7.2 Copying a Branch – (Worked Example)...................................................................................... 156
7.3 Deleting a Pipe/Branch................................................................................................................. 159
8 Pipework Spec/Bore Modification.....................................................................................161
8.1 Pipework Component Bore and Specification Modification .................................................... 161
8.1.1 Modify Components Form ....................................................................................................... 161
8.1.2 Component Selection .............................................................................................................. 162
8.1.3 Modifying Component Specifications ...................................................................................... 163
8.1.4 Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... 164
8.1.5 Highlighting .............................................................................................................................. 165
8.1.6 Choosing a Component........................................................................................................... 166
8.1.7 Modifying Component Bore ..................................................................................................... 167
8.1.8 Modifying Insulation and Tracing Specifications ..................................................................... 167
8.2 Modifying a Specification – (Worked Example) ......................................................................... 168
Exercise 6 - Modify Specification – Pipe /150-A-57 ................................................................171
9 Piping Assemblies .............................................................................................................173
9.1 Using Assemblies ......................................................................................................................... 173
10 Splitting and Merging .....................................................................................................177
10.1 Pipe Splitting ............................................................................................................................. 177
10.1.1 Splitting Options....................................................................................................................... 178
10.1.2 Split Pipes on a Plane ............................................................................................................. 178
10.1.3 Split Pipes into Segments........................................................................................................ 181
10.1.4 Split by Moving Component..................................................................................................... 182
10.1.5 Assembly Tab .......................................................................................................................... 183

10.1.6 Performing the Split ................................................................................................................. 184

10.1.7 Splitting Pipes on a Plane – (Worked Example)...................................................................... 184
10.1.8 Splitting into Segments – (Worked Example).......................................................................... 187
10.2 Merge Pipe / Branch.................................................................................................................. 189
10.2.1 Merge Pipe – (Worked Example) ............................................................................................ 189
11 Pipe Penetration and Hole Management .......................................................................191
11.1 Introduction to Hole Management ........................................................................................... 191
11.1.1 Request and Approval Workflow ............................................................................................. 192
11.2 Introduction to Non-Penetration Managed Holes .................................................................. 192
11.3 Use of the Hole Management Application .............................................................................. 192
11.4 Creating Single Penetrations ................................................................................................... 193
11.4.1 ATTA From Pipe Spec............................................................................................................. 194
11.4.2 Coupling from Pipe Spec ......................................................................................................... 197
11.4.3 Pipe Penetration Examples (Standard Types) ........................................................................ 198
11.5 The Hole Management Utility ................................................................................................... 199
11.5.1 Create Holes Section............................................................................................................... 199
11.5.2 Merge Holes ............................................................................................................................ 203
11.5.3 Modify Holes ............................................................................................................................ 204
11.5.4 Utilities ..................................................................................................................................... 205
11.6 Creating Non-Penetration Managed Holes – Free Holes....................................................... 209
11.6.1 Free Holes ............................................................................................................................... 209
11.7 Hole Management...................................................................................................................... 214
11.7.1 Hole Association Filters ........................................................................................................... 214
11.7.2 Show Tags............................................................................................................................... 216
11.7.3 Translucent Penetrated ........................................................................................................... 217
11.7.4 Hole Association Options ........................................................................................................ 217
11.7.5 Managing Hole Associations ................................................................................................... 218
Exercise 7 – Hole Creation.......................................................................................................221
Exercise 8 – Completing the Pipework ...................................................................................222
12 Data Consistency............................................................................................................237
12.1 Data Consistency ...................................................................................................................... 237
12.1.1 Possible Types of Data Error................................................................................................... 237
12.1.2 Accessing the Data Consistency Checks................................................................................ 238
12.1.3 The Report Format .................................................................................................................. 239
12.1.4 Data Consistency Diagnostic Messages ................................................................................. 240
12.1.5 Example of Diagnostic Messages ........................................................................................... 240
Exercise 9 – Data Consistency ................................................................................................245
13 Clash Detection...............................................................................................................247
13.1 Accessing the Clashes Form ................................................................................................... 247
13.2 Executing a Clash Check ......................................................................................................... 247
13.2.1 Validation Philosophy .............................................................................................................. 248
Exercise 10 – Clash Detection .................................................................................................249
14 Design Checker...............................................................................................................251
14.1 Design Checker ......................................................................................................................... 251
14.1.3 Design Checker Results .......................................................................................................... 254
14.2 Design Checker – (Worked Example) ..................................................................................... 255
Exercise 11 – Design Checker .................................................................................................256
15 Production Checks .........................................................................................................257
15.1 Definitions.................................................................................................................................. 257
15.1.1 Pipe Spools.............................................................................................................................. 257
15.1.2 Pipe Pieces.............................................................................................................................. 257
15.2 Accessing the Pipe Production Checks Form ....................................................................... 258
15.2.1 Setting Up Production Checks................................................................................................. 259
15.2.2 Define Auto Resolve Preferences ........................................................................................... 259
15.2.3 Define Auto-Naming Preferences............................................................................................ 260

15.2.4 Generating Spools ................................................................................................................... 261

15.2.5 Auto-Naming Pipe Pieces........................................................................................................ 261
15.3 The Pipe Production Checks Form ......................................................................................... 262
15.3.1 Validation ................................................................................................................................. 263
15.3.2 Examples of Various Results................................................................................................... 264
15.3.3 Expanding the Machine Results Panel.................................................................................... 266
15.3.4 Modifying Production Information ............................................................................................ 266
15.3.5 Changing or Assigning a Machine........................................................................................... 267
15.3.6 Applying an User Defined End Excess.................................................................................... 267
15.3.7 Applying a User Defined Minimum Feed Excess .................................................................... 267
15.3.8 Revalidating a Pipe Piece........................................................................................................ 268
15.3.9 Finish Viewing the Results ...................................................................................................... 268
15.3.10 Viewing Production Information ........................................................................................... 269
15.3.11 Removing Machine Information ........................................................................................... 270
15.3.12 Removing Fabrication Information ....................................................................................... 270
15.3.13 View Log .............................................................................................................................. 271
Exercise 12 – Production Checks............................................................................................272
16 Creating Isometrics.........................................................................................................273
16.1 Creating Pipe Isometrics .......................................................................................................... 273
16.2 Creating System Isometrics..................................................................................................... 274
Exercise 13 – Creating Isometrics...........................................................................................275
17 Creating Pipe Sketches in Draw.....................................................................................277
17.1 Accessing the AVEVA E3D Draw Module............................................................................... 277
17.2 Creating a Registry ................................................................................................................... 278
17.3 Creating Pipe Sketches ............................................................................................................ 279
17.3.1 Design Elements to Search Under .......................................................................................... 280
17.3.2 Filter the Spools Using ............................................................................................................ 280
17.3.3 Search Results ........................................................................................................................ 281
17.3.4 Sketch Creation Options.......................................................................................................... 281
17.3.5 Create Sketches ...................................................................................................................... 282
Exercise 14 – Creating Pipe Sketches.....................................................................................284
Appendix A - Additional Flange Information ..........................................................................285
A.1 - Flange Offset Value for Slip-On Flanges ...................................................................................... 285
A.2 - Flange Allowance Value for ALLO Flanges.................................................................................. 286
A.3 – Additional Queries ......................................................................................................................... 287
A.3.1 – Wall Thickness Queries ............................................................................................................. 287
A.3.2 – Corrosion Allowance Queries .................................................................................................... 288
A.3.3 – Flange Allowance Queries......................................................................................................... 288
Appendix B – Model Editing / Pipe Editing / Quick Pipe Router Menus ...............................289
B.1 – Model Editor – Cardinal Direction Handle Menu......................................................................... 289
B.2 – Model Editor – Rotational Handle Menu ...................................................................................... 290
B.3 – Pipe Editing – Handle Menu.......................................................................................................... 291
B.4 – Quick Pipe Router - Extend Route Handle Menu........................................................................ 292
B.5 – Quick Pipe Router - Rotational Handle Menu ............................................................................. 294
Appendix C – Insulation and Tracing ......................................................................................295
C.1 - Adding / Controlling Insulation ..................................................................................................... 295
C.1.1 - Controlling Insulation between Components ............................................................................. 296
C.2 - Adding Tracing................................................................................................................................ 298
Appendix D – Hole Management Request and Approval Workflow ......................................299
D.1 – Hole Creation/Modification Workflow .......................................................................................... 299
D.2 – Redundant Hole Workflow ............................................................................................................ 299
D.3 – Rejected Hole Workflow ................................................................................................................ 300
Appendix E – Design Checker Admin Overview.....................................................................301
E.1 - Design Checker Admin Form......................................................................................................... 301
E.1.2 - Vent High Points Admin Detail ................................................................................................... 302

E.1.3 - Drain Low Points Admin Detail................................................................................................... 303

E.1.4 - Valve Stem Orientation Admin Detail......................................................................................... 303
Appendix F – Bending Machine NC Outputs ..........................................................................305
F.1 - Accessing the Form ........................................................................................................................ 305
F.1.1 - Specifying Search Criteria .......................................................................................................... 306
F.2 – NC Outputs...................................................................................................................................... 307


CHAPTER 1
1 Introduction
Alongside the other primary modelling processes pipe routing is a time consuming activity on any project.
The aim of the course is to provide the skills required to use the AVEVA Everything3D™ (AVEVA E3D™)
Pipework application in the most productive way. It will introduce some of the techniques that are used in
the other Model applications and provide an understanding of piping components, routing, checking
isometrics and simple clash detection.
1.1 Objectives
At the end of this training course participants will able to:-
 Understand the basic concepts of pipes and branches
 Understand the use of piping specifications in AVEVA E3D
 Understand the concept of branch heads and tails, the importance of component list order and flow
direction within a Branch
 Create position and orientate piping components.
 Modify pipe, branch and components
 Copying pipe, branch and components
 Deleting pipe, branch and components
 Use of Model Editor
 Use of Fabrication Machines
 Manipulation of sloping pipes
 Alternative methods of positioning
 Modification of bore and specification
 Use of assemblies
 Perform Splitting and merging of pipes
 Use Penetration and Hole Management
 Run Data Consistency and to understand most of the diagnostic messages
 Perform simple Clash Checks.
 Use Design Checker
 Use of Production Checks
 Produce Check Isometrics
 Create Pipe Sketches

1.2 Prerequisites
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D Foundations training
course. Trainees who can demonstrate a suitable understanding of other AVEVA E3D applications and
techniques may also be permitted to undertake the training.
Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations, worked examples and set exercises.
Each workstation will have a training project populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees
to practice their methods and complete the set exercises.
1.4 Using this Guide
Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document. A summary of these
styles is provided below.
Button press actions are indicated by bold dark turquoise text.
Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.
Where supplementary information is provided, or reference is made to other documentation, the following
symbols and styles will be used.
System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function'.
Example files or inputs will be in the bold courier new font.

CHAPTER 2
2 Piping in AVEVA E3D™ (Basic Concepts)
2.1 Setting Up the Training Course
Login to AVEVA E3D using the details provided by the Trainer. They will typically be as shown below:
Project: Training
User: A.PIPER
Password: A
MDB: A-PIPING
Click the Model tile.
On the Tools tab, in the Training group, click the Setup button to display the Training
Setup form.
From the Piping tab select the Pipework Modelling radio button to indicate the current training course and
check the Setup Training Course checkbox. Click the Apply button followed by the Close button to close
the form.
 Completed Exercises are available via the Training Setup form and may be accessed by the Trainer if
required.

2.2 Accessing the Pipework Application
A default screen layout will be displayed comprising the Microsoft® Office Fluent™–based user interface
and a Model Explorer showing all the objects from the current project databases.
Once the Model module has been started, it must be checked that the Pipework application is running. This
can be seen on the options list at top of the model framework, in the screenshot below it is showing the
General application. This can be changed by selecting Piping from the options list as shown.
Selecting the Piping application will add the Piping tab to the new Microsoft® Office Fluent™–based user
interface.
2.3 Piping Tab

The Piping tab is used to manipulate pipes, branches and branch components and also invoke the functions
and tools specific to the Pipework application. It is split into seven groups:-
 Common (this is identical for all applications).
 Create
 Modify
 Tools
 Penetrate
 Isometrics
 Production
 PSI
 Throughout this training guide it will be assumed that the Piping tab is being used unless otherwise
stated.

2.4 Pipe Model Hierarchy
There is a separate model hierarchy for pipe routing, as shown below. In principle, each pipe element may
own a number of branches. In turn, branches may own a number of piping components, e.g. valves,
reducers, tees, flanges, etc.
The difference between pipes and branches is that a branch is only considered to have two ends, while a
pipe may have any number of ends, depending on the number of branches it owns.
A pipe with three ends and two branches is shown below. The second
branch is connected to the first at the tee.
This demonstrates another piping hierarchy rule. Although a branch

only has two ends, it may own components (in this case a tee) which
connect to other branches.
These simple concepts enable any number of piping configurations to

be developed, and forms the basis of all existing designed AVEVA
E3D pipework.
An alternative pipe configuration that still complies with these rules

is shown here. In this instance the branch leaves the tee through
the offline leg.
Pipe branches serve two purposes:-
 They define the start and finish points of a pipe route (known as the Head and Tail in AVEVA
E3D).
 They own the piping components, which define the route.
The position and order of the piping components below branch level determine the physical route. In AVEVA
E3D it is only necessary to consider the fittings, because the pipe that appears between fittings is
automatically set (or implied) by AVEVA E3D according to the specifications of the fittings.

2.5 Piping Specifications
In the same way that design offices have standard piping specifications, AVEVA E3D has a set of
specifications from which the designer can select. All the components within AVEVA E3D must be defined in
the Catalogue and be placed in a Specification before they can be selected. In the Training Project there are
three such specifications:
 A1A = ANSI CLASS 150 CARBON STEEL
 A3B = ANSI CLASS 300 CARBON STEEL
 F1C = ANSI CLASS 150 STAINLESS STEEL
These specifications contain all the fittings required for the course exercises. An important point to
remember when using the application is which specification is currently being used as the default.
For the Training Project, the first letter in the pipe name represents the specification to be used. For
example, the PIPE /150-B-5 has the letter ‘B’ to represent the specification.
The specification letters are as follows: -
 A = /A1A
 B = /A3B
 C = /F1C

2.6 Pipe Editor:- Create Pipe Form
In the Create group click the Create Pipe

button to display the Pipe Editor: Create
Pipe form.
The Pipe Editor: Create Pipe form is now displayed
The upper section of the form allows the Pipe Name to be entered
and the Primary System to be selected.
The middle section of the form allows the selection of the

specification for the pipe.
The lower section of the form is the Basic Pipe Process Data:-
 Bore field indicated on the form is the nominal bore for

this pipe and does not affect the pipe route.
 Insulation Spec
 Tracing Spec
 Temperature
 Pressure
 Slope Ref.
Not all of these fields are mandatory.
Clicking the Apply button will create the pipe which in turn
changes the form to the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form.
2.7 Pipe Creation – (Worked Example)
The following sections include a worked example which covers pipe creation, branch positioning and
connecting a branch head/tail.
It is usual to create pipe elements in situ to allow referencing of other model elements.
Add EQUI D1201 and :HEATEX E1302A owned by ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 which in turn belongs to
SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the 3D View.

Click the Create > Create Pipe button to

display the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe form.
Before creating the pipe navigate to the correct ZONE using the
Model Explorer, in this case ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01.
Enter the Pipe Name, 80-B-7.
Select the Primary System for the pipe to be Process System

B.
Select the required Pipe Specification A3B.
Select the Bore to be 80mm, and keep the default values for
Insulation, Tracing, Temperature and Slope Ref then click the
Apply button.
The new pipe has been created in ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-

AREA01.

2.8 Pipe Branch Heads and Tails
All branches need to have a start and end point. These can be a position in space (3D co-ordinates), the
flange face of a nozzle, a tee or various other points in the model. Heads and tails are set up via a series of
attributes that belong to the branch element.
The branch head is at the face of Nozzle 1 and the branch tail is at the face of Nozzle 2. The head and tail
can be easily distinguished by the different symbols which can be seen when the connected element is not
in the 3D View.
2.8.1 Branch Head Attributes
 HPOS The position in the zone where the branch starts.
 HCON The connection type of the branch end
 HDIR The direction in which the start of the branch is pointing (looking down the bore).
 HBOR The bore of the pipe (this can be metric or imperial).
 HREF The name of the item to which the branch head is connected (e.g. /C1101-N1). If
this is not set, then the branch is open to the atmosphere for a vent or drain.
 HSTU This is a reference to the catalogue, which determines the material of the first piece
of pipe, between the start of the branch and the first fitting (this still needs to be set, even if there is
a fitting connected directly to the head).
2.8.2 Branch Tail Attributes
 TPOS The position in the zone where the branch ends.
 TCON The connection type of the branch end
 TDIR The direction in which the end of the branch is pointing (looking back down the
bore).
 TBOR The bore of the pipe (this can be metric or imperial).
 TREF The name of the item to which the branch tail is connected (e.g. /150-A-3). If this is
not set, then the branch is open to the atmosphere for a vent or drain.
 It is not necessary to specify each of these attributes every time a branch is created. On most
occasions when a branch head or tail is defined, it will be connected to another pipe or to a nozzle. The
act of connecting to another item sets the branch head/tail attributes automatically.

2.9 Modify Pipe Form
In AVEVA E3D terms a pipe is an administration element. The branch element holds the geometric data.
On clicking the Apply button on the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe

form the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form is automatically
displayed so that the branch head and tail can be specified.
The upper section of the displays the pipe name and

specification.
There is also a list of existing branches containing the reference

names for head and tail connections.
 At present the head and tail entries are blank because the
branch has not been connected.
The lower section of the form shows the Branch Head and
Branch Tail tabs. These allow the positioning, connection and
setting of various other attributes for the head and tail of the
selected branch.
It can be considered that there are two methods of doing this:-
 Explicitly – by entering the data manually.
 Connecting – by connecting to an existing pipe or

equipment nozzle the values are set automatically.

2.10 Updating Pipe & Branch Data
Modify Pipe Attributes
Modify Branch Attributes
Clicking the Modify Pipe Attributes or the Modify Branch Attributes button will change the form allowing
modification of the pipe or branch attributes respectively.

2.11 Pipe Branch Head/Tail Positioned Explicitly
The explicit definition method involves the use of the tab below the List of Connections fold-up panel.
When setting the branch head or tail explicitly, each of the

previously described branch attributes needs to be specified.
Bore: Nominal Bore size of the pipe. The options list contains all
sizes available in the current specification.
Connection: select from the options list of the available head/tail

connection types.
Direction: - the head direction is with the flow and the tail direction
is against the flow.
The Pick Position button can be used to graphically set the

head/tail position using the Positioning Control toolbar. This is with
respect to the World.
Position: Position in world co-ordinates. This can be expressed in

ENU or XYZ format.
By default setting the initial position for the head will result in the tail
also being positioned and vice versa. The position of the tail is in
relation to that of the head.
 The automatic positioning of the opposing end of the branch

will allow immediate use of the Quick Pipe Router if required,
see Chapter 4 for details.

2.12 Pipe Branch Head/Tail Connected – (Worked Example)
With the Branch Head tab selected click the Pick

Connection button.
The prompt ‘Identify element to connect to:’ is displayed.
In this example the head connection will be connected to Nozzle

N2 of :HEATEX E1302A.
Indicate the EQUI as shown:-
 In this example the Nozzle is deliberately avoided to

demonstrate alternative behavior.
This will result in the name of the EQUI being added to the form
and the List of Connections fold-up panel being populated with
the nozzle connections and their availability from the EQUI.
In this case click N2 from the list followed by the Connect To

Selected button.
The List of Connections fold-up panel closes and the new

values can be seen on the lower section of the form.
Similarly to the explicit positioning method, the positioning of the

head will have automatically resulted in the tail position being
defined. However for the purposes of this worked example the tail
will be updated.

Repeat the connection procedure for the Branch Tail tab. Click
the Pick Connection button as shown before.
In this example the tail connection will be connected to nozzle

N1 of EQUI D1201.
This time indicate the actual nozzle as shown:-
Because the unconnected nozzle was indicated directly the

connection is made automatically.
The List of Connections fold-up panel closes and the new

values can be seen on the lower section of the form.
Savework
In this case the head and tail connections are in line resulting in
the route from head to tail being geometrically correct.
When the route of the branch is geometrically correct the

implied tube will be created.
 The inclusion of the implied tube immediately after creating

the connections is not normally the case. Usually the
branch requires some form of modification in order to
make the implied tube appear.
 When using the Pick Connection method for head/tail

creation it is not necessary to click the Apply button. This
is because the information is committed to the database
when the Connect To Selected button is clicked.

2.13 Modify Pipe Form - continued
The other buttons on the form are:-
Set Working Pipe – allows navigation to an alternative

pipe and update the form to suit.
Create New Branch – creates a new branch belonging

to the current pipe.
Autoroute Branch – routes the branch between the

existing components or head/tail connection is no
components are present using default selections from the
specification.
Disconnect – disconnects the head/tail from the current

connection.
Reconnect – reconnects the head/tail to a connection

that has changed position in the model.
Connect To First/Last Member – repositions the
head/tail to the first/last member in the branch. This is
used for modification when the head/tail is not connected
to another pipe or nozzle. This also sets the Connection
Type to that of first/last member.

2.14 Navigating Pipes and Branches
If there is a requirement to modify the pipe or branch once it has been created, select the pipe in the 3D
View or from the Model Explorer and then from the Modify group click the Modify Pipe button to display
the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form.
Alternatively, if the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form is already open navigate to the pipe and click the Set
Working Pipe button on the form. Allowing the navigation between pipes without having to close the form
and reopen it each time
The form displays the existing branches owned by the pipe in the
Connectivity table. Highlighting the branch which requires modifying in this
table will display the head and tail details and connection information on the
relevant tab. The selected branch will also be highlighted in the 3D View
Branch B1 selected
for modification.

Branch B2
selected for
modification.
The form is also used to create a new branch by clicking the Create New Branch button. The head and tail
position for the new branch can now be defined.
The new branch can now be seen in

the Model Explorer.
If the Modify > Modify Pipe or Set Working Pipe button is clicked and the Current Element is not a valid
pipe, branch or component then a warning will be displayed.

Exercise 1 – Create Pipes Head/Tail
Create Pipe /200-B-4 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-

AREA01 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process

System B.
 Specification = A3B
 Bore = 200mm
 Head connected to nozzle EQUI /C1101/N3
 Tail connected to nozzle EQUI /E1301/N1.
Create Pipe /150-A-57 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-

 Primary System = Process

System A.
 Specification = A1A
 Bore = 150mm
 Insulation = 50mm_FibreGlass
 Head is Open End W 303000 N 308530 U

104965 with a Direction of W
 Tail connected to nozzle :PUMP

P1502B/N1.
Savework
Practice navigating between the different pipes and

branches.

CHAPTER 3
3 Component Creation and Modification
3.1 Pipe Branch Components (Pipe Fittings)
When a branch head and tail is initially defined, the branch will consist of a single section of pipe running in
a straight line between the head and tail positions. This will appear as a dotted line between the two points
unless the head and tail are aligned along a common axis and have the same bore. The presence of the
dotted line indicates that the branch route is incorrectly defined.
The next step in designing a pipe is to create and position a series of fittings, which define the pipe route
required. It is necessary to decide which piping components are needed in order to satisfy the requirements
of the process. The components must be arranged so that the pipe meets the design requirements. It is not
necessary to know the dimensions of fittings as AVEVA E3D derives these automatically from the catalogue.
To create components, first select an item from the list of fittings available from the associated piping
specification. Typical fitting types are Elbows, Tees, Reducers, Flanges, Gaskets and Valves. There is some
intelligence built into the AVEVA E3D forms so that by placing, for example a valve, the associated Gaskets
and Flanges will also be created.
For all piping components, the following steps will need to be performed:-
 Select the component from the piping specification.
 Position the component and set the orientation.
The Tube does not have to be created explicitly; it is created automatically and implied between adjacent
fittings.

3.2 Arrive and Leave Points
Piping components have P–points (similar to those for equipment primitives). The significance of P–points is
two–fold. Firstly, they define the connection points, and secondly, they determine the branch flow through
the component by means of Arrive and Leave attributes.
For the reducer shown below, the large end is at P1 and the small end is at P2. If this component is used to
increase the bore of the branch, the flow in the direction of the branch will be from P2 to P1. In order to tell
AVEVA E3D the necessary flow direction, there are two numeric attributes, Arrive and Leave, which must be
set to the p–point numbers required. In this case, Arrive would be set to 2 and Leave would be set to 1. (The
default is Arrive 1 Leave 2). Forms and menus within AVEVA E3D will handle all connections; however it is
important to understand the concepts behind the connections.

3.3 Piping Component Editor Form - Creation
In the Create group click the Create Component button to display the Piping
Component Editor form.
The Piping Component Editor form now appears.
This form is used extensively during pipe creation. As implied

by the name of the form it is not only restricted to the creation of
the components, but also for the modification and reselection
as well.
The upper section of the form relates to the general branch

information such as Specification, Bore, Insulation and
Tracing.
The next section of the form consists of two tabs. The

Standard Components tab displays the 14 commonly used
component buttons. This is supplemented by the Additional
Components tab.
The selection of one of these buttons will make the Select tab
active to further filter the selection.
In addition to the Select tab there are also the Modify,

Reselect and Errors tabs. The use of these tabs will be
covered later in this guide.
The appearance of the area below the sType list varies

depending on the type of component being added.
The lower section of the form is common for all component

types:-
 Create Mode section determines whether the

components are created in the direction of flow or
against flow.
 Create Components section determines whether the

components are connected to the current component
or inserted.
 The Auto Create checkbox is mainly used to

determine whether connecting flanges and gaskets
are to be added, i.e. when creating flanges or valves.
 The Skip Connected Comps checkbox is used if the

Current Element is connected to other components.
With this checkbox checked the component will be
created at the next free connection, i.e. where there is
implied tube.
 The default value for these checkboxes can be determined

by the Piping Settings form see section 3.17 for further
details

3.3.1 Selecting from an Alternative Specification
Components can be selected from an alternative

specification if required using the options list as shown.
The selection of an alternative specification is indicated

on the form as a warning.
When an alternative specification is being used and the

component is of the correct type, i.e. flange, valve, etc.
the Select adjacent out of spec checkbox becomes
active.
Checking this checkbox will result in the adjacent

components also being selected from the alternative
specification if available.
 The default value for these checkboxes can be

determined by the Piping Settings form see
section 3.17 for further details
To revert back to the original specification click the

Reset Specification link label or reselect it from the
options list as before.

3.4 Piping Component Editor Form – Creation – (Worked Example)
The first section of this worked example is very simple and will cover the completion of PIPE /80-B-7 that
was created in the worked example in the previous chapter.
Navigate to BRAN 80-B-7/B1 in the Model Explorer.
 When adding flanges to head or tail the branch must be the current
element.
Click the Create > Create Component button to display the Piping
Components are created by selecting the required fitting type button, in

this case the Flange, which in turn influences the appearance of the
lower section of the form.
Once the fitting type has been selected a list of available

STypes will be displayed on the Select tab.
The Piping Component Editor form shows details of all the

sTypes available in the specification. i.e. a slip-on flange, weld
neck, etc.
The items are created in order, With Flow or Against Flow. As

the button is selected the branch toggles between the head/tail
position.
At Head - With Flow direction.
At Tail - Against Flow direction

Select the required flange from the sType list, FSO, click the With Flow button, check the Auto. Create
Adjacent and Skip Connected Comps. checkboxes and click the Connect button. The new flange
complete with gasket will be added to the branch. Appearing in both the 3D View and Model Explorer.
Now add a SO flange and gasket

to the tail of the pipe:
Ensure that the branch level is

selected in the hierarchy to
achieve the correct result.
Savework.
The next section of this worked example will handle the creation of some of the components for PIPE /200-
B-4 that was created in Exercise 1 of the previous chapter.
Navigate to BRAN /200-B-4/B1 in the Model Explorer.
Click the Create > Create Component button to display

the Piping Component Editor form.
Alternatively if the form is already open click the Set

Working Branch button to update the form to suit the
current pipe.
Connect a WN flange to the head and tail of the branch.
Navigate to the flange at the head of the

branch and click the Elbow button on the
form.

Select the EL90 from the sType list.
When adding an elbow it is also possible to specify the Angle by

entering the degrees value. This value has to be within the
Min/Max value specified.
 This Min/Max value is set in the specification.
In this case the default value of 90 is valid.
Click the With Flow button followed by the Connect.
The elbow is connected to the

flange as shown.
With the previously created elbow selected create a second

elbow, ensuring that the With Flow button is selected.
Navigate to the flange at the tail of the branch and create a third
elbow, ensuring that the Against Flow button has been clicked.
These elbows require modification because the orientation is not

correct to suit the desired route.

3.5 Piping Component Editor Form – Modification
The Piping Component Editor form promotes the workflow of creation and modification from the same
form maintaining focus in a single area of the application.
 Retrospective modification can also be performed using the Model Editor, refer to Chapter 4.
The Modify tab differs to the Select tab in that it is not

necessary to use the Set Working Branch button to
update the form to the current branch or component.
The form tracks the current element allowing the
selection of any pipe component for which the user
has write access for modification.
The Modify tab has five main sections:-
 Positioning Functions
 Rotation & Direction tool
 Orientation Functions
 Other Functions
 Component Sequence List

3.5.1 Forwards / Backwards Mode
When the Modify tab is selected an additional button

becomes active which determines whether the
modifications are applied in Forwards or Backwards
mode. This button is a toggle which shows the current
mode that is being used.
 Not all of the Modify functions are affected by the

Forwards/Backwards mode. This will be clearly
stated in the relevant sections
In Forwards mode the functions are performed

with the direction of flow. The modification axes
are positioned at the arrive of the component.
In Backwards mode the functions are performed

against the direction of flow. The modification
axes are positioned at the leave of the
component.
 This often has the result of reversing the

meaning of the function, i.e. Next becomes
Previous and vice versa.
The mode currently being used can be determined by which button is visible. This mode will be set until it is
changed.
 The following sections will use the Forwards direction mode only unless otherwise stated.

3.5.2 Positioning Functions

Branch Head
Previous Component
Align with Previous
Next Component
Branch Tail
Cursor Pick
Distance From Previous
Tube Length from Previous
Advanced Drag Move
Advanced Move
 The following explanations will assume that the Forwards direction mode has been selected unless
stated otherwise.
With the exception of Advanced Drag Move and Advanced Move the remaining Positioning functions use
a constrained centreline from the previous or next component to position the component being modified. The
use of the previous or next component from which the constrained centreline is applied is dependent on the
Forwards or Backwards mode respectively. The component will be positioned so that the origin is along
the constrained centreline. The orientation of the component is not altered when using the Positioning
functions.

3.5.2.1 Position Through - Branch Head/Tail

In Forwards direction mode a constrained centreline is used from the previous component through the
origin of the component being modified. The component is then positioned through the head/tail
respectively.
Branch Head
Branch Tail
 These functions are influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode.

3.5.2.2 Position Through - Previous/Next Component

origin of the component being modified. The component is then positioned through the origin of the
Previous/Next component respectively.
Previous Component
Next Component

3.5.2.3 Position Through - Align with Previous

origin of the component being modified. The component is then positioned through its own origin which
results in it being aligned with the Previous component.
Align with Previous
 This function is influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode

3.5.2.4 Position Through - Cursor Pick

origin of the component being modified. The component is then positioned through the cursor pick indicated.
Cursor Pick
This will invoke the Positioning Control form.
In the illustration below the tee is positioned through

the nozzle of the pump

If the direction of the constrained centerline is not orthogonal, as is the case for the 45 degree elbow shown
below, the Select Through Plane form is displayed.
The Select Through Plane form allows the selection of three possible planes using the radio buttons.
Radio button 1 will position the component through

one of the orthogonal planes, at the picked position.
In this case the East plane.

Radio button 2 will position the component through

the other orthogonal plane, at the picked position. In
this case the North plane.
Radio button 3 will position the component through a

plane perpendicular to the constrained centerline.
Effectively positioning the component at the closest
position to the picked position.

3.5.2.5 Position Using Distance From Previous/Tube Length From Previous

These functions allow the positioning of the current component using a distance value entered into the
textbox. This distance will either be interpreted as the distance between the origins or the tube length
between the leave of the previous to the arrive of the component being modified.
Distance From Previous Tube Length From Previous
The elbow is positioned so that there is 750mm The elbow is positioned so that there is 750mm of
between the origins. tube.
 These functions are influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode
3.5.2.6 Advanced Drag Move/Move

Clicking the Advanced Move or Advanced Drag Move buttons will open the relevant form as shown below.
 These are the advanced forms and are consequently handled in a separate chapter refer to chapter 6 -
Advanced Positioning Forms.

3.5.3 Rotation and Direction Tools
3.5.3.1 Direction Tool

The Direction tool allows the indication one of the six axes to set
the direction of component. For example the direction of an elbow
can be set to Up as shown.
This will set the value in the Direction textbox. Alternatively the
value can be entered directly into the textbox.
The default orientation for the current form can be changed from
the right click menu. However if the form is initialised again the
orientation will be reset to the default.
 To permanently set the default orientation the Piping

Settings form needs to be used, see section 3.17.3 for
details.
Clicking one of the planes will change the appearance of the tool allowing a more specific direction to be
selected. The result of this does depend upon the original orientation of the component.
To return to the default directional appearance, to allow the

selection of another plane click the Default Direction button or
press the Escape key.

3.5.3.2 Rotation Tool

To access the Rotation tool click on
the Rotate Component button. This
allows the rotation of the component
to be modified.
The appearance of the tool is

dependent upon the type of
component that has been selected.
When the tool is activated an aid is added to the 3D View which

shows the angle values. These are always incremental angles
with 0 degrees being the starting position of the component.

Positioning the cursor over

the angle selection on the
form will result in the arc of
rotation being included in the
3D View.
Clicking the angle will modify

the component as shown.
The Rotation tool can also be applied to other component types. The
appearance of the gadget will change depending upon the object
being rotated as shown here for a valve.
The Direction functions first orientate the component so that:-
 In Forwards mode the arrive of the component is in the opposite direction to the leave of the
previous.
 In Backwards mode the leave of the component is in the opposite direction to the arrive of the
next.
This orientation is performed before the direction of the leave (Forwards) or arrive (Backwards) is changed.
The position of the component is not altered.
Consequently the Direction functions might have unexpected results if:-
 The arrive of the component is not orientated to the leave of the previous in Forwards mode.
 The leave of the component is not orientated to the arrive of the next in Backwards mode.
(The above situations are usually instantly recognisable because there will be no implied tube at the arrive
or leave).

3.5.3.3 Rotation Tool with Flanged Components
For flanged components the

Rotation tool uses the bolt
hole positions to determine the
angles by default. In this case
there are 12 holes in the
flange allowing rotations of 30
degree increments.
In this case the valve has

been rotated but the flanges
have remained in the original
position. The valve rotation is
constrained to the angle
determined by the bolt hole
positions.
To turn off the constrained bolt

hole rotation, click the Change
To Default Angle button as
shown. The appearance of the
button has changed to show
the mode being used.
Selecting a rotation that does not align with the bolt hole spacing will result in the associated flanges being
highlighted and a question form appearing. Clicking the Yes button will also rotate the flanges while clicking
the No button will maintain the original flange rotations resulting in the flange bolt holes being misaligned
with those of the valve.

 Should any misalignment between the bolt holes need to rectified the Connect to Previous button can
be used, see section 3.5.5 for further details.
To return to the Direction tool

click on the Direct
Component button.

3.5.4 Orientation Functions
Direction To Next
Direction To Previous
Direction To Head
Direction To Tail
Orientate Component
Flip Component
Align Selection/Component
Direct Selection/Component
 The following explanations will assume that the Forwards direction mode has been selected unless
stated otherwise.
3.5.4.1 Direction To Next/Previous

These functions allow the direction of the current component towards the origin of the next/previous, whilst
orientating the component so that the opposing connection direction suits the adjacent component.
In Forwards mode the Direction To Next button orientates the arrive of

the component to suit the leave of the previous and then directs the leave
of the elbow to the origin of the next.

3.5.4.2 Direction To Head/Tail

These functions allow the direction of the current component towards the head/tail position of the branch.
Usually Direction To Tail is used in Forwards mode to direct the leave connection and Direction To Head
is used in Backwards mode to direct the arrive connection.
Scenario:- The elbow has been created and positioned directly below the
tail of the branch. In Forwards mode the Direction To Tail button can be
used to direct the leave of the elbow to the tail position.
Scenario:- The elbow has been created and positioned at the same
height as the head of the branch. In Backwards mode the Direction To
Head button can be used to align the arrive of the elbow to the head
position.

3.5.4.3 Orientate Component

This allows the orientation of the current component so that direction of the arrive connection suits the leave
of the previous component (Forwards mode). This function does not make the axes co-linear or connect the
components.
Orientate Component
3.5.4.4 Flip Component

This function flips the arrive and leave of a single component whilst maintaining the position. This will
change the flow direction through the component which is useful for single direction components such as
non-return valves; or to change the orientation of a lever or handwheel on a ball or butterfly valve
respectively.
Flip Component
 This function is not influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode.

3.5.4.5 Align/Direct Selection/Component

These functions are often used in conjunction with one another, but not in every case. They align the origin
of the bend or elbow with the next or previous component and direct the angle of the bend or elbow to
complete the route.
 For the Align Selection/Component function to work correctly implied tube is required which
constrains the movement of the elbow along its centreline. Without the implied tube the results are
difficult to predict.
In the example below the pipe route is being modified so that the current 45 degree elbow is aligned to the
next component, a 90 degree elbow. The angle of the 45 degree elbow is then changed to the suit the
required direction.
Align Selection/Component Direct Selection/Component
 The same functions could have been applied to the downstream

90 degree elbow. This would have had the result of moving the
downstream 90 degree elbow and maintain the position of the 45
degree elbow. The angle of the 90 degree elbow would then be
changed to 45 degrees.
 These functions are not influenced by Forwards/Backwards

direction mode

3.5.5 Other Functions

Copy Component
Connect To Previous
Modify Arrive/Leave
Auto Complete
3.5.5.1 Copy Component

This allows the current component to be copied, creating a new component by connecting it to the current
component.
Copy Component
 This function is influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode.

3.5.5.2 Connect To Previous

This connects the current component directly to the previous component (Forwards mode).
Connect To Previous
If this function is applied to a group of connected

components as shown below, then an option to
move all of the selected components is displayed.
Clicking the Yes button will result in all selected

components, in this case the flanges, gaskets, valve
and elbowl; being repositioned to connect the CE to
the previous component.
 This function is influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode.

3.5.5.3 Modify Arrive/Leave

This allows the modification of the arrive and leave of an inline component without changing the orientation.
A common example of this is for a tee fitting to require the branch to be changed from P3 to P2.
Clicking the Modify Arrive/Leave button as shown will open the relevant form.
It can be seen that normally the Arrive is P1

and the Leave is P2, with P3 as the
connection for another branch.
This can be reconfigured to suit alternative requirements. For instance it may be a requirement to set the
Leave as P3 and keep the Arrive as P1 which will result in P2 being the free connection for the branch. This
can be achieved using the pull down menus on the form and clicking the Apply button:
 In the above instance it would be necessary to reconfigure the connection for the branch.
 This function is not influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction mode.

3.5.5.4 Auto Complete

The Auto Complete button will automatically complete the route of the current branch. The route is
completed using default selections from the specification for flanges and elbows. These are the first
elements of their type in the specification. The completed route will be orthogonal and clash free. Any
existing components that were present will remain in their original positions.
Auto Complete
As an example, if this is applied to BRAN /200-B-4/B1 created in the previous worked example the logic
applied can be easily seen..

3.5.6 Component Sequence List
The Component Sequence List is an ordered list of components for the current branch. It provides an
alternative method of navigating to the components within the branch whilst maintaining focus on the Piping
The CE is in the centre of the Component Sequence

List and is highlighted as shown. This is also reflected
in the Model Explorer and the 3D View in the usual
manner.
 The Component Sequence List will also track

the CE should a selection be made from the
Model Explorer or 3D View.
The adjacent components in the branch are shown

both sides of the CE, unless first or last component is
selected. To navigate to an alternative component
select it from the list or alternatively click the Select
Previous or Select Next buttons Clicking these
buttons from the branch level will navigate to the
previous or next branch respectively.
Clicking the Select First Component or Select Last

Component buttons will navigate to the components
at the Head or Tail respectively (Forwards mode)
If the CE is close to the head or tail of the branch the

Component Sequence List will display the Select
Branch buttons. This will navigate to the branch level
in the Model Explorer.
The Component Sequence List is influenced by

Forwards/Backwards direction mode. Switching to
Backwards mode will reverse the sequence of the
components as shown.

3.6 Piping Component Editor Form – Modification – (Worked Example)
This worked example will modify the elbows belonging to PIPE /200-B-4 already created in the previous
worked example.
Navigate to the ELBO1 of BRAN 200-B-4/B1 in the Model

Explorer.
Click the Modify > Modify Component button to display the

Piping Component Editor form.
Alternatively if the form is already open click the Set Working

Branch button. This will update the form to suit the current
pipe.
With the Modify tab selected ensure the Forwards direction

mode is active, if necessary click the Change To Forwards
Mode button and click D axis on the Direction tool.
Select the downstream elbow from the Component

Sequence List to make ELBO2 the CE. This is reflected in
the 3D View.

Click the Connect To Previous button.
Click the Next Component button from the

Position Through section.
Click the Direction To Next button.
Select the downstream elbow from the Component

Sequence List to make ELBO3 the CE.

Click the Direct Selection/Component button to

complete the route.
Savework
3.7 Branch Components List Order
With equipment and structure elements, the order in which the elements are created is of no importance to
the final outcome. With piping components, the order in which they are laid out, as well as their individual
positions and orientations, determines the final pipe route.
To help with this a Component Position Pointer is displayed at the current element. This aids the selection
of With Flow or Against Flow on the Select tab of the Piping Component Editor form. The direction and
position of the Component Position Pointer is determined by the selection. This indicates the position of
the new component being created.
This is demonstrated below on the elbow created previously on PIPE /200-B-4.
With Flow Against Flow

Below is an example of the Model Explorer showing the components of BRAN /200-B-4/B1.
By default TUBE is not shown in the Model Explorer.
On the Project tab, select Options > System, followed by the Explorer Settings button to display the
Piping Settings form
Checking the Show TUBI/ROD checkbox and clicking the Apply button will display the implied tube
segments in the Model Explorer as shown below.
When using AVEVA E3D the list order becomes second nature after the creation of a number of branches.
However during the initial use careful attention should be paid to the order of the hierarchy.
Consider carefully where the next item is going to be inserted by watching the Component Pointer and
checking the Model Explorer frequently.
 When creating a component at the branch head or branch tail, the branch must be the current element.
This was demonstrated in the previous worked example, see section 3.4.

3.8 Inserting Inline Fittings – Flanges
Thus far this guide has only covered the creation of components using the connect method. However inline
components can be inserted into the tube elements of the branch.
From the Standard Components tab click the

Flange button.
Select the FSO flange form the SType list.
Ensure the Auto Create checkbox is checked.
Click the Insert button.
The prompt to ‘Identify branch leg for Flange:’ is

displayed.
The insertion position is indicated on the implied tube in the 3D View:-
 When indicating the implied tube, clicking too close to existing components may result in the
component being connected as opposed to being inserted in the implied tube as intended. This is
controlled by the Piping Settings form, see section 3.17 for further details.

The checking of the Auto Create checkbox results in

both flanges being inserted in to the implied tube as
shown. The form then allows the selection of an
alternative flange for the second flange.
Select the FSO flange from the Available

Alternatives list and click the Done button.
The selection of the alternative flange is applied to

the CE. It may be necessary to indicate the flange to
be changed in the 3D View before making the
selection on the form..
 This is the same workflow for all flanged

components.
Leaving the Auto Create checkbox unchecked

results in a single flange being added to the branch.
Consequently there is no option to select an
alternative as shown previously.
The orientation of the flange is determined by the With Flow or Against Flow button. However when
inserting single flanges there is a Flip Component button available from the Create Components section of
the form in case the orientation of the flange needs to be amended.

3.9 Inserting Inline Fittings – Tees
Tees can be connected or inserted using the same methods that have already been described in this guide,
but there is some additional information that needs to be provided.
From the Standard Components tab click the Tee button.
As before a selection is made from the sType list. In the

example shown the sType Filter has been set to T.
The Conn Bore can also be used to filter, 200mm has been
used in this example.
The Config options determines the flow through the tee:-
Flow Through Tee creates a tee with the arrive set

to P1 and leave by the inline leg P2
Leave By Connection creates a tee with the arrive

set to P1 and leave by the offline leg P3
Arrive By Connection creates a tee with the arrive

set to P3 and leave by the inline leg P2
Ensure that the With Flow button is selected.
The prompt ‘Identify branch leg for Tee:’ is displayed.

 A set on tee does not have any graphical representation, but it can be seen in the Model Explorer.
The direction of a set-on tee may need to be changed. To do this the direction of P3 must be known.
With the TEE selected from the Model Explorer in the

Common group, select the General option from the
Attributes options list.
From the Query form select P3. This shows that P3 lies in
the North direction.
The direction can be changed using the Rotation tool as

shown previously or using the Model Editor, refer to
chapter 4

3.10 Inserting Inline Fittings – Reducers
Reducers can be connected or inserted using the same methods that have already been described in this
guide, but there is some additional information that needs to be provided..
From the Standard Components tab click the Reducer button.
As before a selection is made from the sType list. In the example

shown the sType Filter has been set to CONC.
The Leave Bore can also be used to filter. This combined with the
Config selection will impact on the appearance of the SType list.
The Config options determine the orientation of the reducer:-
Arrive Major, Leave Minor
Arrive Minor, Leave Major
If the Leave Bore textbox is unset and the Arrive Major, Leave
Minor has been selected, the SType list will display all concentric
reducers with an arrive bore of 200mm and a leave bore less than
200m that are available in the A3B specification.
In this example the Bore selected is 100mm
Ensure that the With Flow button is selected.
The prompt ‘Identify branch leg for Reducer:’ is displayed.
The reducer is placed in the indicated branch leg, but

because the leave bore of the reducer does not match
the arrive bore of the next component the implied tube
cannot be completed.

3.11 Handling Multiple Wall Thicknesses
Some piping specifications contain tube elements that have alternative wall thicknesses for a single bore
size, i.e. /A150. For this to be the case the specification in the Paragon module will contain multiple entries
for the bore which in turn refer to an alternative wall thickness table (WTHTAB), as shown below.
The result of this is the presence of an additional Leave

Tube options list being available when the component has
been created.
By default the selection of the leave tube will be in

accordance with the default set in the specification.
An alternative can be selected from the options list.
A Confirm form is displayed, click the Yes button to

change the leave tube.
Once the leave tube has been set to an alternative, the alternative will be used for any new fittings that are
created.
 For additional information relating to the queries available for wall thicknes refer to Appendix – A.
For specifications of this type, when creating components where the

arrive and leave bore are different, i.e. reducers and tees of a particular
configuration; a Message form is displayed as a reminder to ensure the
correct leave tube has been selected for the new bore size.

3.12 Deleting Components
So far this guide has covered the creation and modification of pipes, branches and components, however
from time to time it is necessary to delete components from the branch.
Using the Model Explorer, 3D View or Component Sequence List indicate the component to be deleted,
in this case it is the tee created in the previous section.
In the Common group, click the Delete button
Alternatively, individual components can be deleted directly from the

Model Explorer by using the right click and selecting Delete.
A Confirm form appears requiring the confirmation of the deletion? Click

the Yes button to delete the component, removing it from the Model
Explorer and the 3D View.

3.13 Deleting a Range of Piping Components
It is possible to graphically indicate the first and last component within a range and then delete them in a
single operation. In this case the flanges, gasket and reducer will be deleted.
In the Tools group, click the Delete Range button. A prompt appears, ‘Identify start of range selection to
delete’, indicate the first component. A second prompt now appears, ‘Identify end of range selection to
delete’, indicate the last component.
The components are highlighted in the 3D View and a Confirm

alert form appears, requiring the confirmation of the deletion?
Click the Yes button to delete the range of components.
Alternatively the components to be deleted can be highlighted

by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while indicating
them from the 3D View or by fencing them in using a window. In
the Common group, select the Selection option from the
Delete button options list.
 For information relating to the deletion of pipes or branches

refer to section 7.3.

3.14 Component Editor Form – Inline Fittings – (Worked Example)
This worked example will continue the creation of BRAN /150-A-57/B1 by adding the necessary valve and
reducer at the suction connection nozzle /P1502B/N1.
Add PIPE /150-A-57 and :PUMP 1502B to the 3D View.
Open the Piping Component Editor form
Connect a #300 weld neck flange and gasket at the tail.
The upstream bore of the branch needs to be increased to

150mm to suit the head bore. With the flange selected, from
the Standard Components tab click the Reducer button as
shown.
From the Select tab select the Arrive Minor, Leave Major
button, set the SType filter to CONC and the Leave Bore to
150mm.
This will present only a single component in the SType list.
Click the Against Flow button followed by the Connect

button.
The reducer will be added to the flange

as shown.

With the reducer previously created still the CE, click

the Valve button from the Standard Components
tab.
From the Select tab select the VALVE GATE from

the SType list.
Ensuring the Against Flow button and Auto Create

check box have been selected click the Connect
button.
An Error message is displayed indicating that the

connection of the default flange type is not
compatible with the reducer. Consequently the flange
and connected components have been moved by
100mm.
The default flange, FSO and valve will be added

upstream of the reducer as shown. The Alternative
flange available labels are shown as a prompt.
In this case the flange downstream of the valve

needs to be changed to weld neck so that it can be
connected directly to the reducer.
Indicate the flange in the 3D View to make it the CE.

From the Select tab in the Available Alternatives section, select

WN and click the Done button.
The selected flange will be changed accordingly. The position of

the flange and the connected components needs to be corrected.
Select the Modify tab and click the Change to Backwards Mode
button.
From the Other section of the Modify tab, click the Connect To
Previous button, which in Backwards mode will connect to the
next component.
A Confirm form appears asking ‘Do you want to connect all the
selected items?’. Click the Yes button to reposition the selected
flange and the connected gaskets, valve and flange.

The connected components are repositioned so that the weld

neck flange is connected directly to the reducer.
The rotation of the valve needs to be changed so that the

spindle of the handwheel is pointing South.
Click the Change to Forwards Mode button.
Select the Modify tab on the form followed by the Rotate

Component button.
With the valve selected indicate a 90 degree rotation.
Select the branch level either using the Model Explorer or

the Component Sequence List.

Click the Elbow button from the Standard Components tab.
From the Select tab select the EL90 as shown from the SType
list.
Ensuring the With Flow button has been selected click the
Connect button.
The direction of the elbow needs to be changed so that the

leave of the elbow is pointing Down.
Select the Modify tab on the form and ensuring that Forwards
mode is selected click the Down direction.
The elbow is rotated to the correct orientation and now needs

to be repositioned. Enter a value of 5060mm in the textbox and
click the Distance From Previous button.

With the elbow previously created still the CE, click the Tee
button from the Standard Components tab.
From the Select tab select the SType Filter options list to T
and the Conn. Bore to 150mm.
In the Config. section click the Arrive By Connection button.
Connect button.
The tee will be connected directly to

the elbow using the P3 connection of
the tee.

Select the Modify tab on the form and enter a value of 750mm
in the textbox and click the Distance From Previous button.
This will position the tee at the correct height.
With the tee previously created still the CE, click the Elbow
button from the Standard Components tab.
From the Select tab select the EL90 as shown from the SType
list.
Connect button.
Select the Modify tab on the form and click the Next
Component button from the Position Through section of the
form.

This will extend the leg so that the elbow is aligned in the
East axis with the tail position.
Click the South direction.
The elbow will now have the correct orientation.
Click the Copy Component button.
This will add another elbow which needs to be repositioned.

Click the Next Component button

from the Position Through section of
the form.
Click the Direction To Next button

from the Orientation section of the
form.
The branch will now be complete.

Exercise 2 – Component Creation – Branch /100-B-8/B1
Create Pipe /100-B-8 and Branch /100-B-8/B1 below ZONE ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following
information:-
 Primary System = Process System B
 Bore = 100mm
Use a combination of weld neck flanges for the valves and slip-on flanges elsewhere.
 The flanges downstream of the valves will be weld neck, which is technically incorrect. These will be
changed to slip-on in the next section of the guide
The suggested workflow for this exercise is as follows:-
 Create pipe and branch.
 Connect head and tail to equipment items.
 Create flange/gasket at head and tail.
 Create elbow at head and tail, offset to distances

shown.
 Create tee upstream of elbow at tail, offset to

distance shown.
 Create elbows and position using Next Component

and Direction To Next functions.
 Connect gate valves, complete with flanges and

gaskets, to elbow and tee.

3.15 Component Editor Form – Reselection
Frequently it is necessary to modify single components by using the Reselect tab available from the Piping
The Reselect tab works similarly to the Modify tab in

that the form tracks the current element.
The upper section of the tab lists the component name,

specification and bore.
The selection of an alternative Type and Sub-Type

from the available options lists is possible which will
filter the components available for selection.
To reselect a component click one of the components

from the list.
The appearance of the Reselect tab is dependent upon

the type of component currently selected. In this case
an elbow is the current element allowing the angle of
the elbow to be modified by the form.
 The default behaviour of the Reselect form is

controlled by the Piping Settings form, see
section 3.17 for details.
Any errors that occur as a result of the reselection

function are displayed on the Errors tab.

3.16 Component Editor Form – Reselection – (Worked Example)
This worked example will modify the flanges belonging to PIPE /100-B-8 already created in the previous
exercise.
Navigate to the FLAN3 of BRAN /100-

B-8/B1 in the Model Explorer.
Click the Modify > Modify Component button to display the

Alternatively if the form is already open click the Set Working

Branch button to update the form to suit the current pipe.
Select the Reselect tab and from the Sub-Types option list
select FSO to filter the selection.
Select the FSO flange from the list to

change the flange type from Weld Neck
to Slip-On as shown.

3.17 Piping Settings Form
The Piping Settings form is used to control some of the default behaviour within the Piping module.
On the Project tab, select Options >

Discipline, followed by the Piping
Application Defaults button to display
the Piping Settings form
The Piping Settings form is split into

three section:-
 Creation
 Selection
 Display
3.17.1 Piping Settings Form - Creation
The Creation section handles the default behaviour that is encountered when using the Select tab on the
3.17.1.1 Snap Distance

When using the Create Component at Picked Position button to insert a component into a section of tube.
The result of the pick will be determined by the proximity of the adjacent components in relation to the Snap
Distance. The Snap Distance is a ratio of the Outside Diameter of the tube. If the position indicated is
closer to the component than the Snap Distance then the component will be connected as opposed to
placed.

3.17.1.2 Min. Tube
This is the tube length that is used when attempting to connect

components with incompatible connections.
3.17.1.3 Auto Align

This determines the behavior of the Insert button
when used to create components in a geometrically
incorrect route, indicated by a dotted line.
If this checkbox is checked:-
 The arrive of the component will be aligned

with the leave of the previous component, if
the With Flow button is selected.
 The leave of the component being aligned

with the arrive of the next component, if the
Against Flow button is selected.
If the checkbox is unchecked then the component

will not be aligned.
(With Flow)
3.17.1.4 Auto Create/Select Adjacent Out of Spec/Skip Connected Comps
Checking these checkboxes will determine whether the corresponding

checkboxes on the Select tab of the Piping Component Editor form will
be checked by default.

3.17.2 Piping Settings Form – Selection
The Selection section mainly handles the default behaviour that is

encountered when using the Select and Reselect tabs on the Piping
3.17.2.1 Descriptions
The Descriptions options list sets the format of the component descriptions
that are shown on both the Select and Reselect tabs of the Piping
3.17.2.2 Tag Component

This is used to toggle the component type tag shown in the 3D View when using the Piping Component
Editor form.
3.17.2.3 Tag Constraints
This is used to toggle the highlighting of components which could result

in connectivity problems if an adjacent component is changed. In the
illustration changing the size of the valve might affect the elbow and the
downstream flange which has an RLOCK set to 0.
 To illustrate this setting the Ignore Positioned checkbox has been

unchecked to add the highlighting to the downstream flange, see
section 3.17.2.6.

3.17.2.4 Auto Reconnect

This is used to toggle the automatic reconnection function for the reselected component. When the
checkbox is checked the system will automatically attempt to re-establish the connections to the adjacent
components when the component is selected from the form. If it is unchecked the Reconnection button will
have to be used once the component has been selected.
3.17.2.5 Reconnect Free Ends

This is used to toggle whether the connectivity of the pipe head/tail should be re-established if it becomes
disconnected as a result of component reselection.
3.17.2.6 Ignore Positioned

It is possible to set the RLOCK attribute of a component to 0 in order to maintain its position. RLOCK is the
attribute for the branch members’ creation status used by Router, see TM-1850 AVEVA Everything3D Pipe
Router. Checking this checkbox will reposition the components irrespective of the RLOCK value. With the
checkbox unchecked the reselection process is still possible, but the components with an RLOCK value of 0
will not be repositioned.
3.17.3 Piping Settings Form - Display
The Display sets the default orientation of the Direction Tool that is present
on the Modify tab of the Piping Component Editor form.


CHAPTER 4
4 Using the Model Editor
So far in this guide the positioning of the components has been handled using Piping Component Editor
form. However this can also be carried using the Model Editor, which also has the capability to create the
initial route of the branch using the Quick Pipe Router functionality.
4.1 General Use of the Model Editor
If a pipe, branch or component, (singular or multiple) needs modification i.e. moving, this can be done by
using the Model Editor functionality.
The Model Editor can be invoked in the following ways:-
 In the Common group click the Model Editor button.
 Use the right click menu on the element to be moved and

select Model Editing.
 Double click on the element to be moved.
When active the Model Editor handle can be seen in the 3D View.
 The functionality relating to this will be shown in greater details

later in this chapter.

4.1.1 Setting the Increment Values for Model Editor
The Model Editor uses incremental settings to determine the

values obtained when dragging the various handles. On the 3D
View tab, in the Model Editor group click the Set Increments
button to display the Set Increments form.
The Set Increments form has three text boxes:-
 Linear Increment
 Fine Linear Increment
 Angular Increment
The Linear increment is specified in the currently active units. The Linear increment controls the delta
value used when dragging a graphical selection using a linear or planar handle. The default step size is
50mm, (or 2 inches).
The Fine linear increment has the same function as the linear increment, but with a default step size in
5mm. After the selection has been dragged into an approximate position, fine 'nudges' are achieved by
using the '2' and '8' numeric keypad keys or the arrow keys with the mouse button held down
The Angular increment controls the value used when dragging a graphical selection using a rotation
handle. The default angular increment is 5 degrees
Change the value of the Fine linear increment to 1mm as

shown and click the Apply button.
Selecting the pipe modification handle and clicking the arrows on the keyboard will move the selection 1mm
at a time.
Fine linear increment Angular increment
 The dimension may differ to that shown in the screen shot.
 When the Model Editor is active a graphical aid indicates the direction of flow within the branch.

4.1.2 Moving Inline Components
This section will introduce the use of the Enter Offset and Enter Distance From functions using PIPE /100-
B-8 as an example. Inline components can be distinguished by the fact they are held within the constraints
of the implied tube. Consequently the appearance of the Model Editor handles is slightly different. These
handles are known as the Pipe Editing handles and limit the movement of the selection to the axes of the
branch leg.
Positioning the cursor over the Pipe Editing handle in the North axis
and select Enter Offset from the right mouse button menu to display
the Constrained Move form. Enter the Offset value of 200mm and
click the Preview button, if the preview is acceptable then click the
OK button.
Alternatively, move the cursor over the Pipe Editing handle in the North axis and select Enter Distance
From > Leave… /Origin… /Direction Change…. from the right mouse button menu. The Distance from
Leave/Origin/Direction Change form appears showing the current distance, key in the distance from value
required. Once again the Preview and OK buttons can be used as before.
If the opposite direction, (South), Pipe Editing handle is selected, the

menu will change to Enter Distance From > Arrive… / Origin… /
Direction Change…
 It should be clear that the options are context sensitive, for

instance the Direction Change… option will be replaced by
Branch Head… / Branch Tail… depending upon the
configuration of the branch.

4.1.2.1 Distance Feedback

The numerical value that is displayed in the 3D View when using the Model Editor is known as the
Distance Feedback. By default the value is set to the Arrive or Leave of the selection depending upon
which Pipe Editing handle is selected. This can also be changed from the right click menu while on the
Pipe Editing handle and selecting Distance Feedback > From Arrive / From Leave / From Origin / From
Direction Change / From Branch Head / From Branch Tail / From Current Position.
To cycle through the different Distance Feedback options available press the D hot key.
As already mentioned the options that are available

are dependent upon the configuration of the branch
and will change to suit. This is indicated using PIPE
/150-A-57 created previously.
The From Current Position option will initially display a value of 0, but can be used in conjunction with the
drag functionality to offset the selection by a delta value, in this case 100mm as seen functions using PIPE
/100-B-8 as an example.
 The Model Editor handles will be the same for

valves, flanges, reducers etc. A tee component
can be moved the same way unless it is
connected at the P3 connection.

4.1.3 Move Handle
To aid manipulation of the graphical selection it is also possible to change to position of the handles. In the
previous section the Pipe Editing handles were in the correct position prior to moving the fitting. There are
frequently times when this need to be changed before any move can be carried out. To change the position
of the handles move the cursor over a Pipe Editing handle and from the right click menu select Move
Handle > Opposite End of Selection or End of Selection depending upon the handle selected.
This can best be demonstrated on a group of components. The Pipe Editing handles will initially be
positioned at the centre of the selection as already seen. Positioning the cursor over the Pipe Editing
handle in the South axis select Move Handle > End of Selection from the right mouse button menu. The
Pipe Editing handles will be repositioned to the corresponding end of the selection.
Using the same Pipe Editing handle select Move Handle > Opposite End of Selection from the right
mouse button menu. The Pipe Editing handles will be repositioned to the other end of the selection.

4.1.4 Moving Inline Components into another Leg of the Branch
Inline components that have not been connected to another branch can be moved into another leg of the
pipeline providing it is within the same branch.
Feature Highlighting has to be inactive to move the component to other legs in the branch .Press the F key
to toggle this on/off.
The current status of Feature Highlighting can also be

checked from the Model Editor group of the 3D View
tab.
The Pipe Editing handle can then be used to drag the components into the other leg of the branch.
 If at any point during the use of the Model Editor the operation needs to be cancelled the Esc key can
be used to return the graphical selection back to its original position.
4.1.5 Rotating a Component Using the Pipe Editing Handle
With the Model Editor active on the inline component drag the Rotational handle to the required angle. The
delta value for the current rotation and the resulting direction can be seen in the 3D View.

4.1.6 Orientate a Component to a Point
With the Model Editor active on the inline component select Orient To Point from the right click menu.
Move the cursor over the P-points of the other components, when the orientation is correct select the P-point
to fix the rotation the Rotational handle to the required angle. The delta value for the current rotation and
the resulting direction can be seen in the 3D View.
4.1.7 Align a Component with a Direction
With the Model Editor active on the inline component select Align with Direction from the right click menu.
Move the cursor over the P-points of the other components, the directional plane will be highlighted and the
component will be aligned, when the alignment is correct select the P-point to fix the rotation.
4.1.8 Align with a Direction Relative to Axis
With the Model Editor active on the inline component select Align with from the right click menu .The Enter
Direction For Z Axis form appears, enter E 45 U and then click the Preview button. If the preview is correct
then click the OK button, if not enter another direction and repeat process.

4.1.9 Rotate by Entering a Value
With the Model Editor active on the inline component select Enter Value from the right click menu. The
Rotate Selection About X form appears. Enter the rotational value required, in this case 180 and then click
the Preview button. If the preview is correct then click the OK button, if not enter another value and repeat
process.
 These are absolute angles taken from the starting position i.e. entering “0” degrees at any time will
return the valve to its original position.
4.1.10 Move an Elbow / Bend in One Direction
As the cursor is moved over the Model Editor handles, the axis line is highlighted. Move the cursor over the
required axis for the direction the component needs to be moved, from the right click menu select Enter
Value…. The Move Selection form now appears, key in the move value in this case 300mm and click the
Preview button. If the preview is correct then click OK.
 The component could have been dragged to this position providing the Linear Increment setting is set
accordingly.

4.1.11 Move an Elbow / Bend in Two Directions
Move the cursor over the square forming a plane for the axes i.e. XZ, YZ, and XY on the Model Editor
handles.
The axes lines are highlighted. From the right click menu select Enter Value…. The Move Selection form
now appears, key in the values, in this case key in 500mm, 300mm and click the Preview button. If the
preview is correct then click OK.
 Once again this could have been achieved by dragging providing the Linear Increment setting is set
accordingly.

4.1.12 Move Using Align with Feature
Move the cursor over the required axis, from the right click menu select Align with Feature…. A directional
arrow appears, move the cursor over another P-point that the component needs to be aligned with. When
the correct P-point is identified, select it and the elbow will be aligned with the P-point.
 If the cursor was moved over the two lines

forming a plane for the axes i.e. XZ, YZ, and
XY, then the component will be aligned through
two directions.

The following steps outlining additional Align with Feature modes requires insulation to be applied to PIPE
/150-A-57.
 See Appendix C.1 Adding / Controlling insulation.
When using other features of the model

to align the pipe components it is
possible to take in to consideration the
outside diameter of the tube and any
insulation that has been applied. As
shown here for PIPE /150-A-57 and
FRMW ROW_7 of STRU /PIPERACK.
 The tube and elbow have been

selected prior to the change in
elevation.
Picking an edge of the steel work as

the feature will provide five possible
results.
 If the handle is dragged the O hot

key can be used to cycle through
these results
Through Linear Edge –

The centerline of the tube
is positioned at the top
edge of the steel.

Tube Clearance 0mm in

front of Linear Edge –
The underside of the tube
is positioned on top of the
steel.
Tube Clearance 0mm behind

Linear Edge – The top of the
tube is positioned level with the
top of the steel.
Insulation Clearance 0mm in

front of Linear Edge – The
underside of the insulation is
positioned on top of the steel.
Insulation Clearance 0mm

behind Linear Edge – The top
of the insulation is positioned
level with the top of the steel.
 These allowances for the tube outside diameter and insulation are also applicable when using the
Quick Pipe Router, see section 4.2.

4.1.13 Move Using Offset From Feature
Move the cursor over the required axis and from the right click menu select Offset From Feature…. The
Offset From Feature form appears, enter the offset value in relation to the direction of the axis selected, in
this case -500mm and click the OK button. Move the cursor over the P-point that the component needs to
be offset from. When P-point is selected the component will be offset by the value entered on the form. As
shown here for PIPE /100-B-8.
The Offset From Feature… can also be used to allow for the tube outside diameter and any insulation as
shown previously. Shown here for PIPE /150-A-57.
The offset value enterred can be set against the

centreline of the tube, the outside diamter or the
insulation.
 The result of the Offset From Feature… function is dependent upon the initial direction of the handle
selected. In the above instance the Model Editor handle had been orientated so that the axis direction
of the handle selected was Up.

4.1.14 Move Using Snap to Point
Holding the cursor over the Model Editor handle and from the right click menu select Snap to Point….
Move the cursor over the P-Point to snap to, the P-Point will be displayed and the part will be displayed in its
new position. If the position is correct indicate the P-point.
4.1.15 Change Length using Model Editor
Using the Model Editor handles it is possible to move a section of a branch and at the same time change
the lengths of the connected legs to suit.
Selecting the implied tube in the leg of the branch will also
highlight the relevant components. In this case the Ctrl
button has been used to also capture the leg the branch in
the East/West axis.
Selecting the axis to modify the length and dragging the handle to the required position will also adjust the
adjacent legs.

4.1.16 Moving Single / Multiple Pipes using Model Editor
It is possible to move a single pipeline or multiple pipelines using the Model Editor by selecting them from
the 3D View. This is done either by fencing the items by holding down the left mouse button and trapping
everything inside a window or by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and indicating each item.
Select the handle that the direction the pipes

are to be moved in and drag the handle to
the required position.
 Care must be taken when using the

fencing in approach on a 3D View that
contains numerous elements. It may be
advisable to create a new 3D View
containing only those elements to be
moved.
The Rotational handles are also active to

allow the rotation of the pipe if required.

4.2 Quick Pipe Router
The Quick Pipe Router can be considered to be a mode of the Model Editor. The mode is activated by
clicking the ‘dotted’ line of an incomplete route whilst the Model Editor is also active.
The Quick Pipe Router handle has three representations:-
 Extend Route handle - This is used to extend the route in the direction indicated by the handle.
 Cardinal Direction handles - These are used to change the direction of the routing to one of the
cardinal directions from the current frame of reference.
 Rotational handles - These allow the extended route handle to be interactively directed.
The Quick Pipe Router handle is used to define a routing vector within the constraints of the currently
selected ‘badly’ defined route. A ‘badly’ defined route is defined in general terms as follows-
 There is a misalignment between two components
 The head or tail of a branch is incomplete, i.e. where the head/tail attributes are left in their default
state
 The head/tail is positioned but not connected and the head/tail connection type is unset.
This usually equates to the dotted line representation of the implied tube, where the implied tube cannot be
drawn. An exception to the above could be where a pipe branch does not have specification reference set.
The handle can be dragged by using either primary or secondary mouse buttons. By default the handle will
move in multiples of the currently defined linear increments. If the secondary mouse button is clicked as the
cursor is over the pipe routing handle a context sensitive menu will appear. The menu will display the
available options which relate to the drag.

4.3 Extend Route Handle Menus
The following options are available on the Extend Route handle before a drag.
 See Appendix B for a full description of each option.
 The appearance of these options changes if the pipe has a Slope Ref set, see chapter 5
4.4 Rotational Handle Menus
The following are additional options available on the Rotational Handle before a drag.
 See Appendix B for a full description of each

option.

4.5 Fitting to Fitting Functionality
The Quick Pipe Router has fitting to fitting functionality that provides the visual feedback to determine
whether there is enough space for an elbow or bend.
Dragging the Extend Route handle will display the Distance Feedback value and fitting to fitting information
in the 3D View. This displays how the current drag value relates to the elbow/bend dimension.
The initial drag of the handle will display the selected

Distance Feedback value followed by ‘One fitting’. This
will be the case until the length of tube is great enough
to accommodate the elbow/bend.
Releasing the mouse button at this stage will

automatically increase the leg length to allow for a 90
degree elbow/bend.
Dragging the handle beyond the centre to face

dimension of the elbow/bend will display the resultant
tube length.
 In all cases it is assumed that the next elbow/bend

will be 90 degrees. However the values are
correctly calculated to allow for an alternative
angle from the previous component.
The elbow/bend will not have the correct representation until the subsequent direction has been determined.

The subsequent drag will once again indicate the resulting length of tube between the two fittings.
If the elbow/bend is to be connected directly to the existing component it is not necessary to drag the handle
in the leave/arrive direction of the previous/next component. Instead the required direction axis can be
selected immediately making the procedure more efficient.

4.6 Quick Pipe Routing Using Elbows – (Worked Example)
The Quick Pipe Router will allow the definition of the pipe route wherever there is a ‘badly’ defined route
within a branch, i.e. where the dotted pipe frame is displayed instead of implied tube.
Iso2 View
Create Pipe /150-B-6 and Branch /150-B-6/B1 below ZONE ZONE-
PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process System B
 Bore = 150mm
Connect the head to C1101/N5 and the tail to E1302B/N1.
Add weld neck flanges to the head and tail.
Indicate the dotted pipe frame line and click the Common >
Model Editor button. Alternatively double click the dotted
line. The Quick Pipe Router handle will now appear at the
leave of the component.
Select the Extend Route handle and from the right click menu
select Component Choice > Use Elbows.

Drag the Extend Route Handle

1100mm in the East direction.
This will create an elbow connected

directly to the flange and a ‘blob’ to
represent a second elbow.
Drag the Extend Route handle 500mm in the Down direction to complete the elbow.
To switch the Quick Pipe Router handle to

the arrive of the flange at the tail, click the
single handle at this connection.
Drag the Extend Route handle 800mm in the

West direction to create two elbows as shown.
Enter the feature highlighting mode by

pressing the F key on the keyboard or on the
3D View tab, in the Model Editor group check
the Feature Highlighting checkbox.

Right click on the North direction Extend Route handle and with the button
held down, drag the cursor towards the handle at elbows previously created
at the head of the branch. A proposed route for completion will be displayed
translucently.
Release the right mouse button and select Complete from the context
sensitive menu that appears.
The elbows and implied tube are added to

complete the route.
 The elbows that have been added

automatically can later be changed to a bend
or an alternative elbow.

4.7 Pipe Routing Using Bends
Typically pulled bends are used on smaller bore pipe routes in the Plant industry. If bends are to be used
instead of elbows the bend radius applied must obtained from either the specification, as is the case for
A1A, or from a pipe fabrication machine.
4.7.1 Bends via Pipe Fabrication Machine
If a pipe fabrication machine is to be used the zone, pipe or branch must have the BendMacReference
attribute set. The BendMacReference must point to a valid Fabrication Machine World (FMWL), Fabrication
Machine Group (FMGRP) or Fabrication Machine (FMBEND).
By default the FMWL and its members are not shown in the Model
Explorer. On the Projects tab, select Options > System followed by the
Explorer Settings button to display the Explorer Settings form.
Unchecking the Hide non-user System Data checkbox and clicking the
Apply button will display additional elements, including the FMWL Click the
OK button to close the form.
In the Training project there is a single Fabrication Machine World,

Fab_Machines which owns two Fabrication Machine Groups, Bending_5D
and Bending_3D. These in turn own two bending machines each. This
arrangement can be customised to suit the customers’ requirements. For
instance there may be more than one FMWL or FMGRP to allow for
different locations of the bending machines, i.e. different fabrication shops.
In order for the pipe to be bent on the bending machine the comptype attribute on the variable angle /
variable radius bend must be set to VAR in Paragon. There are several criteria that can be checked to
ensure the pipe can be bent, outside diameter, wall thickness and material reference. However it is not
essential for wall thickness and material reference to be allowed for if they are not required. This allows a
flexible approach to the set up.
If either the FMWL or FMGRP is assigned as the BendMacReference, the system will apply the radius of the
first bending machine with the correct criteria in the hierarchy. For example, using the hierarchy shown, if the
FMWL is assigned then the system will attempt to add 5D bends. In order to achieve a 3D bend either the
FMGRP or FMBEND that owns the 3D data must be assigned. For this reason the structure of the FMWL
should be carefully considered.
 At this stage in the work flow the only aim is to create a bend with the correct radius that can be bent
later. The assignment of the actual bending machine that will perform the task is carried out later, see
Chapter 15 Production Checks.
There is no default bend radius available for Quick Pipe Router. Dragging the handle when there is no
bend radius available will display ‘Fitting size undefined’ on the 3D View. This will result in a zero radius
bend being created, indicating that some administrative work is required for this tube or specification.

4.8 Pipe Routing Using Bends via Pipe Fabrication Machine – (Worked Example)
Create Pipe /40-B-10 and Branch /40-B-10/B1 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following
information:-
 Primary System = Process Head Details:-

System B
 Connection Type = Open End
 Direction = E
 Bore = 40mm
 Position:-
 W 312700
 N 300800
 U 102135
Tail Details:-
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 309080
 U 105000 (This is an arbitrary value

which will be updated according to
the route obtained).
From the Model Explorer right click on the pipe and select Attributes… The Attributes of /40-B-10 form
will appear. Set the BendMacReference attribute by entering /Bending_3D. As explained previously this is
the name of the Fabrication Machine Group (FMGRP).
 Setting the BendMacReference attribute to the Fabrication Machine Group will result in the first
suitable bending machine in the hierarchy to be used, in this case FMBEND 3_NB_MACH.

Double click on the dotted of the branch to invoke the Right click on the Extend Route handle pointing
Quick Pipe Router. in E direction and select Component Choice >
Use Bends from the menu.
Using the Extend Route handle at the head drag

the cursor to achieve the dimensions shown.
Add SCTN 4 belonging to FRMW /ROW_5 owned by STRU /PIPERACK

from SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to the 3D View.
Once again the existing features can be used as a reference in order to

determine the dimensions of the pipe route. Using the axis handle select
Offset From Feature … from the right click menu. The Offset From
Feature form appears, enter a value of -500mm and click the OK button.
 This value will be applied to any subsequent drags until an alternative

function is selected or Model Editor is de-activated.

Place the cursor over the underside of SCTN 4

and select the aid labelled Tube clearance
500mm from Linear Edge.
Using the North axis handle select Extend

Through Feature … from the right click menu.
 This is necessary because the previous

Offset From Feature function will result in
the offset value being applied to any features
indicated when dragging the handle.
Indicate the handle at the tail.

Ensure Feature Highlighting mode is on, (press

the F key to toggle). Using the left mouse button
drag the Up axis handle over the top of SCTN 4
and select the aid labelled Tube clearance 0mm
behind Linear Edge to place the underside of the
tube on top of the steel. The O hotkey can be used
to cycle through the possible results with Feature
Highlighting active.
 The dragging method with Feature

Highlighting active achieves the same result
as the Extend Through Feature… from the
right click menu.
Click the Modify > Pipe button to display the Pipe

Editor: Modify Pipe form. This will add the aids
for the head and tail to the 3D View.
Using the East axis handle select Extend

Through Feature … from the right click menu.
Indicate the aid at the tail to obtain the correct East

position.
The route will now be complete with the exception

that there are too many bends present and the tail
position is incorrect.

Select the Branch Tail tab on the Pipe Editor:

Modify Pipe form. Click the Connect To Last
Member button and deactivate the Model Editor
by clicking on the background in the 3D View.
This will position the tail correctly and remove

the additional unwanted bend.
4.9 Adding Bends Using the Form
Bends can be added in the same fashion as elbows using the Piping Component Editor form and then
manipulated using the Modify tab, but clearly this is not as efficient as using the Quick Pipe Router.
From the Standard Component section click the Bend

button.
The form changes to show the available bends.
The Radius option from the Bend Information section

defaults to Machine and the value is greyed out preventing
modification.
The priority is to check the zone, pipe or branch element for

a Fabrication Machine i.e. that the BendMacReference
attribute is set to a valid Fabrication Machine World, Group
or Machine.
The hierarchy is searched below the BendMacReference to

find an appropriate tube outside diameter.
 If no matching dimensions are found the radius cannot

be set, requiring the radius to be set by the user.

4.10 Changing to Alternative Fabrication Machine Bend – (Worked Example)
If the bend radius needs to be changed for design reasons, then the BendMacReference attribute for the
zone, pipe or branch can be changed to another Fabrication Machine World (FMWL), Group (FMGRP) or
Machine (FMBEND)
Navigate to the BRAN 40-B-10-B1 and set the BendMacReference attribute for the branch to the 5D
FMGRP, /Bending_5D using the Attributes form.
Navigate to BEND1 via the Model Explorer or Component

Sequence List.
From the Reselect tab of the Piping Component Editor

form click the BEND #S entry in the list.
A Question form appears, enquiring “Bend Radius is

114.3mm - Do You want to change the Bend Radius to
190.5mm - Machine Defined” click the Yes button

The bend radius is changed to suit the new

fabrication machine settings. This process could be
repeated for all the required bends and elbows
within the branch.
4.11 Fabrication Machine Bends – General Information
 For the Fabrication Machine to work, the catalogue

component (SCOM) for the bend needs to have the
CompType attribute set to VAR.
 The actual radius of a bend can be determined from the

Attributes form.

4.12 Replacing Bends with Mitre Bends from an Alternative Piping Specification
Mitred bends are sometimes used on large bore, low pressure systems. The pipe specification /A150
referenced by the Training project has been supplied with mitred bends.
4.12.1 Fixed Cut Mitred Bends
Navigate to the BEND1 belonging to branch 40-B-

10/B1 via the Model Explorer or Component
Sequence List.
From the Piping Component Editor form select the

Reselect tab followed by the A150 spec from the
options list.
From the Reselect tab the list of available bends is

displayed including VAR ANGLE VAR RADIUS x CUT
MITRE BEND, select the required mitred bend, the
changes can be seen in the 3D View.
 The appearance of the Mitred bends is also

influenced by the bend radius that is used. In the
illustrations below a 5D radius used.
1 Cut Mitre 2 Cut Mitre 4 Cut Mitre 6 Cut Mitre

4.12.2 Variable Cut Mitre bends
Variable cut mitred bends allow the specification of the number of cuts required. When a VAR ANGLE VAR
RADIUS VAR CUT MITRE BEND is selected, the number of cuts (Ncuts) needs to be specified using
Modify Attributes form.
From the Reselect tab of the Piping Component Editor form

select the VAR ANGLE VAR RADIUS VAR CUT MITRE
BEND. The bend will now look like a normal radius bend in the
3D View.
With the bend selected in the Model Explorer click the right mouse button and select Attributes… from the
menu. From the Attributes form that appears edit the Ncuts attribute by entering 10.
 The Ncuts attribute is only used if the bend catalogue

parameter number 4 is set to -1in Paragon.

Exercise 3 – Quick Pipe Router – /100-C-13
Add STRU /PIPERACK belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 and EQUI /1301 belonging to
SITE /SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the 3D View. Create Pipe /100-C-13 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-
 Primary System = Process System C Head Details:-
 Specification = F1C  Connected to E1301/NS1
 Bore = 100mm
Tail Details:-
 Connection Type = Open
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 308280
 U 105000 (This is an
arbitrary value which will be
updated according to the
route obtained).

Use Quick Pipe Router with elbows to complete

the route ensuring that the horizontal legs are
resting on the pipe rack as shown.
Complete the tail position using the Connect To

Last Member button.

CHAPTER 5
5 Sloping Pipes
The previous chapters involved only orthogonal pipelines, that is, all lengths of tube were either horizontal or
vertical. In practice, it is a requirement to include lengths of tube, which slope at angles between
components. This chapter describes how to position and manipulate sloping pipework.
There are two ways of handling this scenario:
 True Representation – all components are accurately modelled to reflect the requirements. This often
requires the inclusion of bends, elbows or mitres with relatively small angles. There is no assumption
that the primary fittings will be ground or the weld gaps modified to create the angles for slope. This
method will not be detailed here as it simply a case of adding the required fittings as already explained
in this guide.
 Variable Angle P-Point Method – this requires the setting of an angular tolerance on certain P-Points
which can then be used to allow for a certain amount of angular misalignment. This has the benefit of
being more intelligent, not requiring any additional components and will work in conjunction with Quick
Pipe Routing. It assumes that the primary fittings will be ground or the weld gaps modified to create
angles for the slope. This method will also be detailed in the sections that follow.
5.1 Overview of Variable Angle P-Point Method
In AVEVA E3D 90 degree

elbows/bends are capable of
having a variable angle. They
are not fixed at 90 degrees.
Variable angle elbows/bends
can be directed to the angle of
the slope.
In the example a tee has been

added to the falling leg to
demonstrate how an offset
would be introduced. This
offset can be removed in
AVEVA E3D using the variable
angle P-Point methods.
The following illustration shows how the correction can be applied to reduce the offset. The P1 and P2 of the
tee are aligned with the main branch. The P3 of the tee can be a variable angle P-Point.
Closer inspection reveals the

existence of the offset.

5.2 Variable Angle P-Points
This allows a default slope to be set for a pipe via the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe form. This is known as the
Slope Ref (SLOREF). Slope References are created and named in the Paragon module within AVEVA E3D.
Each Slope Ref is determined by the Slope Element (SLOELE).
 The SLOREF attribute is present on PIPE, BRAN and SPEC elements.
The Slope Element has four values that need to be considered:-
 Default Slope - this is the optimum angle for the slope.
 Minimum Slope - the minimum slope below which the fluid will not drain.
 Maximum Slope - the maximum slope above which the fluids drains too quickly, leaving the solids in
the pipe.
 Minimum Vertical Slope – the minimum vertical slope beyond which both fluids and solids will drain.
These can best be explained by the following illustrations:-
 If the Slope Ref is set against a pipe it will be

checked during Data Consistency Checks and
prior to Productions Checks. See Chapter 12 Data
Consistency Checks for further details.

5.2.1 Setting the Nominal Direction on a Component
To allow for the instances of misalignment

between the sloping and non-sloping
components an OFFTOL attribute has been
added to the P3 of the tees and P2 of the
flanges. In effect creating a tolerance cone
within which the misalignment is acceptable.
To compliment this, a Nominal Direction
(NOMDIR) gives the exact direction when the
components are connected.
Attempting to use Quick Pipe Router on

a pipe which has a Slope Ref. set from a
component that does not have NOMDIR
attribute set will result in an elbow/bend
being placed at the P2 of the flange or P3
of the tee.
To overcome this, navigate to the flange or tee and from the Modify
group click the Slope Component button to display the Slope form.
 A Slope Ref. must be set on the owning branch in order to open

the Slope form.
The Slope form indicates the current direction of the

component. The lower section of the form shows how the
slope is determined. This is either Use Form Values,
which allows a Fall value to be entered, or Use Branch
Slope. The slope is specified as both a ratio and angle
and can be set as either slope Up or Down.
Setting the required values and clicking the Slope button

on the form will set a New Direction. Click the Apply
button to set the NOMDIR for the component.
 The nominal direction of the flange or tee can be

queried by using Q NOMDIR from the Command
Window.
The subsequent use of the Quick Pipe Router will

no longer result in an additional elbow/bend
appearing.

5.2.2 Variable Angle P-Points with Quick Pipe Router
One of the advantages of using the Variable Angle P-Points is that it can be used in conjunction with the
Quick Pipe Router. The right click menu contains additional sloping pipe options that can be used for
branches which have the SLOREF attribute set.
 No Slope – Ignores the SLOREF value to maintain a

horizontal route.
 Default Slope Up/Down – Applies the SLOREF value

when dragging the handles and determines whether there is
a fall or rise in relation to the direction from head to tail.
 Slope Angle… - Opens the Set Slope Angle form that

allows the setting of an alternative angle.
 The value entered must be within the Minimum and

Maximum slope angle range set against the SLOELE in
Paragon. Entering a value outside this range will result in
an Error form being presented.
Once the Default Slope Up/Down has been set the slope can be applied to the pipe by dragging the Quick
Pipe Router handles.
The information provided during the dragging can be set via the right click menu selecting Distance
Feedback > Show Orthogonal Length or Show True Length. These are additional to, and can be used in
conjunction with, the other Offset, Leg Length and From Origin options already discussed.

When using other elements in the model to refer to, either by dragging with the Feature Highlighting active
or when using the Extend Through Feature function from the right click menu, there are three possible
solutions for the position when the pipe is sloping. These can be cycled through with the use of the P key.
Vertical Solution - a position normal to the Closest Point - a position normal to the axis of the
highlighted feature in a vertical plane branch through the highlighted feature
Horizontal Solution - a position normal to the highlighted feature in a horizontal plane

5.3 Creating a Sloping Pipe using Quick Pipe Router – (Worked Example)
Create Pipe /100-C-16 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-

System C
 Connected to E1302A/NS2
 Specification = F1C
 Bore = 100mm Tail Details:-
 Slope Ref = /1in100  Connection Type = Open End
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 307400
 U 106300

Connect a #150 WN flange and gasket at the

head. Activate the Quick Pipe Router and
setting the Component Choice as elbows
create the first leg 1000mm long.
Right click on the East axis handle and select

Default Slope Down.
Drag the East axis handle 1650mm, note that

the leg is also sloping down 16.5mm.
Ensure Feature Highlighting mode is on,

(press the F key to toggle). Using the left
mouse button drag the North direction handle
through the tail.
 The Extend Through Feature option

available from the right click menu will
not apply the slope.

Route the pipe vertically downwards 650mm.
Click the Modify > Pipe button to display the Pipe Editor: Modify
Pipe form. This will add the aids for the head and tail to the 3D
View.
Ensure Feature Highlighting mode is on, (press the F key to

toggle). Using the left mouse button drag the East axis handle
over the top of the tail to obtain the correct East position. It may be
necessary to use the P key to obtain the desired position.
Select the Branch Tail tab on the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form.
Click the Connect Tail to Last Member button and deactivate the
Model Editor by clicking on the background in the 3D View.
5.3.1 Setting the Nominal Direction – (Worked Example)
Create Pipe /50-B-10 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-

System B
 Connected to C1101/N10
 Bore = 50mm Tail Details:-
 Slope Ref = /1in50  Use default settings.
Connect a flange and gasket at the head as shown

here in an Iso 2 view.

Navigate to the flange and click Modify > Slope

Component to display the Slope form.
Select the Use Branch Slope radio button and click the
Slope button to set the New Direction in accordance with
the Slope Ref set on against the branch.
With the New Direction set click the Apply button followed
by the Dismiss button to set the Nominal Direction of the
flange and close the form.
Invoke the Quick Pipe Router by double clicking on the

dotted line. From the South axis handle select Default
Slope Down from the right click menu.
The setting of the Nominal Direction will allow the Quick

Pipe Router to slope the branch away from an orthogonally
orientated component without the need to include an
additional bend/elbow at the leave of the flange.

5.4 Retrospective Sloping of Pipes
It has already been seen how an orthogonally routed pipe can be manipulated to suit an angle. An improved
method of doing this, which can refer to the Slope Ref., is via the Slope Pipe form.
Navigate to the pipe to be modified, in this illustration it is PIPE /100-C-16 created in a previous worked
example. From the Tools group click the Slope Pipe button.
The Slope Pipe form is displayed

showing a new 3D View of the pipe,
indicating with the use of aids the result
of the proposed slope.
The upper left side of the form allows the setting of

the slope by either referencing the branch slope
directly or by entering a value.
The slope can be defined as a ratio, angle or

percentage and can slope be Up or Down, in
relation to the direction of flow.
The form employs a Forwards and

Backwards mode to determine how
the slope is to be applied. The button
depicts the current mode.
It is also possible to Slope Individual Legs as

opposed to the whole pipe.
The form contains a list of branch legs, indicating

the start, finish, the fall as a result of the proposed
slope and the length. The selected leg is highlighted
in the 3D View on the form.
 It is not essential to have the Slope Ref set to be able to use this form.

The section below the list provides information and

tools to manipulate the selected leg.
The application of the slopes will modify the vertical

legs of the pipe try to obtain the slope. As a result, the
alteration of a vertical leg directly from the form is not
possible. Instead, it is often altered as a consequence
of other legs being modified.
Selecting a leg that is not vertical from the list will

update the area under the list to show the details of the
leg. This allows alteration of the slope or removal
completely by unchecking the Slope Leg check box.
The Anchors section of the form allows

features/positions of the selected leg to be fixed. By
default head and tail of the branch will always be fixed
and these are depicted as the Start/Finish of the
relevant Leg automatically.
Anchors are added by clicking on the Add Anchor

button. Additional information is then required for the
anchor definition to be complete.
There are four anchor Types available for selection from the options list:-
 Start – The start position of the leg is to be maintained.
 Finish – The finish position of the leg is to be maintained.
 Component – The position of a component in relation to another

feature is to be used.
 Position – A position along the leg is to be used in relation to

another feature.
Setting an anchor at the start of the leg will automatically add an anchor to the
finish of the previous leg and vice versa if the anchor is set at the finish.

Further consideration needs to be given to additional options that are present visible when the Component
and Position options are employed. They are very similar in application, both requiring the indication of an
element to which the component/leg can be anchored.
In the example a tee has been added to Leg 3 of

BRAN /100-C-16 above SCTN 1 of FRMW /ROW_J
of STRU /PIPERACK.
Selecting Component from the Type options list

changes the form to allow the selection of the
Component to be anchored, in this case TEE 1.
Clicking the Select Element button allows the

selection of the element in the 3D View to be used
as the reference position using the Positioning
Control toolbar.
 When using the Slope Pipe form the items to

be anchored to, in this case the STRU
elements, can be added to the 3D View on the
form by dragging and dropping from the Model
Explorer.
Once the element has been selected the Offset text

box is updated. The Point options list allows the
selection of Top, Centre or Bottom, which are in
relation to the selected component, so in this case
the bottom of the tee.
Clicking the Apply button will modify the pipe so that

the component P0 is positioned accordingly.

Alternatively selecting Position from the Type options list

changes the form to allow the selection of a Distance
along the leg to be anchored.
This can either be entered as value directly in to the

textbox or using the Pick Position button indicate a
feature in the 3D View to determine the position value. A
graphical aid is added to the leg at the specified position
and the form is updated with the value.
The remainder of the form functions in a similar fashion to the Component option. Once the element has
been selected the Point options list and Offset text box can be employed.
Clicking the Apply button will modify the pipe so that the
Position indicated is positioned accordingly. In this case
Distance 10408.55, determined by the section, the
Bottom of the pipe is offset by -85.77mm to rest on the top
of the section.
The anchor points that are specified are only set until the Apply button is clicked. Consequently it is better to
set all anchor points for the whole pipe rather than one leg at a time.
Anchors that have been added can be removed by

selecting them from the list and clicking the Delete Anchor
button.

If the proposed settings on the form will lead to an

erroneous result a warning symbol will appear in the
Branch Legs list.
To further investigate any errors click the Show

Messages button. The opens the Slope Pipe Messages
form as shown.
This will display the Slope Pipe Messages form as

shown.
When using the Slope Pipe no changes are committed to the database until the Apply button
is clicked. Changes in the calculations that are performed by the form can be reversed or
reinstated using the Undo Calculation and Redo Calculation buttons

5.5 Retrospective Sloping of Pipes – (Worked Example)
Add Pipe /100-C-16 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 and STRU /PIPERACK belonging to SITE
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to the 3D View.
Navigate to pipe /100-C-16 and click

the Tools > Slope Pipe button.
This pipe is already sloping as a result

of the previous worked example. This
worked example will alter the slope of
a single leg and use the finish point of
the leg as an anchor.

Check the Slope Individual Legs checkbox and

select Leg 3 from the Branch Legs list.
The slope of this leg needs to be increased, enter a

value of 50 in the Slope (1 in) text box.
It can be seen from the 3D View that this

will cause a clash between Leg 3 and SCTN
1 of FRMW ROW_J. In order to overcome
this, the finish of the leg needs to be
anchored.
With Leg 3 selected click the Add Anchor button.

Select Finish from the Type options list.
This will add an anchor to the finish of Leg 3 and the

start of Leg 4.
It can be seen from the 3D View that Leg 3

no longer clashes with SCTN 1 of FRMW
ROW_J and the finish position of the leg
has been maintained.
Click the Apply button to complete the

modification followed by the Cancel button
to close the form.

Exercise 4 – Creating Sloping Pipes - /100-C-17
Add STRU /PIPERACK belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to the 3D View. Create Pipe
/100-C-17 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-

System C
 Connected to E1302B/NS1
 Specification = F1C
Tail Details:-
 Bore = 100mm
 Slope Ref = /1in100
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 307600

which will be updated according to the
route obtained).
The pipe is to be positioned so that it is supported on the STRU /PIPERACK.

With the Default Slope Down set and Feature Highlighting (F) on, /ELBO 4 can be positioned so that the
sloping tube rest on the TOS using the Quick Pipe Router. When the cursor is positioned over edge of the
steel the aid will appear to select the required clearance. Using the P hotkey will toggle between Linear
Edge and Sloped Linear Edge. Select the aid when labelled Tube Clearance 0mm in front of sloped
Linear Edge.
Repeat the same procedure in order to determine the height for /ELBO 6.


CHAPTER 6
6 Advanced Positioning Forms
The Modify tab on the Piping Component Editor form has two buttons which provide advanced functions
for positioning head/tail components. They are the Drag Move and Move forms.
Both forms work in a very similar way the only difference being that the Move form is used to move
individual components whilst the Drag Move form applies the drag rules to a constrained network.
 If the forms are used at branch head or tail level the Origin option in the Parameters section of the
form will only display Head and Tail as options. This is because at branch level the form is only used to
reposition the head or tail of the branch, this is discussed further later in this chapter.

6.1 Move Form
Navigate to BEND6 1 of BRAN /40-B-10/B1 to demonstrate the

Move form.
The Move form is used to move the current element in a given

direction. This can be a specified distance in that direction, to a
position relative to another element, or relative to a plane through
a given component.
All of the forms have four common tabs:-
 Distance
 Through
 Clearance
 Towards
6.1.1 Distance Tab
The Distance tab allows the movement of the

current element so that its origin or nominated
PPoint moves a distance in a given direction.
The Parameters section of the Move form allows the setting of the
following:-
 Origin – using the options list to select Origin, Arrive or Leave.
 Distance
 Direction
 WRT – sets the frame of reference for the direction of movement

With Respect To a specified element.

The WRT setting can be influenced by the four buttons as explained:-
WRT Current Element - Direction with respect to itself
WRT Owner - Direction with respect to owner or first ancestor that has an
orientation
WRT World - Direction with respect to the World
Pick WRT Element - Direction with respect to a picked element
For very simple movements the Parameters section of the form can be employed on its own with the Target
section using the Relative To setting of No Target, for example:-
Before After
However the Target section of the form provides additional functionality. The Relative To options list
determines how the element is positioned in relation to the target element or position.
In Front / Behind
On Top / Under From / Towards

With the Relative To option set to something other than No Target, the Select options become available.
The setting of this option determines how the remainder of this form will function as shown:-
Selecting the Element option allows the specification of the

element to be referenced either by entering the name or by
clicking the Pick Target Element button and indicating the
element in the 3D View.
Alternatively, selecting the Position option requires the use of

the Pick Target Position button. This uses the Positioning
Control toolbar to perform an EDG pick to specify the position in
the 3D View.
The resulting position is indicated in the 3D View using an aid

as shown.
In this case SCTN 4 of FRMWORK /ROW_5 has been used.
The remaining options of Next, Tail, Previous, Head and Current

require no additional input.
Checking the Plane Through Target checkbox allows the specification

of the direction of the Plane. The current element is moved so that its
origin moves a given distance in a given direction, where the distance is
measure from intersection of direction of movement and the reference
plane. The reference plane is specified relative to the element or
position nominated in the Select options list.

6.1.2 Through Tab
The Through tab allows the movement of the

current element in a given direction until it reaches
a point, or is relative to a plane perpendicular to the
direction of movement through another point.
The Parameters section of the form is identical to that detailed for

the Distance tab with the exception that there is no Distance input
text box.
Unlike the Distance tab the Target section must be used to

perform an operation. The Target section of the form is similar to
that detailed for the Distance tab. However there is no Relative To
options list and the Through options list is the same as the Select
version on the Distance tab.
Checking the Plane Through Target checkbox allows the

specification of the direction of the Plane. The current element is
moved so that its origin moves to the intersection of the direction of
movement and the reference plane. The reference plane is
specified relative to the element or position nominated in the
Through options list.

6.1.3 Clearance Tab
The Clearance tab allows the movement of the element in a

given direction so that its obstruction volume or a Ppoint is a
given clearance from another element. The clearance is
measured in the same direction as the movement.
The Parameters section of the Clearance tab differs slightly in

that the Origin also contains an All option which allows for any
obstruction volumes. The Clearance value can also be
specified.
The remainder of this form works in the same fashion as the

Distance tab.
The illustration below shows how the Clearance tab can be

used in conjunction with the Relative To options.
In Front / Behind

On Top / Under From / Towards
6.1.4 Towards Tab
The Towards tab allows the movement of the

element a given distance in a direction specified in
terms of another element.
The Towards tab is much simpler than the previous tabs, but
uses the Parameters and Target sections in an identical
manner.

6.2 Move Branch
If positioned at the branch level the form changes to Move

Branch. It is identical to the Move form with the exception of the
Origin option in the Parameters section of the form. The only
options available are Head and Tail.
As implied the form is only used to reposition the head or tail of

the branch using the same methods as previously covered on the
Move form.
6.3 Drag Move and Drag Move Branch
The Drag Move and Branch Drag Move forms are identical to
the Move and Move Branch forms except that it applies the
drag rules to a constrained network.
In the previous examples the positioning commands do not

move the connected elements. The construction of the
constrained network depends on the direction of the drag
operation and the type of item to be dragged.
 Refer to the ‘Dragging Equipment and Piping Networks’

section of the Model Reference Manual from the Help for
information relating to the boundaries of a constrained
network.
 The Drag Move Branch form is displayed at branch level.

6.4 Advanced Positioning Forms – (Worked Example)
Add pipe /100-C-13 to the 3D View as shown
In a preceding exercise ELBO 2 of BRANCH /100-C-13/B1

was positioned using a leg length dimension of 850mm. This
needs to be changed to a West position of 319800.
Navigate to ELBO 2 and click the Advanced Move button

from the Modify tab on the Piping Component Editor form.
On the Move form select the Through tab.
Check the Plane Through Target checkbox, enter a Plane

value of W and select Position from the Through options
list.
On the Positioning Control form click the Explicit Position

button.

Enter a value for E of -319800 and click the

Apply button.
Click the Apply button on the Move form to

reposition the elbow at the specified West
position.

Exercise 5 – Advanced Positioning – Pipe /100-C-13
Pipe /100-C-13 is now incomplete as a result of the previous worked example.
Use the Move form to reposition ELBO 3, ELBO 4 and ELBO5 to correct the pipe.
Suggestions:-
ELBO 3 could be positioned using the same settings as the worked example and Through Previous.
ELBO 4 could be positioned using the Through tab Direction W, Plane W and Through Previous.
ELBO 5 could be positioned using the Through tab Direction W, Plane W, Through Element and use the
Pick Target Element button to indicate ELBO 4.
 There are numerous solutions in order to correct this pipe, including the Model Editor and the other
buttons on the Modify tab, but the Move and Drag Move forms are best employed in order to achieve
an Explicit Position that needs to be entered manually.


CHAPTER 7
7 Further Concepts
7.1 Copying an Inline Component
A tee is a component that is frequently copied to allow for additional branches to be connected to an existing
branch From the Model Explorer or 3D View select the inline component to copy. For this illustration TEE 1
belonging to BRAN /150-A-57/B1 has been selected. In the Common group select the With Offset option
form the Copy Element options list.
The Copy with Offset form appears and in the 3D View the axes are displayed on the component. Key in
number of copies 1 and the offset against the required direction. In this case, 500mm in the +X direction.
Clicking the Apply button will add the copy to the 3D

View allowing a visual check of the result. A Confirm
form appears, asking ‘Retain created copies?’ Click
the Yes button.
 Clicking No will cancel the copying operation
The inline component is now copied. If no more copies are to be made the Copy with Offset form can be
closed by clicking the Cancel button.
It can be seen that the connection configuration is also copied

from the original component. In this case the leave of the copied
tee will have to be modified to be the P1 of the component.

7.2 Copying a Branch – (Worked Example)
Often it is more efficient to copy a branch that contains similar components rather than create a new one. In
this worked example the valve arrangement at the suction of :PUMP P1502B belonging to BRAN /150-A-
57/B1 needs to connected to :PUMP P1502A.
Add the relevant elements to the 3D View.
Navigate to BRAN /150-A-57/B1 in the Model

Explorer.
Select Common > Copy Element > With Offset.
The Copy with Offset form appears but the values

required to perform the copy are not known.
Select Common > Measure Distance.
The Measure Distance form and Positioning

Control toolbar are displayed. Select Element and
Snap from the Positioning Control toolbar.

In the 3D View indicate two identical elements

belonging to the pumps. For example the discharge
nozzles as shown
This will populate the Offset X value field on the

Measure Distance form.
Copy and Paste the value from the Meaure

Distance form into the X textbox of the Copy with
Offset form and click the Apply button.
On the Confirm form click the Yes button to retain

the copy. Followed by the Cancel button on the
Copy with Offset form.
The branch has now been copied and the tail is

positioned at the suction connection of :PUMP
P1502A.
 The same procedure can be used to copy a

pipe that contains branches

To complete the copying process the branch will need to be modified using the functionality already covered
in this training guide:-
 Use the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form to connect:
 the head to TEE 1 belonging to BRAN /150-A-57/B1
 the tail to :PUMP P1502A/N1.
 Use the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form to rename the branch to /150-A-57/B2.
 Use the Delete Range function to remove the unwanted tee and elbow.
 Use the Modify tab of the Piping Component Editor form or the Model Editor to redirect the
remaining elbow towards the P1 of TEE 1 belonging to BRAN /150-A-57/B1.

7.3 Deleting a Pipe/Branch
Using the Model Explorer indicate the pipe/branch to be deleted. In the Common group, click the Delete
button.
Alternatively, the pipe/branch can be deleted

directly from the Model Explorer by using the
right click menu and selecting Delete.
The pipe/branch is highlighted in the 3D View and a Confirm form appears, requesting confirmation of the
deletion? Click the Yes button to delete the component, removing it from the Model Explorer and the 3D
View.
 If a pipeline/branch has been deleted by mistake and the changes have not yet been saved then
clicking the Undo button will restore the element to the Model Explorer and 3D View.


CHAPTER 8
8 Pipework Spec/Bore Modification
8.1 Pipework Component Bore and Specification Modification
This utility provides a method for modification of the bore or specifications of one or all of the components in
a pipe or branch. In addition to these modifications, the utility also allows the setting of insulation and tracing
specs. The same Modify Components form is used for modifying both component specification and bore.
To display the Modify Components form; navigate to the required pipe

or one of its branches and in the Modify group select the Pipe or
Branch button from the Spec/Bore options list.
8.1.1 Modify Components Form
The Modify Components form is a multi-function form capable of changing both specifications and bores.
The illustration below show the result of opening the form using pipe /150-A-57
The Modify Components form consists of three tabs, the Component List tab is the main tab which has
the following functions at the top of the form:-
 CE - allows navigation to another pipe or branch and updates the form accordingly
 Select from 3D View – allows the selection of a group of components in the 3D View and
highlights them on the Modify Components form.
 Insulation Spec – checking this will display an additional column on the Modify Components
listing the insulation that is applied to the component.
 Tracing Spec - checking this will display an additional column on the Modify Components listing
the insulation that is applied to the component.

The component list that dominates the remainder of the form has the following columns:-
 Design Element – These are the components in the selected pipe or branch
 Component Description – These description of the component
 PBORE1 …2 …3 – The bore at the relevant PPoint of the component
 Spec Component – The current specification reference of the component
 New Spec Component – The new specification reference of the component
 New Component Description – The new description of the component
 New PBORE1 …2 …3 – The new bore of the component
The Apply changes to like components checkbox will force any changes that are made to a component to
all instances of the same component in the list. This is very useful when applying changes to numerous
components of the same type without having to ensure that all instances have been selected on the form.
8.1.2 Component Selection
A series of components can be selected graphically by fencing in the components and then clicking the
Select from 3D View button. This accepts the selection and highlights the components in the list of
components.
Components can be added or removed from the selection by holding down the Ctrl/Shift keys and
selecting/deselecting components from the list.
 In the Design Element column of the Modify Components form, it can be seen that every component
has a Leave Tube element. This includes elements which do not physically have a leave tube, such as
gaskets, flanged valves etc. This is because AVEVA E3D requires each component to have a LSTU
(Leave Specification Tube) attribute. Although the leave tube for these elements is zero length, they are
still shown on this form to allow the specification to be changed to match the adjoining components.

8.1.2.1 Modification Options
The options are accessed from the right click menu over
a selected field. In each case the modify option applies
only to the highlighted items.
 Modify Specification - Modifies the specification of the components selected in the list.
 Modify Bore - Modifies the bore of the components selected in the list.
 Modify Insulation Spec - Modifies the insulation specification of the components selected in
the list.
 Modify Tracing Spec - Modifies the tracing specification of the components selected in the
list.
 Select Component - Allows the selection of an equivalent component where the

modification process fails to offer a component complying with the
new specification or bore.
 Select All - Selects all of the components in the list.
 Clear New Specifications - Clears the entries for the Selected or All components in the list
allowing the selection process to be restarted.
 Export to Excel - Allows the contents of the components list to be saved as an Excel
file.
 Print Preview - Presents a print preview of the component list.
8.1.3 Modifying Component Specifications
To modify the specification of a set of components, select the Modify

Specification option from the right click menu. The Select Piping
Spec form is displayed.
The desired specification can be set from the Specification options list.
How the selected specification will be applied is determined from the
Pipe/Branch Reset options list.
 Components Only - applies the specification to the selected

components.
 Pipe and Branches - applies the specification to the

components selected, the Pipe and all of the owned
Branches.
 Branch - applies the specification to the components selected

and all of the owning Branches.
 The latter two options will change the PSPEC attribute of the pipe and/or branch to that of the selected
specification accordingly.

 Normally any items which are not in the same spec as the current branch are ignored by this process.
This allows for items such as pipe supports and special components to remain untouched. However if
the Change out of spec components? checkbox is checked, it forces the selection process to look at
all components, regardless of their original specification.
Clicking Apply button on the Select Piping Spec form actions the search process to find equivalent
components in the selected specification. The component list is refreshed to show the new components. At
this point the form only contains a suggestion of what the new components will be and has not made any
changes to the model. Once the search process has been completed the list of components will be
highlighted to indicate the success or failure of the process.
 For the highlight colour to be displayed the existing selection must be deactivated by clicking in the list.
A selection summary panel is displayed at the bottom of the form to show

the results of the specification selection process.
When a selection has been made the modification can be performed by

clicking the Apply button. Alternatively the Undo button can be used to
remove the selections that have been made so far.
8.1.4 Error Messages
During the modification of the specification of the components if the

selection process encounters a problem; for example if no selection is
available for an element, an error message is displayed.
The list of components is highlighted to indicate the errors and ‘No selection available’ is displayed in the
New Spec Component column. These error messages can be checked in more detail via the Error
Messages tab.

With the Error Messages tab selected, the form lists

the components selected for modification which
produce an error in the selection process. When the
selection process takes place, each selected item is
scanned to find an equivalent in the new
specification. Where an item cannot be found, an
error is indicated with a description in the error list,
as shown in the example.
8.1.5 Highlighting
The purpose of the Highlighting tab is to provide visual feedback regarding the success or failure of the
impending changes. It can be seen that components in the form are highlighted green when a new
component has been successfully selected. Components are highlighted in orange if there is a failure
selecting a new specification.
These colours are the system default colours. These defaults can
be changed by from the Highlighting tab. The form changes to
display the default highlighting colours.
These colours can be changed to the user’s preferences.

Alternatively, clicking the Off radio button will remove the
highlighting for the selection.
In the example below, the successful selection colour has been changed to cyan.
The Reset to Default button can be clicked to undo the changes to

the highlighting display settings, returning them to the original
default settings

8.1.6 Choosing a Component
For items where no selection is available, the Select

Component option from the right click menu can be
used to manually choose a component from any of the
specifications.
This displays the Choose Option form as shown:
The Specs tab is selected first to set the new specification, in this
case A3B.
The Components tab is then selected so that an equivalent item

can be chosen from the form, in this case STYP GLOBE. Clicking
OK adds the selected equivalent component to the components list
tab on the Modify Components form. Once the selection is
complete click the Apply button on the Modify Components form
to perform the modification.

8.1.7 Modifying Component Bore
The nominal bore of the components can be changed

by selecting the Modify Bore option from the right
click menu.
The Select Bore form is displayed with an options list of available bore
sizes. The required bore is selected from the list and clicking OK
populates the component list with the new bore size. Once the selection
is complete click the Apply button on the Modify Components form to
perform the modification.
8.1.8 Modifying Insulation and Tracing Specifications
To show the Insulation and Tracing Specs the Insulation Spec and Tracing
Spec check boxes need to be selected. In this case there is no Tracing on the
visible components so '-' is shown in the list.
To change the insulation or tracing specification, the appropriate

option is chosen from the right click menu.
A list of available specs is available for selection via the options list.
Clicking Apply adds the selected spec to the component list.
Once the selection is complete click the Apply button on the Modify
Components form to perform the modification.

8.2 Modifying a Specification – (Worked Example)
The current specification for pipe /100-B-8 is A3B this will be changed to A1A in this worked example.
Add pipe /100-B-8 to the 3D View and navigate

to the pipe level in the Model Explorer.
Select Modify > Spec/Bore > Pipe.
On the Modify Components form select the

Select All option from the right click menu.
The components will be highlighted and labeled

in the 3D View.
Select the Modify Specification option from

the right click menu.

On the Select Piping Spec form select A1A and Pipes and
Branches from the Specification and Pipe Branch Reset options
list respectively. Click the Apply button.
The component list is updated, click in the form to view the highlighting.
The gaskets and flanges at the head and tail need to be

changed to suit the #300 connections on the equipment.
Select Gasket 1 from the components list and select Select

Component from the right click menu.
It may be necessary to select the A1A specification from the

Specs tab.
From the CHOOSE OPTION form select the gasket with the
STYP of GA which is the #300 version and click the Apply
button.

Select Flange 1 from the components list and select

Select Component from the right click menu.
From the CHOOSE OPTION form select the flange with

the STYP of FSO which is the #300 version and click the
Apply button.
Repeat these steps for Gasket 6 and Flange 6 at the tail

of the branch.
The default selection for Flange 3 is #300 this needs to be

changed to STYP of F which is the #150 version.
The summary shows that all of the components have been

specified correctly. Click the Apply button to complete the
modification.
Because the original list of components has been

deselected in order to view the highlighting a Question
form is displayed. Click the Yes button to continue with the
modification.

Exercise 6 - Modify Specification – Pipe /150-A-57
Change the specification of pipe /200-B-4 from A3B to A1A using the
Modify Components form.
Use the Select Component option to ensure that the flange and gasket
at the head and tail are the #300 version to suit the equipment
connections.


CHAPTER 9
9 Piping Assemblies
Building pipes in AVEVA E3D is often a case of building single

components into a complex arrangement of branches and
components. In the Plant industry there are sometimes fixed
configurations of components which can be reused many times in
a model and these form the basis of assemblies.
An assembly in AVEVA E3D is a series of components and

branches in a predefined configuration which may be copied into
the model many times. Alternatively, an assembly definition may
be created to access existing macros or forms.
9.1 Using Assemblies
Assemblies are accessed from the Piping Component

Editor form in the same way as any other component type.
Click the Assembly button from the Additional Components

tab to display a list of assembly types and subtypes.
The form opens showing a 3D View of the currently selected

assembly belonging to the current Sub-Type. A Sub-Type
may contain numerous assemblies.
Alternative Sub-Types can be selected which allows access to

the members held within. In this case the Samples assembly
area Sub-Type has been selected followed by the Flanged
tee assembly. The 3D View is updated to show the selected
assembly.

When the selection of assembly has been made, it can be inserted into a straight tube or connected to a
component by clicking the Insert button or Connect buttons respectively.
If the assembly contains directional or multi bore components, additional details will be requested via the
CHOOSE and Input forms during the building process.
 The behaviour of these forms is determined during the creation of the assembly. This is covered in
detail in the TM-1868 AVEVA Everything3D Piping Design Administration guide.
Click the Insert button and indicate the implied tube:
Select the offline bore size and direction fro the tee.
Select the weld neck flange which has a connection that is compatible with the tee.

In this case a new branch has been created but the

branch head is left for completion later. It is also
possible for the assembly to be completed with the
tail at the leave of the flange. This happens
automatically if the offline branch of the assembly
has a connection type of OPEN, CLOS, VENT or
DRAN.
A similar result would be achieved using the

Connect button on the Piping Component Editor
form, but in this case, the tee would be connected to
the previous or next component.
By default, assembly origins are at the arrive point of the first component in the first branch of the assembly.
Certain assemblies need to be positioned using a different position, i.e. a simple assembly consisting of a
flange, gasket and flange may need to be positioned by the face of the first flange. The assembly origin point
is configurable using the Pipe Assembly Manager form. If an origin has been defined, it will automatically
be used to position the assembly. If an assembly is connected to a component then the position is derived
by connecting the first component to the existing one.
As seen in the previous example, there are instances where some user interaction is required during the
creation of the assembly. The most common instances of this are:-
 Leave Bore of a Reducer – The arrive bore can be determined by the bore size at the insertion
point. However there are often numerous possibilities for the leave bore which requires some user
interaction.
 Offline Bore of a Tee – This is similar to the above, the arrive bore can be determined by the existing
components but there are numerous possibilities for the offline bore of the tee.
 Orientation of Directional Components – These are components such as elbows, tees and eccentric
reducers which all require some form of directional input in order to orientate the component
correctly.
 Determining the Component Stype – When the system cannot automatically determine the selection
of the component the selection must be made from the components in the current specification via
the CHOOSE form.
The above issues can often be overcome with the use of rules during the creation of the assembly, but a
simple assembly with no rules would require some form of user interaction.


CHAPTER 10
10 Splitting and Merging
It is often necessary to split pipes into more than one branch or pipe. This may be to make the isometric
drawing clearer or as a process requirement. Pipes can be split on an existing component, a plane or into
segments of a specified length. Pipe assemblies are inserted at the split points when using the plane or
segments length options.
Conversely the merging functionality can be used to merge pipes or branches into a single element. There
are obviously some restrictions in relation to the original structure of the pipes and branches that need to be
taken in to consideration.
10.1 Pipe Splitting
A pipe may be split into segments within the same branch, new branch or new pipe. Multiple pipes may be
split on a single plane.
In the Tools tab, click the Pipe Splitting button to display

the Split Pipe form.
The Split Pipe form has two tabs:-
 Split/Merge – this is the main tab used to set up the

Split and Merge functions.
 Assembly – this is used to select the assembly that will

be inserted when splitting.

10.1.1 Splitting Options
The upper section of the form determines how the split function will be performed. The appearance of the
form differs depending on the selection.
There are three radio button options for splitting:-
 Split Pipes on a Plane - Splits the pipe by inserting an

assembly component at the intersection with a plane.
 Split Pipes into Segments - Splits the pipe into

segments of a specific length. The splitting is defined
between two points that are indicated in the 3D View.
 Split Pipes by Moving Component - Splits the pipe at

the selected component. The selected component and
all those downstream will then be added to a new pipe
or branch.
The radio buttons below the Move down-stream components to section determine the resulting
configuration of the pipes and branches:-
 Existing – Components are inserted at the split position in the currently selected branch.
 New Pipe - Components downstream of the split are inserted into a new pipe in the hierarchy.
 New Bran - Components downstream of the split are inserted into a new branch owned by the
current pipe.
10.1.2 Split Pipes on a Plane
10.1.2.1 Branches to Split
When using the Split Pipes on a Plane option the system

allows the collection a group of pipes using the Model
Explorer or 3D View using a variety of methods. These are
added to the Branches to Split list.
 Add CE – adds the branches related to the Current Element to the list.
 Add Selected - a number of pipes can be selected in the 3D View by dragging a crossing window
across the required pipes with the cursor. The selected pipes are then added to the
list by clicking the Add Selected button.
 ID Selection - this method is similar to the above. This list can be dynamically updated by picking
any pipe component. To add to the list, click the ID Selection button the branches
can then be indicated in the 3D View. When the selection is complete, the Escape
key is pressed to end selection.
 Clear All - click this button to clear the Branches to Split list.
 This section of the form does not need to be populated if it is the intention to use the ID Split function
later in the procedure.

In this example, the ID Selected button is clicked and the pipe is indicated in the 3D View. Once the
selection is made the Escape button is used to end the selection process.
Individual pipes can be removed by from the Branches to Split list

using the Remove from list option from the right click menu.
10.1.2.2 Plane Definition

The main aim of this section of the form is to determine the
position and direction of the plane. This can be achieved by
entering the relevant position directly in to the text fields
shown.
Alternatively, click the Define Plane link label to allow the

selection of a position in the 3D View in conjunction with the
Positioning Control toolbar. In this case Graphics and
Cursor have been used.
The prompt ‘Pick A Position (Cursor) Snap:’

is displayed. In this case the edge of SCTN4
belonging to FRMW ROW_2 owned by STRU
PIPERACK has been indicated.

The plane can be seen in the 3D View and the positions are transposed on to the form as shown.
By default the plane is shown solid and with the dimensions of 1000mmx1000mm. The appearance and
visibility of the plane can be changed by entering an alternative size and manipulating the Fill and on/off
checkboxes.
The position of the plane can be altered by entering alternative values to those shown or by using the Nudge
arrow buttons on the form to move pane relative to Plane Direction.
In this case the Plane size has been changed to 500mm, the Fill checkbox has been unchecked and plane
has been nudged 300mm in the West direction so that the flanges are clear of the beam.

10.1.3 Split Pipes into Segments
The Split Pipes into Segments option allows a single branch to be split into segments of a given length
between selected components or selected features that are adjacent to the pipe. This function does not
require the creation of a plane and is not capable of handling multiple branches.
The Split Pipe Length section of the form

determines how lengths are to be used by the
function. Select from the Segment Length or Cut-
pipe Length options and key in the required value.
The Minimum Final Tube Length restricts the

length of the final tube. If the final tube length is
below this value, the previous spools are adjusted
to make the final length within this value.
 The use of this form is demonstrated in

worked example later in this chapter.

10.1.4 Split by Moving Component
The Split Pipe by Moving Component option allows a single branch to be split at an indicated component.
This function does not require the creation of a plane and is not capable of handling multiple branches. The
indicated component will be moved to a New Pipe or New Branch, consequently the Existing radio button
is not available.
Clicking the Split button will display a prompt, ‘Pick

a Piping component:’
Indicating a component in the 3D View will result in

the component and the downstream elements being
moved to a new pipe or branch.
In this example case it is the valve at the tail of PIPE /100-B-8 that has been indicated. With the New Pipe
radio button selected the results can be seen by referring to the Model Explorer as shown:-
 The new pipe or branch will need to be renamed.

10.1.5 Assembly Tab
The Assembly tab is only relevant when the

function requires the addition of new components,
i.e. the Split Pipes on a Plane and Split Pipes into
Segments options.
The resulting tab is very similar to the Assemblies

that are added via the Piping Component Editor
form. It allows the selection of the assembly that will
be inserted at the various split points.
Alternative assemblies can be selected by clicking

on the Filter Assemblies By options list.
The Assembly build origin options list determines

whether to build the assembly using the primary or
secondary origin, as defined during the assembly
creation.
The primary and secondary origin points allow some control over where the assembly is positioned relative
to the splitting point. One of the most common types of assembly is likely to be a set of break flanges where
the relevant points for positioning the assembly are on either flange face. In this case the primary origin point
would be defined as the leave point (upstream flange face) and the secondary origin would be defined as
being the arrive point (downstream flange face). A representation of the splitting procedure is as shown:
 Further information on assembly creation is provided in the TM-1868 - AVEVA Everything3D Piping
Design Administration guide.

10.1.6 Performing the Split
The Perform Commands section of the Split/Merge tab contains the following context sensitive buttons:-
 Split - this is available for all three splitting options and used to invoke the splitting function
once all the settings have been made.
 ID Split - this is only available when using the Split Pipes on a Plane function and allows the
branches to be split to be indicated without populating the Branches to Split list.
 Flow - this adds a flow direction arrow to the 3D View to indicate which side of the split
represents the downstream components.
 Undo - used to undo the previous actions.
 Dismiss - closes the form.
10.1.7 Splitting Pipes on a Plane – (Worked Example)
Add the PIPE /100-C-17 and STRU

/EQUIP_SUPPORT to the 3D View.
Click the Tools > Pipe Splitting button to display the Split
Pipe form.
From the Assembly tab, select Samples assembly area and

FLAN GASK FLAN.
Ensure the Assembly build origin is set to Build to Primary

Origin.

Navigate to an element owned by the branch in the Model Explorer or

3D View.
From the Split/Merge tab ensure the Split Pipes on a Plane

radio button is selected.
From the Move down-stream components to section click

ensure the New Pipe radio button is selected.
Click the Add CE button from the Detail Options section of

the form.
The branch will be added to the Branches to Split list.
From the Plane Definitions section click the Define Plane

link label. Select Element and Snap from the Positioning
Control toolbar.
Indicate the panel at the top of the support.

The plane is added to the 3D View and the
positions are updated on the Split Pipe form.

In this case the pipes will be split by a flange and gasket arrangement 250mm above the panel.
Enter a value of 250mm in the Nudge textbox and click the

right arrow button.
The plane will now be positioned above the panel as shown.

From the Move downstream components to section click
the Split button.
The intended split positions are

indicated in the 3D View and a
Confirm form is displayed.
Click the Yes button.
In this case the gasket type cannot be determined and

requires a selection from the CHOOSE form. Click the OK
button on the Message form.
Select the gasket with the G stype and click the OK button

The pipe will be split at the designated position by the selected assembly. This is also reflected by the
creation of a new pipe in the Model Explorer.
10.1.8 Splitting into Segments – (Worked Example)
Add PIPE /100-C-13 to the 3D View.
Open the Split Pipe form and from the

Assembly tab select Samples assembly
area and FLAN GASK FLAN.
Ensure the Assembly build origin is set to

Build to Primary Origin.
From the Split/Merge tab, ensure the Split

Pipes into Segments radio button and the
Split By option of Component Picks is
selected.
Select the Existing radio button in the Move

downstream components to section of the
form.
With the Split Pipe Length option set to

Segment Length, the value to 2000mm and
Minimum Final Tube Length to 250mm click
the Split button.
 The Split Pipe Length is defined as the

spool length (Segment Length) or tube
length (Cut-pipe Length) so in this
case, it is the face to face length
between flanges. The tube length
around bends and elbows is calculated
as the centre line length.

The prompt, ‘Identify start of range selection to

Select: is displayed.
Indicate FLAN 1 of the branch as shown.
The prompt, ‘Identify end of range selection to

Select: is displayed.
Indicate ELBOW 5 of the branch as shown.
Once again the gasket type cannot be determined

and requires a selection from the CHOOSE form.
Click the OK button on the Message form.
Select the gasket with the G

stype and click the OK
button.
 This will need to be

repeated for every
instance of the gasket.

10.2 Merge Pipe / Branch
The Merge branch / pipe function provides the

following functionality:-
 Merge two adjacent branches
 Merge two adjacent pipes.
10.2.1 Merge Pipe – (Worked Example)
Add pipes /100-C-17 and /100-C-

17-Split(1) to the 3D View. These
are the pipes that were the
subject of the Splitting Pipes on a
Plane worked example.
Open the Split Pipe form.
Click the Merge branch / pipe radio button.
From the Merge Unit section click the One Pipe radio
button.
From the Perform Commands section of the Split Pipe

form click the Merge button.

The prompt, ‘Pick a Piping component – source element:

is displayed. This is the pipe that will be merged. Select PIPE
/100-C-17-Split(1) from the 3D View.
The prompt, ‘Pick a Piping component – target element: is

displayed. This is the pipe that will own the merged pipe.
Select PIPE /100-C-17 from the 3D View.
A Confirm form is displayed box asking ‘Do you wish to

delete the Source Pipe?’ This is because the source pipe is
now empty. Click the Yes button.
The two pipes are now merged in to a single pipe /100-C-17

(the target pipe).

CHAPTER 11
11 Pipe Penetration and Hole Management
On a typical AVEVA E3D project it is necessary for designers to create holes in panel elements, i.e. deck
plates, grating, walls, floors, etc. Due to the implications on design integrity and cost, the hole creation
process needs to be controlled and managed.
The Piping Designer would not be able to create holes in floor plates or wall panels as these items would
have been created by another design discipline for example the Structural Department. These design items
would be held in another database for which the Piping Designer would only have read access.
A method of requesting, approving or rejecting a hole between disciplines is required; in AVEVA E3D this is
known as Hole Management.
The Piping Designer locates and sizes the hole and then makes a request for the hole to be created, usually
by the Structural designer.
 For the purposes of the training we will assume that we are both the Piping Designer and the Structural
Approver so that the full workflow can be discussed.
11.1 Introduction to Hole Management
AVEVA E3D controls and manages holes using the Hole Management application which facilitates:
 Communication of hole data between disciplines including the Request and Approval processes.
 Ensuring holes are only created by users with appropriate write access permissions.
 Performing validation checks on managed holes and providing feedback to users on the hole
status.
 Generation of reports for managed holes.
Generally in AVEVA E3D projects discipline Designers do not have write access to items created by other
disciplines. For example, a Piping Designer does not have write access to Structural elements and
Structural Designers do not have write access to Piping elements.
With Hole Management, penetration holes are specified and requested by the penetrating discipline,
normally piping, HVAC, cable or equipment designers. They are approved by the penetrated discipline,
normally structural designers. For cases where a penetration is required for a steel section through a
deck/floor plate, the hole would be specified, requested and approved by the structural discipline.
The specification of a penetration hole by the relevant discipline in the appropriate Model application creates
a ‘virtual’ hole in the panel element, consisting of a FRMW and two FIXING elements. Each fixing element
has a Specification Reference (Spref) attribute that points to the hole definition in the catalogue. An
Association (ASSOC) element that references all of the hole elements is also created.
Once the ‘virtual’ hole has been created, the penetrating discipline enters the Hole Management application
and requests the hole. The owner of the panel, normally the Structural discipline, then reviews and approves
(or rejects) the hole request using the mechanism provided by the Hole Management application.
The act of approving the request creates the ‘actual’ hole as a PFIT owned by the PANE element. The Hole
Management application checks and validates the hole using the association restrictions and stores data on
the hole history and status. Only valid holes may be approved. For a structural penetration the Structural
Designer may be both the requester and approver, although specific company procedures, controlled by
DAC, may be required if the Originator and Reviewer need to be different.

11.1.1 Request and Approval Workflow
Once the penetration hole has been specified and the ‘virtual’ hole created, the Hole Management
application provides a series of tasks for the Originator (Penetrating discipline) and Reviewer (Structural
discipline). These tasks are:
Originator Tasks Reviewer Tasks
Request Approve
Redundant Reject
Cancel Request Agree Redundant
Delete Entry
 There are three main workflow scenarios for the request/approval cycle that are detailed in Appendix D.
 Additional information relating to the administration of Hole Management can be found in TM-1868
AVEVA Everything3D Project Design Administration.
11.2 Introduction to Non-Penetration Managed Holes
In addition to penetration holes, the Hole Management application enables creation of non-penetration holes
in structural panels. These holes fall into two general categories:
 Holes that are required, say, for access to a piece of equipment, a valve or other design item.
 Holes that are created by a panel fitting, e.g. a hatch, door, window, etc.
For non-penetration managed holes that are not created by a fitting, with the exception of a User Defined
hole type, the ‘virtual’ hole is created as a single FIXING in a new FRMW, as described for penetration
holes. This fixing has a Specification Reference (Spref) attribute that points to the hole definition in the
catalogue. An Association (ASSOC) element that references all of the hole elements is also created.
Approving the hole creates a PFIT owned by the PANE.
User Defined hole shapes are created using a template and negative extrusion in a similar way as described
below for Fitting holes.
For non-penetration holes that are created by a panel fitting, the ‘virtual’ hole is created as a single FIXING
in a new FRMW. The fixing owns a Template (TMPL) element that owns a negative extrusion (NXTR) whose
vertices describe the required hole shape. The fitting is created as a FIXING element owned by the PANE
whose Spref attribute points into the catalogue to the selected fitting. An Association (ASSOC) element that
references all of the hole elements is also created. Approving the hole creates an NXTR owned by the
PANE that is a copy of the ‘virtual’ hole NXTR.
Non-penetration managed holes, of either type, may be associated with any other element in Model. The
holes have the same request/approval process as penetration holes; however, as they are created solely by
the structural discipline the Structural Designer may be both the requester and approver.
11.3 Use of the Hole Management Application
The Hole Management application, as with other applications that use associations, is passive, i.e. the user
is not alerted if a hole association is broken or invalidated. The user must enter the Hole Management
application and actively verify if the association is still valid.
The use of the application will vary from company to company. In some it may be down to the individual
Designers to request and approve holes, whilst in others it may be the discipline lead Designer, or a
designated user, who performs the tasks.

11.4 Creating Single Penetrations
There are three ways that a pipe penetration can be selected:-
 Pipe Attachment (ATTA) selected from the current piping specification, this method will allow the use of
a different attachment representation on the isometric.
 Pipe Coupling (COUP) selected from the current piping specification, this method is very useful if
penetration material is needed on the piping isometric. Typical uses of this are penetration sleeves or
water tight bulkhead/deck flanges.
 Pipe Attachment (ATTA) selected from a special penetration specification, this is very useful as the
current piping specification does not need a special penetration attachment.
In the Penetrate group, select the Create Penetration option from the Pipe button options list.
This opens the Create Penetration form as shown which

allows access to the Pick Penetrated Items and Pick
Penetrating Items buttons.
Clicking the Pick Penetrated Items button will allow the

selection of the element which requires the hole to be
added to it. In this case the panel belonging to FRMW
/EL(+) 107820_TOS owned by STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT.
Clicking the Pick Penetrating Items button will allow the

selection of the element which will be used as a reference
to create the hole. In this case BRAN /80-B-7/B1.
The options at the bottom of the form then influence the

type of penetration created as shown in the following
sections.

11.4.1 ATTA From Pipe Spec
With the upper section of the form populated the Specification

options list can be used to select the From Pipe Spec option.
This will add the Marker Type options list to the form, select
ATTA. Click the OK button to confirm the settings.
A specification CHOOSE ATTA form will be displayed if there is

more than one ATTA available in the current pipe specification.
In this case select FLOR TRUE Penetration ATTA Unset from

the list and click the OK button.
If only one ATTA is present in the specification, this will be used

as the default.
The Hole Management – Definition form is displayed.
The Single or Merged Penetration area at the top of the form

enables individual single holes or a merged hole to be specified
as a multiple penetrating item by selecting the appropriate radio
button. In this case there is only one penetrating item in this
example consequently the options are disabled. This will be
detailed later with the use of the Managed Hole Utility form.
The sections of the form that are available for use are:-
 Hole Type
 Penetrating Item Clearance
 Hole Shape Parameters
 Positioning
 Information
The Hole Type section of the form contains a Class options list
that enables the selection of the class of hole, i.e. Standard
Types, Piping penetration piece tables and Pipe Duct.

The content of the Type options list changes

depending on the Class selected. The examples
shown are the types that are available when the
Class is set to the Standard Types option.
The Penetrating item clearance section of the

form contains the Clearance textbox that enables
a clearance around the penetrating item to be
specified.
The Hole shape parameters section of the form

displays different parameter textboxes for the
different hole types. In this case for a Circular
Hole – Type D the only parameter is Diameter.
The Diameter value is defaulted to the Outside

Diameter of the selected pipe, i.e. 89mm (88.9
OD).
In the case the Diameter value has increased

from 89 to 139 i.e. the pipe OD + 2 x Clearance.
The ‘virtual’ hole clearance fixing is displayed at

the specified clearance diameter in the 3D View.
The Diameter textbox can be altered directly by

keying in a value, in this case 200mm. This
increases the diameter of the ‘virtual’ hole such
that it is greater than the specified clearance.
The ‘virtual’ hole fixing is displayed at the

specified diameter (this is the outer of the two
fixing extrusions shown).
The Set to Minimum button resets the hole shape parameters to the minimum value(s) required to create a
valid hole, taking into account the Clearance value. In this case clicking the button would set the Diameter
back to 139mm.
 The number and description of parameters in the Hole shape parameters area of the form varies
depending on the Hole type selected.
The Positioning area of the form enables an offset in the X and Y directions for the penetration hole to be
specified by entering appropriate values in the X Offset and Y Offset textboxes. This enables the
penetrating item to be eccentric to the penetration hole, which may be required in some circumstances.
The Rotation gadget enables the hole shape be rotated to align the hole in a different direction. This is only
relevant on non-circular shapes. The rotation value may be set by using the up or down arrow or by entering
a value in the textbox.
The Information section allows a purpose to be set for the hole.

Clicking the OK button on the Hole Management – Definition form creates the FRMW and two ‘virtual’ hole
FIXING elements, one for the clearance diameter and one for the penetration hole, in the STRU whose
Purpose attribute is set to HOLE. In this case it is STRU VH-Stru in the SITE HM-Virtual-Holes.
The top level fixing is auto-numbered using the format HM-VH-nnnn, where nnnn is a four digit sequential
number starting at 0001. The secondary level fixing is auto-numbered using the format HM-VH-nnnn-SUB-
nn, where HM-VH-nnnn is the name of the top level fixing and nn is a two digit sequential number starting
at 01.
The association is created in the ASSOGP whose Purpose attribute is set to HOLE and is automatically
named using the format HM-ASSOC-nnnn, where nnnn is a four digit sequential number starting at 0001.
A penetration ATTA will be created in the pipe branch. This is shown as a grating on the piping isometric.
A fixing has been created in the database ready for creating the
hole using the Hole Association Manager form later in the
process.

11.4.2 Coupling from Pipe Spec
The same process is repeated as above, this

time with the Marker Type of COUP as shown.
The /SP/DR07C has examples of typical
penetration sleeves and is used here to
illustrate this alternative method.
The CHOOSE COUP form is displayed,

showing the available couplings from the
specification. Select the component with the
Stype of MACB2OR and then click the OK
button.
 This component can cater for angled

connections and allow the fitting to be
flipped to either side of the penetrated
item.
The penetration flange has been placed on the underside of the panel. From the Positioning section of the
Hole Management - Definition form click the Flip Side button to reposition the penetration flange as
shown.
The diameter of the coupling is fixed by the catalogue and does not
affect the diameter of the hole to be cut in the steel. In this case the
flange diameter is 200mm so a suitable value of 220mm may be
entered in the Diameter text box.
The penetration flange is shown on the resulting

isometric sketch, indicating the side of the panel
that the component is to be placed.

An alternative to this would be use of one of the penetration sleeve options. Once again the Diameter would
need to be altered to suit the outside diameter of the sleeve used.
11.4.3 Pipe Penetration Examples (Standard Types)
Circular Hole - Type D Symmetrical (Oval) Hole - Asymmetrical Hole – Type Rectangular Hole –
Type HO HOR Type HR
Triangular Hole – Type HT Rectangular Hole (w/ears) Circular Hole – Type D Circular Hole – Type
– Type HRM with Kicker Plate D with Sleeve
Rectangular Hole – Type Rectangular Hole – Type

HR with Kicker Plate HR with Sleeve

11.5 The Hole Management Utility
In the Penetrate group, select the Penetration Utility option from the Pipe
button options list.
The Managed Hole Utility form is divided into four

sections:-
 Create Holes,
 Merge Holes,
 Modify Holes,
 Utilities.
 It will be noticed that there is some overlap between the

previously discussed Create Penetration form and the
Managed Hole Utility form.
11.5.1 Create Holes Section
The Create Holes section of the Managed Hole Utility form allows the creation of holes one by one using
the Create Hole function; or to create all the holes for a SITE, ZONE, or PANE using the Auto Penetrate
CE button. Before either of these options is selected it may be necessary to set the clearance.
Clearance – This is the clearance that will be applied

around the tube element of the branch.
Auto penetrate CE – This can be used from any hierarchy

position and the application will find all clashes of
HVAC/Pipe with PANE elements to indicate where new
penetrations are required.
Create Hole – This allows the selections of the penetrated

item followed by the penetrating item to create the hole. This
provides greater control to the user.

11.5.1.1 Clearance
The Clearance textbox allows a value to be entered for the clearance. This value is added to the outside
diameter of tube.
Clearance with Tube Only:
Clearance set to 0mm, the outside diameter of the tube is used for the hole in the
steel.
Clearance with Reducer:
Clearance set to 0mm, the largest diameter of reducer is used for the hole in the
steel.
Clearance with Flange:
Clearance set to 0mm, the outside diameter of the tube is ignored and the flange
diameter with an allowance is used instead.
 This requires the use of the AHDI reference in the Data Set of the
component in Paragon. This is not set for all flanges delivered by AVEVA.
The example shown uses a weld neck flange from the SP/DR07C spec,
(Catref /DBFWBP0LL).

11.5.1.2 Auto Penetrate CE
Navigating to any hierarchy position using the Model

Explorer in this case /PANE 1 owned by SBFR /EL(+)
107820_TOS_PLATE has been used.
Clicking the Auto Penetrate CE button the application will find

all clashes of Pipe with Panel (PANE) elements to determine
where new penetrations are required. In this case a
Clearance value of 20mm has been entered.
Once the analysis is complete, the pipes and associated

virtual holes are added to the 3D View and the Hole
Association Manager form is displayed.
 In some cases, i.e. if a STRU is selected, the analysis

can take longer. A progress bar is used to track the
completion rate.
The Hole Association Manager form is also displayed with the details of the newly created virtual holes.
 The Hole Association

Manager form will not be
displayed if no virtual holes
are created.
 If more than 30 virtual holes

have been created a
confirmation message to
display the Hole Association
Manager form will be
displayed.
 The use of this form will be

covered in section 11.7.5 Hole
Management.

11.5.1.3 Create Hole

The Create Hole function allows the creation of holes one at a time using a similar method to that shown for
the Create Penetration form shown previously.
Clicking the Create Hole button will allow the

selection of the elements.
The prompt, ‘Pick Panel to Penetrate:’ is

displayed.
Upon indication of the panel a second

prompt, ‘Pick Penetrating Item:’ is
displayed.
The virtual hole is added to the 3D View.

11.5.2 Merge Holes
The Merge Holes section of the Managed Hole Utility form allows two or more exiting hole to be merged
into one virtual hole.
Pick Holes – This allows the selection of the penetrations

which are to be merged.
Merge Holes – This merges the previously picked

penetrations into one virtual hole. By default this button is
unavailable until the Pick Holes button has been used.
From the Managed Hole Utility form click the Pick Holes button. The prompt, ‘Pick Penetration to Merge:’
is displayed.
The penetrations which are to be merged into one virtual hole

are selected in the 3D View.
 A minimum of two penetrations must be picked to allow

the holes to be merged.
Once the penetrations have been selected, click the Merge Holes button to complete the creation. The
merged penetrations will be added to the 3D View.

11.5.3 Modify Holes
The Modify Holes section of the Managed Hole Utility form allows the modification of the hole, the
management of the hole association and the deletion of penetrations.
Modify CE – This displays the Hole Management -

Definition form as shown previously.
Manage Holes – This displays the Hole Association

Manager form allowing the selected holes to be managed.
 This will be detailed later in this chapter, separately from

the other two options, see section 11.7.5.
Delete Hole – This allows the selection of a penetration to be

deleted. This will also remove all of the hole associations.
11.5.3.1 Modify CE
Using the 3D View, the penetration to be modified is selected

and the Modify CE button is clicked to display the Hole
Management – Definition form.
The form can also be opened by

selecting the Modify Hole option from
the Holes button options list in the
Penetrate group.
The form is displayed and the selected penetration in the 3D

View is highlighted and the positioning axis is displayed.
 The Hole Management – Definition form has been

discussed previously, refer to section 11.4.1.

11.5.3.2 Delete Hole

Clicking the Delete Holes button form the Managed Hole Utility form allows the selection of a penetration
to be deleted.
The prompt, ‘Pick penetration to delete:’ is displayed.
Using the 3D View the penetration to be deleted can be indicated. The response to this function is
dependent upon the current status of the penetration:-
 If the hole has no status, i.e. it has not been processed by the Hole Association Manager form it
will be deleted.
 If the hole status is ‘Requested’, a Confirm message

will be displayed.
 If the hole status is ‘Approved’, an Error message will

be displayed indicating that the deletion is not permitted
11.5.4 Utilities
The Utilities section of the Managed Hole Utility form facilitates the following:-
 The addition to the 3D View of structural panels within the volume of the selected Pipe/HVAC
element,
 The addition to the 3D View of the Pipe/HVAC elements within the volume of the selected
structural panel
 The production of a hole report.
Add Structure – This allows the indication of the

penetrating item to add the penetrated structure to the 3D
View.
Add Pipe/HVAC – This allows the indication of the structural

panel to add all Pipes/HVAC penetrating the structure to the
3D View.
Hole Report – This allows the production of a hole report.

The Report Headings for Hole, Penetrated, and Penetrating
can be selected from the Managed Hole Reports form.

11.5.4.1 Add Structure

To see the effect of this function remove all PANE elements from the 3D View.
From the Managed Hole Utility form, click the Add Structure button.
The prompt ‘Pick penetrating item’ is displayed.
In this example PIPE /100-C-16 is indicated in the 3D View. The penetrated PTRU elements are added to
the 3D View.
11.5.4.2 Add Pipe/HVAC

To see the effect of this function remove all pipes from the 3D View.
From the Managed Hole Utility form, click the Add Pipe/HVAC button.
The prompt to ‘Pick Panel’ is displayed.
In this case PANE 1 belonging to SBFR EL(+)107820_TOS_PLATE is indicated in the 3D View. The
penetrating pipes are added to the 3D View.

11.5.4.3 Hole Report
From the Managed Hole Utility form, click the Hole

Report button to display the Managed Hole Reports
form.
The form can also be opened by

selecting the Hole Report option
from the Holes button options list
in the Penetrate group.
The form is divided into two main sections, Hole

Association Filter and Report Headings.
11.5.4.3.1 Hole Association Filter

This section of the form allows the specification of the required filters to determine which holes will be
included in the report. The upper part of this section contains three checkboxes.
Current Element – This displays any holes

associated with the currently selected
element only.
Graphical Selection – This applies filtering

to all managed holes associated with
elements in the current graphical selection.
All Managed Holes – This applies filtering

to all managed holes in the MDB
Discipline – This specifies holes for all disciplines or for a single discipline using the
options list.
Status – This specifies holes at any status or specifies holes at a given status using
the options list.
Valid – This specifies holes in relation to their validity or all holes regardless of validity
using the options list.

The Display section of the form has a single checkbox:-
 Invalid – This includes the hole associations that have any bad references, invalid references or
invalid data.
The Display option is not relevant if the Current Element radio button is being used. The option will be
greyed out.
11.5.4.3.2 Report Headings

The Report Headings section of the Managed Hole Reports form, allows the selection of the headings that
are required on the report from the three categories:-
 Hole information
 Penetrated item information
 Penetrating items information
The specific headings to be included in the

report can be selected by checking the
individual check boxes. In addition to this
there are the Select All Headings and
Clear Headings link labels to aid
population of the form.
Once the required headings have been specified the Run Report button can be used to create the report.
The Managed Hole Reports form appears, containing an Export to Excel and Print Preview link label.

A right click menu is also available which will allow

the following tasks to be performed:-
 Navigate To > Association/Penetrated Item/

Penetrating Item
 Add to 3D view
 Remove from 3D view
 Focus on Hole
 Export list to Excel
 Print list.
11.6 Creating Non-Penetration Managed Holes – Free Holes
Occasionally the pipe designer may require a hole through a structural panel that is not for a pipe
penetration. This is known as a non-penetration managed hole. The requested hole will then be controlled
using the Hole Association Manager form.
Free Holes are standard hole shapes, some of which include sleeves or kicker plates. In addition to these is
a User Defined shape. This option is also available in other Model disciplines, i.e. HVAC, STRUCTURES
etc.
11.6.1 Free Holes
In the Penetrate group, selecting the General Hole

option from the Holes button options list displays the
Create Hole from.
The upper section of the form lists the Penetrated

Object.
Clicking the Pick Penetrated Element link label

result in the prompt ‘Pick a face on the penetrated
object’ being displayed. This allows the selection of
the PANE element in the 3D View.

The Hole Type options list shows the available holes.

The first six entries are the same hole types available
for penetration holes. The remaining hole types are
various shapes with additional components, i.e. kicker
plates or sleeves.
The last entry is User Defined which enables a user

defined shape for the hole to be specified, this is
covered in one of the following sections.
Once the Penetrated Object and the Hole Type has been determined clicking the Apply button will display
the Hole Management – Free Hole Definition form.
The example shows the form with the Rectangular

Hole – Type HR with Kicker Plate selected.
The selected Hole Type is displayed in the 3D View,

on the penetrated item. Default sizes are used with
graphical aids that indicate the Hole X and Hole Y
directions and the default X and Y offsets from the
Panel origin.
The default hole location is the pick position from the penetration item selection. This default position may be
subsequently changed using the X Offset and Y Offset textboxes.
The form has two tabs:
 Hole Definition – to define the shape, size, position and rotation of the hole.
 Associated Elements – to define the element(s) the hole is to be associated with, e.g. items of
equipment, valve handles etc.

11.6.1.1 Hole Definition Tab

From the Hole Definition tab, the following details
and parameters can be changed, to suit the required
hole.
The Hole Type may be changed from that specified

on the Create Hole form by simply selecting a
different type from the list. The graphical
representation of the Hole Type will change to the
new type.
The Hole Shape Parameters section of the form

changes depending on the hole type selected, with
the relevant parameters shown for that hole type.
For example, for a Rectangular Hole – Type HR
with Kicker Plate has parameters for the hole
Width and Height, Radius, and Kicker Plate
Height and Thickness.
The Hole Position and Orientation section of the

form enables the X Offset and Y Offset, i.e. X and Y
distances from the panel origin, to be set. The values
default to the picked position and reflect the
displayed values on the graphical aids.
The X Offset and Y Offset values may be changed

manually by entering the required value in the
appropriate textbox.
Alternatively, clicking the Align in X or Align in Y link labels displays the prompt ‘Align Hole to picked
position’ and activates the Positioning Control toolbar. Any position, using any of the positioning control
options can be indicated to align the hole with in the specified direction. The X Offset or Y Offset values are
changed automatically to reflect the picked position.
Clicking the button displays the prompt ‘Pick a face on the penetrated object’. A new hole position
may be picked on the panel using the cursor. The X Offset and Y Offset values are updated accordingly.
The Rotation textbox enables the rotation around the Z axis of the hole to be specified either by entering a
value in the textbox or using the up or down arrows to change the angle in 5° increments.

11.6.1.2 User Defined Hole Type
Selecting the User Defined option from the Hole

Type options list allows the creation of shapes
other than the standard options available.
This displays the Loop Vertex Editor form.
A default hole, an NXTR with four vertices, with

dimensions of 200mmx200mm is added to the
3D View.
The hole shape may be defined by adding,

deleting or modifying vertices to the NXTR loop in
the same way as editing a panel or normal
negative extrusion.
 For more information on the use of the Loop

Vertex Editor form, refer to training guide
TM-1812 AVEVA Everything3D Structural
Modelling.

11.6.1.3 Associated Elements Tab

On the Associated Elements tab the elements
associated with the hole are shown in the Current
Association Elements list. Initially these include the
panel and hole reference.
Clicking the Pick Association Elements link label

displays the prompt ‘Pick associated item’. Any item(s)
may be picked to associate the hole with. The selection
process is terminated by pressing the Esc key. The
selected item(s) will also appear in the Current
Association Elements list.
Selecting an associated item from the list and selecting

the Remove Association option from the right click
menu removes it from the list and all references to it from
the association.
The Primary Panel and Hole Reference items are required to

create the hole and attempting to remove them displays a
Message form as shown.
In this case a valve has been added to the Current

Association Elements list.
Having specified all of the requirements for the hole, clicking the Apply button on the Hole Management –
Free Hole Definition form will create the ‘virtual’ hole.
The hole must be requested and approved using the Hole Association Manager form, covered in the
following section.

11.7 Hole Management
In order to inform the structural department that a hole is required the hole needs to be requested using the
Hole Association Manager form. This form is opened by clicking the Manage Holes button on Hole
Management Utility form, or in the Penetrate group, selecting the Hole Manager option from the Holes
button options list.
11.7.1 Hole Association Filters
This section allows the filtering of the Managed Holes to be displayed on the Hole Association Manager
form.
Current Element – This displays any holes

associated with the currently selected element
only.
List of Elements – This activates the Elements

to Manage section of the form. This will be
detailed later in this section
All Managed Holes – This applies filtering to all

managed holes in the MDB

Discipline – This specifies holes for all disciplines or for a single discipline using
the options list.
Status – This specifies holes at any status or specifies holes at a single status
using the options list.
Claimed – This specifies holes in relation to their claimed state using the options
list.
Valid – This specifies holes in relation to their validity or all holes regardless of
validity using the options list.
The Display section of the form has a single checkbox:-
 Invalid – This includes the hole associations that have any bad references, invalid references or
invalid data.
The Display option is not relevant if the Current Element radio button is being used. The option will be
greyed out.
The Apply Filter link label refreshes the form according to the element and filtering options selected.
For instance, navigate to a PANEL element in the Model Explorer and select the Current Element radio
button. From the Discipline options list select Piping and click the Apply Filter link label. This will result in
only pipe elements that penetrate the single structural panel being displayed.
Alternatively selecting the List of Elements radio button will activate the Elements to Manage section of
the form. This allows a more specific approach regarding which structural panels to filter on.

Elements can be added to the list by navigating to them in

the Model Explorer and clicking the Add Current Element
link label.
Clicking the Refresh link label will update the contents of

the Hole Associations list.
Elements can be removed by using the right click menu

and selecting Remove element.
Alternatively clicking the Reset link label will populate the list with the CE only.
11.7.2 Show Tags
The Show Tags checkbox is an aid to identify the selected hole association in the 3D View.

11.7.3 Translucent Penetrated
The Translucent Penetrated checkbox is also an aid to make the

penetrated item translucent in the 3D View. Using the default 3D
View settings this will have very little impact because the panels are
already translucent. However the effect can be seen below on a
panel which has had the default translucency changed.
11.7.4 Hole Association Options
The Hole Associations list has several options available from the right
click menu:-
 Navigate To – this option has a sub-menu containing

Association, Penetrated Item and Penetrating Item. This
allows the navigation to these elements in the Model Explorer.
 Validate – this checks the validity of the selected association.
 Add to 3D View – this adds the virtual hole, penetrated item and
penetrating item to the 3D View.
 Remove from 3D View – this removes the virtual hole,

penetrated item and penetrating item from the 3D View.
 Focus on Hole – this centres the 3D View and zooms to the

selected association.
 Modify Definition – this opens the Hole Management –

Definition form to allow the hole to be modified if required.
 Add Penetrated – this adds the penetrated item to the 3D View.
 Export to Excel… - this allows the Hole Associations to be

saved to Excel.
 Print Preview – this opens a Print Preview of the Hole

Associations.

11.7.5 Managing Hole Associations
The following is the procedure for handling Hole Associations.
Before the request and approval procedure can be started the

validity of the association must be checked, i.e. that the pipe
has not been moved etc.
From the Hole Associations list, select the item required and
from the right click menu select Validate.
The result of the validation will be displayed in the Hole

Associations list.
From the Hole Association Manager form click the Manage

Selected Holes link label.
The Hole Management form is now displayed. The top of the form shows the List of Holes detailing similar
information to the previous Hole Associations list..
There are also three fold-

up panels:-
 Selected hole data
 Hole validation
results
 Hole History
There is also a text box

that allows a Hole
Comment to be added with
an accompanying Save
button.
The bottom section of the

form has two headings:-
 Originator Tasks
 Reviewer Tasks
In this case the pipe designer is the creator of the hole and initially only the Originator Tasks of Request
and Delete Entry are available for use. The options that are available are dependent upon the current status
of the hole.

Click the Request link label. A Confirm form appears asking ‘Do you really want to change the status to
REQUESTED?’ click the Yes button.
The history of the hole can now be seen in the Hole History section of the form.
Now that the hole has been requested by the piping

designer the only Originator Tasks that are available
are Cancel Request and Delete Entry.
The Reviewer Tasks would only be available to the

discipline that owns the Panel, who at this stage would
have the Approve or Reject functions available to
them.
Clicking the Return to Hole Associations link label will

show how the Status has been added to the Hole
Associations list as shown.
The request process has claimed the hole association which will prevent any further modification by the
reviewing discipline. To overcome this a Save/Unclaim option is available from the right click menu.
 This is the same functionality as the standard Savework and Unclaim functionality used throughout
AVEVA E3D. It has been added to the right click options to improve the workflow for this procedure.

The approval of the hole by the reviewing discipline will result in the Status and Valid columns being update
in the Hole Associations list and the hole being added to the panel.

Exercise 7 – Hole Creation
Perform the following tasks:-
 Navigate to FRMW /EL(+)107820_TOS owned by STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT belonging to SITE

/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 and add it to the 3D View.
 Use the Add Pipe/HVAC button on the Managed Hole Utility form to add the pipes to the 3D
View.
 Use the Copy Element With Offset function to copy PIPE /80-B-7 250mm in the Y direction.
The 3D View should look as shown.
 Use the Create Penetration form for PIPE /100-C-17 to create a penetration From Pipe Spec
using an ATTA. Use the Circular Hole – Type D type with a clearance of 75mm.
 Use the Create Penetration form for PIPE /100-C-16 to create a penetration from the
Penetrations specification. Use the Circular Hole – Type D with Kicker Plate type with a
clearance of 75mm.
 Use the Managed Hole Utility form to set a clearance value of 50mm and with Panel element
selected use the Auto Penetrate CE button.
 Use the Managed Hole Utility form to merge the holes for PIPE /80-B-7 and the copy. Use the
Modify CE button to create a Rectangular Hole – Type HR with a Width of 450mm, Height of
200mm and Radius of 100mm.
The 3D View should look as shown.
 Use Hole Association Manager form to Validate and Approve the holes.

Exercise 8 – Completing the Pipework
The following exercise will cover below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following:-
Complete the routing of PIPE /100-B-8 by adding the BRAN /100-B-8/B2 as shown. Ensure that slip-on
and weld neck flanges have been used appropriately.

Create Pipe /250-B-5 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process Branch B1 Head Details:-

System B
 Connected to /E1301/N2
Branch B1 Tail Details:-
 Bore = 250mm
 Connection to /C1101/N2
Branch B2 Head Details:-
 Connected to /E1301/N3
 Connected to TEE1 of BRANCH B1
Suggestion:-
ELBO 2 of Branch B1 should be positioned using the Through tab of the Move form.

Create Pipe /80-B-14 using the following information:-

System B
 Connected to /D1201/N2
 Bore = 80mm
 Connect tail to last member
Suggestion:-
As before, the Move form can be used to position the elbows to the explicit positions. The components from
the elbow to the gate valve of Branch1 and the components of Branch 2 are positioned fitting to fitting.
Consequently the tail positions are determined by the components’ overall dimensions.
The globe valve belonging to BRANCH B2 is selected from the HOLD specification.

 During preliminary routing a HOLD or Valve/Instrument specification can be used to select inline
components not available in the current pipe specification. This allows the components which have
preliminary information to be included in the route. The HOLD specification is used during this training
course to demonstrate this functionality, see also PIPE /50-B-9.
The resulting isometric will indicate that the valve is

‘on hold’.
 For additional information on creating isometrics

refer to chapter 16.
The use of the Connect To Last Member button for

the branches will set the connection on the Branch
Tail tab of the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form to be
the same as the last member, i.e. Flange RF ANSI
300lb in this case.
In this, or in any case where the connections need to

be different in order to satisfy the Connection
Compatibility Table in Paragon; using the Connect
To First/Last Member buttons will result in the pipe
failing the Data Consistency check.
This can either be rectified by setting the value

manually or by using the Reconnect button during
the creation of the connecting pipe as shown next.

Create Pipe /80-A-11 using the following information:-

System A
 Connected to tail of BRANCH /80-B-14/B1
 Specification = A1A
 Bore = 80mm
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 309280

route obtained).
Suggestions:-
Use Model Editor to determine the height of
ELBO4 in relation to the STRU /PIPERACK  Connected to tail of BRANCH /80-B-14/B2
belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01.

After the connection of the branch heads to the

tails of PIPE /80-B-14, the connection error
discussed previously can be corrected.
Selecting the Branch Tail tab for BRAN /80-B-

14/B1 will display a connection type error. Click
the Reconnect button to change the
Connection value.
This will need to be repeated for BRAN /80-B-14/B2 unless the error was corrected manually.

Create Pipe /100-C-12 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process System C Head Details:-
 Specification = F1C  Connection Type = Open End
 Bore = 100mm  Direction = W
 Insulation = 50mm_Fibreglass  Position:-
 Tracing = E-TRACING  W 303000
 N 308830
 U 106000 (This is an arbitrary

value which will be updated
according to the route
obtained).
Tail Details:-
 Connected to /E1301/NS1

Suggestions:-
Use Model Editor to determine the correct height at the head of the branch in relation to the STRU
/PIPERACK belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01.
The Control Set 1 assembly can be used for the downstream valve arrangement. The height of the tee can
be set using the Drag Move form, providing the assembly is moved away from ELBO3 first using the Model
Editor.
This will require the addition of two elbows. The head position
can then be determined by locking the West and North
positions and picking the leave of the second elbow as a
reference position. The elbows can then be deleted.

 Primary System = Process System B Branch1 Head Details:-
 Specification = A3B  Connected to /C1101/N1
 Bore = 100mm Branch1 Tail Details:-
Branch2 Head Details:-
 Connected to TEE1 of BRANCH

B1
Branch2 Tail Details:-

Create Pipe /150-A-3 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process System A Branch1 Head Details:-
 Specification = A1A  Connected to tail of BRANCH /100-B-2/B1
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 308080

route obtained).
 Connected to tail of BRANCH /100-B-2/B2

 Primary System = Process System B Branch1 Head Details:-
 Specification = A3B  Connected to /P1502B/N2
 Connected to /C1106/N6
 Connected to /P1502A/N2


 Primary System = Process Branch1 Head Details:-

System B
 Connected to /P1501A/N2
 Bore = 50mm
 Connected to /C1106/N4
 Connected to /P1501B/N2
Suggestions:-
All flanged valves need to be selected from the HOLD

specification.
The North positions are determined by the connections to

the equipment.
The control set in this pipe does not use the assembly. The
components will need to be created using a combination of
the A3B and HOLD specifications.


Complete the route of Pipe /40-B-10 that was created earlier in this training guide.
Suggestions:-
Change the existing bends to screwed NPT elbows.
Connect the head and re-align the components to

suit the new position.

CHAPTER 12
12 Data Consistency
12.1 Data Consistency
12.1.1 Possible Types of Data Error
The data consistency checking utility, available within the Piping application, checks the design for
occurrences of the following types of error.
Angular Alignment - Checks that components which are to be connected together are aligned in the same
direction:
Angular Alignment - Checks that components

which are to be connected together are aligned in
the same direction
Axial Alignment - Checks that components which

are to be connected together are aligned on a
common axis:
Consistent Bores - Checks that components which

are to be connected together have consistent bores:
Connection Types - Checks that components which

are to be connected together have compatible
connection types:
Minimum Tube Length - Checks that no length of

tube is less than a prescribed minimum (which may
depend on its bore).

12.1.2 Accessing the Data Consistency Checks
In the Tools group click the Data

Consistency button to show the
Data Consistency Check form as
shown.
This form is used to generate a diagnostic report

on the data consistency of any part of the design.
The report can be listed on the screen (in the area

in the lower half of the form), or sent to a file from
which a hard copy can be printed. Select Screen
or File radio button and, in the latter case, specify
the Directory and Filename. Then choose the
hierarchic level at which to check the design using
the Check options list, the default value is CE.
For parameters and tolerances, the Data Consistency

Check allows a margin of acceptable error before a problem
is reported. These built–in tolerances have default values,
but may be set to alternative values if preferred. Click the
Piping button from the Parameters section of the form will
display the Piping Consistency Check Options form.
12.1.2.1 Design Tolerances

The misalignment between adjacent components can be measured using any of the following three
parameters:-
 The displacement angle between the p-arrive and p-leave axes
 The offset distance between the p-arrive and p-leave axes
 The ratio of the offset to the projected distance between the p-arrive and p-leave p-points
(equivalent to the tangent of the angle parameter).
The maximum permissible

values for any of these
parameters can be specified

12.1.2.2 Minimum Tube Lengths
Clicking the Tube Range button from the Data

Consistency Check Options form will display the
Tube Tolerance Check Options form.
By default a report will warn of all lengths of

tube in the design which are shorter than
100mm. This allows a decision to be made
whether each such length is adequate for
welding procedures, bolt withdrawal, access,
and so on. This minimum length can be
changed from the default of 100mm, and may
set different minima for up to ten different pipe
bore ranges if desired. i.e.:
 A minimum length of 150mm for bores

between 25 and 50.
 A minimum length of 300mm for bores

between 50 and 100.
In this case the Tube value is set to 50mm which will be used for all
sizes.
12.1.3 The Report Format
The report comprises a header, giving the date and time, followed by an itemised list of the elements being
checked, together with numbered diagnostic messages describing any potential problems.
An example showing errors:- If no problems exist the following message is

displayed.

12.1.4 Data Consistency Diagnostic Messages
With experience, the user will be able to identify which messages indicate errors which must be corrected,
and which are merely warnings of potential problems.
 A full list of the data consistency diagnostic messages, each identified by a reference number can be
found in the Model Reference Manual of the AVEVA Everything3D Help.
As an example, a Pipe to Pipe connection, and some of the messages which might result will be considered.
The connection as shown is a valid one. If any of the connection types were changed, the following
messages may be witnessed:
A230 CONNECTION TYPE HCONN NOT SAME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION TYPE
The connection types FBD-FBD in this example must be the same.
B230 CONNECTION TYPE TCONN NOT SAME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION TYPE
The connection types GBD-GBD in this example must be the same.
D430 BAD ARRIVE CONNECTION TYPE
The connection types GBD-FBD in this example must be listed as compatible in the COCO tables.
E730 LEAVE CONNECTION TYPE (of the Flange) NOT COMPATIBLE WITH TCONN
The connection types FBD-GBD in this example must be listed as compatible in the COCO tables.
12.1.5 Example of Diagnostic Messages
The following examples explain the significance of some of the messages that user might be witnessed
during this training course:
12.1.5.1 Branch Head Errors

The following diagnostics apply only to the Head of a Branch:
A 10 HEAD REFERENCE NOT SET
The Head reference should only be unset (i.e. zero) if the Head Connection Type HCONN is set to
OPEN, VENT, CLOS or DRAN.

A 20 HEAD REFERENCE POINTS TO NONEXISTENT ELEMENT
This error would result from the deletion of a component, such as a Nozzle, to which the Head of the
Branch was originally connected.
A 30 BAD HEAD RETURN REFERENCE
The Head is connected to an element that does not refer back to the Branch. This can occur when
the Head of a Branch is connected to another Branch, implying that a Tee should be placed
somewhere along the second Branch. The error can also occur when two or more branches are
inadvertently connected to the same terminal.
A200 DIRECTION HDIR NOT SAME AS TERMINAL DIRECTION
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the direction HDIR should
always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A210 POSITION HPOS NOT SAME AS TERMINAL POSITION
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the position HPOS should
always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A230 CONNECTION TYPE HCONN NOT SAME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION TYPE
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the connection type HCONN
should always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A300 REFERENCE HSTUBE UNSET
There is more than 1mm of tube between the Head and the p–arrive of the first Component (or the
Tail), but HSTUBE is unset.
A310 REFERENCE HSTUBE REFERS TO A NONEXISTENT SPCOM
This may occur if part of the Specification has been deleted.
A320 HSTUBE PROBLEM, CATREF IN SPCOM IS UNSET
This indicates an error in the Specification.
A330 HSTUBE PROBLEM, CATREF IN THE SPCOM REFERS TO NONEXISTENT Catalogue

COMPONENT
This may occur if part of the Catalogue has been deleted or if the CATREF is unset.
A400 HBORE NOT SAME AS BORE OF HSTUBE
The bore of any tube leading from the Head, determined from the Catalogue, should always be
identical to HBORE.
A410 HCON NOT COMPATIBLE WITH CONNECTION TYPE OF HSTUBE
The connection type of any tube leading from the Head, determined from the Catalogue, should be
compatible with HCONN.
A420 ISPEC REFERENCE POINTS TO NONEXISTENT ELEMENT
This error would occur if, i.e., the Insulation Specification pointed to by ISPEC had been deleted.

12.1.5.2 Branch Tail Errors

The same type of errors may occur to the Tail of a Branch. The message numbers are the same as for the
Head errors but are preceded by a B. i.e.:
B 10 TAIL REFERENCE NOT SET
The Tail reference should only be unset (i.e. zero) if the Tail connection type TCONN is set to
OPEN, VENT, CLOS or DRAN.
12.1.5.3 Plain Branch Errors

The following diagnostics can occur only for Branches with no piping components:
C500 TUBE TOO SHORT BETWEEN HEAD AND TAIL
The distance between the Head position, HPOS, and the Tail position, TPOS, is greater than zero
and less than the specified minimum tube length (default: 100mm).
C510 BAD HEAD TO TAIL GEOMETRY
Either the Head position, HPOS, does not lie at a positive distance along the line through TPOS in
the direction TDIR or the Tail position, TPOS, does not lie at a positive distance along the line
through HPOS in the direction HDIR.
The illustration shows some typical examples:
C520 HBORE NOT SAME AS TBORE
When there are no components on the branch, the Head bore, HBORE, should be identical to the
Tail bore, TBORE.
C530 HCONN IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH TCONN
This implies that the Head is connected directly to the Tail with no Tube or piping components in
between; hence the Head connection type, HCONN, must be compatible with the Tail connection
type, TCONN.
C540 THIS BRANCH HAS NO COMPONENTS
This does not necessarily indicate an error. It is output as a warning.
12.1.5.4 Component Specific Diagnostics

The following errors apply to individual piping components and, in some cases, to their adjacent
connections. Some of the errors also apply to Nozzles.
These are applicable to any component, regardless of its position in the network:
D100 REFERENCE SPREF UNSET
This probably means that the user has forgotten to choose the piping component correctly.

D300 CONN REFERENCE NOT SET
Multi–way Components may be left unconnected only if the connection type of the relevant p–point
is OPEN, CLOS, VENT, DRAN or NULL.
D310 CONN REFERENCE POINTS TO NON–EXISTENT BRANCH
This may occur if the Branch which is pointed to by the CONN reference has been deleted.
D320 BAD CONN RETURN REFERENCE
This may occur if the Branch which is pointed to by the CONN reference has been reconnected to
another terminal.
D400 ARRIVE TUBE LESS THAN TUBE MINIMUM. ACTUAL TUBE LENGTH IS ...
The distance between the arrive p–point of this component and the leave p–point of the previous
component (or Head) is greater than zero and less than the specified minimum tube length (default:
100mm).
D410 BAD ARRIVE GEOMETRY
The position and direction of the arrive p–point of this component are not correct with respect to the
leave p–point of the previous component (or Head). The error could be caused by incorrect
positioning of this component, the previous component (or Head) or both.
The illustration shows some typical examples:
D420 BAD ARRIVE BORE
The bore of the arrive p–point of this component is not equal to the bore of the preceding tube or, if
this component is not preceded by tube, to the bore of the leave p–point of the previous component
(or HBORE).
D430 BAD ARRIVE CONNECTION TYPE
The connection type of the arrive p–point of this component is not compatible with the preceding
tube or, if this component is not preceded by tube, to the connection type of the leave p–point of the
previous component (or HCONN).
D500 REFERENCE LSTUBE UNSET
The user has probably forgotten to select the piping Component.
D600 LEAVE BORE NOT SAME AS BORE OF LSTUBE
The bore of the leave p–point of this Component is not the same as the bore of the tube following
the Component.
D610 LEAVE CONNECTION TYPE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH CONNECTION TYPE OF LSTUBE
The connection type of the leave p–point of this Component is not compatible with the tube following
the component.

12.1.5.5 End Component Diagnostics

These are applicable only to the last component in a Branch:
E700 LEAVE TUBE LESS THAN TUBE MINIMUM. ACTUAL TUBE LENGTH IS ...
The distance between the leave p–point of the current component and the tail position, TPOS, is
greater than zero and less than the specified minimum tube length (default: 100mm).
E710 BAD LEAVE GEOMETRY
The position and direction of the leave p–point of this component are not correct with respect to the
position, TPOS, and direction, TDIR, of the tail. The error could be caused by incorrect positioning
of this component, the Tail, or both.
E720 LEAVE BORE NOT SAME AS TBORE
The bore of the leave p–point of this component is not the same as the tail bore, TBORE.
E730 LEAVE CONNECTION TYPE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH TCONN
The connection type of the leave p–point of this component is not compatible with the tail connection
type TCONN.
D740 ANGLE OF COMPONENT IS GREATER THAN MAXIMUM ANGLE
The Piping Specification has a range of angles for bends and elbows, the specified elbow falls out of
the angle range.
12.1.5.6 Pipe Route Diagnostics

D950 ELEMENT IS PART OF A BOTTOM POCKET
Indicates that a Drain may be required at the low point of the Branch.
D940 ELEMENT IS PART OF A TOP POCKET
Indicates that a Vent may be required at the high point of the Branch.
12.1.5.7 Wall Thickness Diagnostics

D900 INCONSISTENCY IN SETTING PIPE WALL THICKNESS
Indicates that the Pipe Wall Thickness across adjacent components is not the same as specified in
the Pipe Specification Wall Thickness Data Table.
12.1.5.8 Sloping Pipe Diagnostics

D920 ARRIVE SLOPE TOO SHALLOW, MINIMUM SLOPE 0.2722, ACTUAL SLOPE 0.
The slope has been set at Pipe Branch level and the pipe is not sloped.
D930 ARRIVE SLOPE TOO STEEP, MAXIMUM SLOPE 0.3008, ACTUAL SLOPE 1.1458
The slope has been set at Pipe Branch level and the pipe is not sloped correctly.

Exercise 9 – Data Consistency
 Use the Data Consistency Check form to check some of the pipes created in Exercise 8.
 Try to correct the errors that are found
 The Trainer will help with the interpretation of the diagnostic messages.


CHAPTER 13
13 Clash Detection
This chapter provides an overview of the clash detection functionality that is available within AVEVA E3D.
The functionality is covered in detail on another training course but the use of the form is such an integral
part of the pipe modeling workflow in AVEVA E3D that it has to be mentioned in this guide as well.
 For a full description of the AVEVA E3D Clash Detection functionality refer to TM-1802 Design Utilities
training guide.
13.1 Accessing the Clashes Form
In the Common group, select the Clashes option from the Clashes button
options list to display the Clashes form.
 When the form is opened it displays the information that was displayed
previously. In this case the form has not been used in the current session of
AVEVA E3D so it is empty.
13.2 Executing a Clash Check
Navigate to PIPE /100-B-8 and from the Clashes form click the Check CE link label.
Alternatively, if the form is not open navigate to the element to be checked and
in the Common group, select the Check CE option from the Clashes button
options list.

The form displays a list of the Clashes on the relevant tab and the graphical representation of the currently
selected clash in a 3D View. Selecting the clashes in the list will update the 3D View accordingly. By default
the colour for the Clash Item is bright red and the Obstruction is tomato. These values can be changed via
the Options tab if necessary.
It can be seen from the clashes that are being reported that this pipe needs to be modified to overcome the
obstructions.
13.2.1 Validation Philosophy
AVEVA E3D piping promotes the philosophy of check and modification before the Production Information is
created and distributed. This can be easily illustrated by a simple flow diagram showing how the process of
Design Check, Clash Check and Modify may be repeated until all aspects have been satisfied.

Exercise 10 – Clash Detection
 Clash check as many of the pipes created in Exercise 8 as possible in the time permitted. It maybe
necessary to add element :WALKWAY /AREA01-WALKWAYS to the Exclusions list on the
Obstructions/Exclusions tab of the Clashes form. This is achieved by selecting the element in
the Model Explorer and clicking the Add button when the options list is set to Current Element.
 Make any modifications that are required to overcome the clashes.


CHAPTER 14
14 Design Checker
14.1 Design Checker
 Design Checker is a separate installation on top of the AVEVA E3D install.
The Design Checker utility allows design consistency checks, written as macros, to be added quickly and
easily to Model. Some simple design checks are supplied by AVEVA as part of the installation. These will be
expanded upon over time.
The Design Checker utility provides:
 A standard customisable user interface for model consistency checks.
 Standard reporting, to screen and file, of the results of a model consistency check.
 The ability to add new checking functions tailored to the working practices employed by the
company or project.
 Navigation to the elements that have failed the checks directly from the form.
Additional checks required by the user can be added to the standard consistency checks provided by
AVEVA. A check is a macro function which tests selected elements in the database, and reports back to the
Checker Results form whether the element has passed or failed the tests.
In the Common group, click the Checker button to access the

Checker form.
14.1.1 Design Checker Load Errors
As mentioned above the Design Checker is a separate install to E3D. The following Warning form is
displayed if the Design Checker is not installed and the Checker form will have no Classes or Groups.

If the Design Checker has been installed the form will appear as
shown.
 All checking operations are controlled from the Checker form.
 When the Checker form is initially displayed, the Check Items list will be empty.
14.1.2 Design Checker Form
The Check Items list of the Checker form allows the specification of which elements are to be checked.
The Checks pane allows the selection of one or more check functions to be applied to those elements.
To add elements to the Check Items list, click Add and select an option from the drop-down menu.
CE Adds the current element selected in the

Model Explorer.
CE Members Adds all members of the current element,

but not the current element itself.
Pick Allows elements to be picked from the 3D

View.
Current Collection Adds all the elements in the

Collection.
Failed List Adds all elements which have failed an

earlier check, as listed on the Checker
Results form.

To remove items from the Check Items list, click Remove and select an option from the drop-down menu.
 Remove only becomes active when the Check Items list is populated.
All Removes everything from the Check

Items list and removes all highlighting.
Selected Removes selected elements from the

Check Items list.
CE Removes the current element highlighted

in the Model Explorer from the Check
Items list.
CE Members Removes all the members of the current

element from the Check Items list, but not
the current element
Pick Removes elements from the Check Items

list by picking them in the 3D View. Any
highlighting on the element is also
removed.
Current Collection Removes all the elements in the

Collection from the Check Items
list.
To make it easier to interpret the check results, the elements can be highlighted in the 3D View.
To highlight items in the 3D View, click Highlight and select an option from the drop-down menu.
 Highlight only becomes active when the Check Items list is populated.
Elements… Highlights all elements that are in the Check

Items list. When the selected, the Elements
Colour form is displayed which allows the
selection of the highlight colour.
 Only elements already in the Drawlist will be highlighted;

elements are not added to the 3D View automatically.
Removing elements from the list will remove the highlighting
from the selected element
Passed Passed is an On/Off toggle. When on, shown by a tick on the menu, all elements
which pass subsequent checks will be highlighted.
Failed Failed is an On/Off toggle. When on, shown by a tick on the menu, all elements
which fail subsequent checks will be highlighted.
Colours > Passed Displays the Passed Colour form, when Passed is activated on the menu,
allowing the selection of a highlight colour for elements that pass the check.

Colours > Failed Displays the Failed Colour form, when Failed is activated on the menu, allowing
the selection of a highlight colour for elements that fail the check.
Clear > Selection
Allows the selected element to be cleared.
Clear > All
Allows all elements to be cleared.
14.1.2.1 Check Functions

The available check functions are organised into class and group categories, simplifying the selection of
those most relevant to the users current design activities. Each class of checks represents, typically, a main
design discipline; for example, Steelwork, Piping, HVAC, Cable Trays, etc. Each class may have one or
more groups associated with it, representing more specific features of the design discipline.
Selecting the required class of checks from the Classes options list will automatically update the Groups
options.
Selecting the required group of checks from the Groups options list will automatically update the Checks list
to show all individual checks applicable to the chosen class and group.
From the Checks list, select one or more checks that are to be performed on the elements in the Check
Items list. The checks are performed by clicking the Check button on the form.
14.1.3 Design Checker Results
Clicking the Check button will automatically display

the Checker Results form.
The form is split into two sections:-
 Passed
 Failed
Each listing the elements accordingly. Selecting the

element in the section will apply the relevant
highlight colour to the 3D View.

14.2 Design Checker – (Worked Example)
Navigate to PIPE /150-B-6 in the Model Explorer and select

Add > CE from the Checker form.
From the relevant options lists select the following:-
 Classes Piping Application
 Groups Checks for Pipe Lines
From the Checks list select Vent High Points
Click the Check button.
The Checker Results form is displayed.
The results are also displayed in the 3D

View.

Exercise 11 – Design Checker
Navigate to BRAN /100-C-12/B2 and rotate

the by-pass valve by 90 degrees.
Use the Design Checker utility to check the following:-
 The Drain Low Points check for all pipes owned by ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01.
 The Valve Stem Orientation check on BRAN /100-C-12/B2.
 For information relating to the administration of the Design Checker utility refer to Appendix - E

CHAPTER 15
15 Production Checks
The Production Checks functionality allows pipe pieces and pipe spools to be checked in order to bring
them to production readiness in accordance with the user defined fabrication machines. The fabrication
checks are run against the criteria set against the fabrication machines. These are currently limited to pipe
bending and automatic flange welding machines.
 The Production Checks method can be considered as an alternative to the Spool module. For further
information relating to Spool refer to TM-1851 AVEVA Everything3D Spooler training guide.
For the purposes of this chapter PIPE /40-B-10 will be modified to include
bends and extra flanges and PIPE /40-B-20 will be added. To do this on
the Tools tab, in the Training group click the Setup button to display the
Training Setup form. From the Piping tab in the Extras section, check
the Production Checks Update – Chapter15 checkbox and click the
Apply button.
15.1 Definitions
The Production Checks functionality frequently refers to sections of the pipe as Pipe Spools and Pipe
Pieces. As a result, this terminology needs to be understood.
15.1.1 Pipe Spools
A pipe spool is a prefabricated part of a pipe or

branch. This is often considered as the deliverable,
supplied as a complete item by the pipe fabrication
shop that is sent for installation. Pipe spools are
typically comprised of a bent or straight pipe with
welded flanges or couplings at each end. There can
also be more complex fabrications with branches,
reducers, valves and other components. AVEVA
E3D derives the spools.
 Gaskets are not included within the spool.
15.1.2 Pipe Pieces
A pipe piece is the lowest level in the fabrication

hierarchy of a pipe. It relates to a continuous piece of
tube that can be fabricated from stock material. The
pipe piece holds references to the components at
the start and end of the piece. The system derives
the pipe piece.
 Components on the end of the pipe pieces are

not part of the pipe piece, but they are
reference by it.

15.2 Accessing the Pipe Production Checks Form
In the Production group, click the Production Checks

button to display the Pipe Production Checks form.
The representation of the Pipe Production Checks form

is dependent upon the state of the current element.
If a pipe or pipe element with no spools is selected the

Pipe Production Checks form will display the following
‘Pipe spools have not yet been generated for this
pipe’. As a result the Generate Spools link label is
available.
The lower section of the form displays the Setup

Production Checks. This section is for the setup options
for production checks and includes:-
 Select Default Fabrication Machines - this allows

the selection of the fabrication machines to be
applied when running the production checks.
 Define Auto-Resolve Preferences - this determines

whether the material excesses should be added
automatically by the system as a result of a check
against a bending machine.
 Define Auto-Naming Preferences – this allows the

definition of the auto-naming of the spools. This
functionality is only available to an administrator,
(Default is ON)
If a pipe or pipe element with spools is selected the Pipe

Production Checks form will look similar to that shown.
If no pipe or pipe element is selected the Pipe Production

Checks form will display the following ‘Select a pipe or
element below a pipe to view the pipe spools’.

15.2.1 Setting Up Production Checks
Production checks are performed in accordance with the fabrication machines that are selected using the
options below the Setup Production Checks section of the Pipe Production Checks form.
The system checks the pipe pieces against the bending and flange welding machines that are nominated in
the default list. This allows the system to identify and assign the fabrication machines.
To select the default bending machine and flange

welding machine to be used in the production
checks, click the Select Default Fabrication
Machines link label.
The lower pane displays a selectable list of available

fabrication machines.
The selection can be made at any of the three levels,

FMWLD, FMGRP or FMBEND/FMWELD, in this
case the FMWLD has been selected. Click the
Apply button to use the selected machines or the
Back button to cancel the operation.
 There are limitations on reporting production

checks failures that can occur if too many
machines are selected. It is not possible for the
form to display all errors on all machines. In this
case the View Log link label can be used.
15.2.2 Define Auto Resolve Preferences
To determine how the feed and end excesses are

applied during Production Checks, click the Define
Auto-Resolve Preferences link label.
The lower pane will change to display the available

preferences.
Checking the Include End Excess check box, will result in the system automatically adding excess pipe
material to the end of the pipe piece if needed. Checking the Include Feed Excess check box, will result in
the system adding feed excess to the pipe piece if needed.
End and feed excesses are the additional material quantities required by the bending machine to bend the
pipe. This is required for the clamp and loading length of the selected machine and will eventually become
waste. The customer will decide the standard approach for this setting which will be applicable to all users.
For instance it may be a requirement for the user to have these boxes unchecked. This will require the user
to evaluate the route and fitting positions if an excess is required.

15.2.3 Define Auto-Naming Preferences
Auto-naming enables the automatic naming of new spools during generation. Consequently this needs to be
set up prior to the use of the Generate Spools link label. When selected, each newly created spool will be
automatically named using the auto-naming rules. If auto-naming is turned off then spools will be given
default names (Spool1, Spool2...).
 Auto-Naming can only be accessed using an administrative login.
To set up the auto-naming of pipe spools click the

Define Auto-Naming Preferences link label.
The lower pane will change to display the Auto

Naming Preferences section. The Use Auto Naming
Rules checkbox determines whether the defined rules
are currently being used. Click the Define Naming
Rules… link label.
The Name Settings form is displayed. Clicking the

Define Naming Rules... link label will display an Error
form because the current user does not have the
necessary administrative privileges to define the
naming rules.
 The auto-naming of pipe spools is already set up for the Training project.

15.2.4 Generating Spools
To create the spools click the Generate Spools

link label. The appearance of the Production
Checks form will change with the creation of the
spools.
The Generate Spools link label will create a single PSLIST element which
owns the PSPOOL (pipe spools) elements and PPLIST elements(s) which
own the PPIECE (pipe piece) elements.
 The PSPOOL elements contain numerous attributes that can be used

to populate the pipe sketches later.
 The PPIECE elements have a PPCutLength and PPFinLength

attribute which is the cut and finished length of the tube allowing for the
stretch factors on the bending machine.
 It maybe advantageous to create an auto-naming rule for the pipe

pieces to aid in the management of any bending machine nc data if
required. See Appendix – F for details of Bending Machine NC Data.
15.2.5 Auto-Naming Pipe Pieces
If there is a requirement to subsequently create bending machine NC data, it is recommended that the pipe
pieces are auto-named to aid recognition later. It is best for this to be performed at this stage.
Navigate to the pipe in the Model Explorer. On the

Tools tab, in the Tools group, select the CE Offspring
option from the Autoname button options list.

15.3 The Pipe Production Checks Form
The Pipe Production Checks form now displays the Pipe Spools etc. The form has four new sections that
allow control of the different aspects of the production checks on the pipe and spool level.
Pipe Spools - this section shows the spools for the

currently selected pipe.
Pipe Tasks -this section shows tasks relating to the entire

pipe and includes:-
 Validate Pipe - this runs the production checks against

the entire pipe. The checks run for each spool in the
pipe that requires validation
 View Production Information - this displays the

production information currently associated with each
pipe spool and pipe piece.
 Remove Machine Information - this removes any

associated fabrication machine information for all
spools and pipe pieces within the pipe
 Remove Fabrication Information – this deletes all

spools and pipe piece data within the pipe.
 View Log – This displays a log viewer for the spool

Generation and Validation, providing a more detailed
report on the stages of the process.
Tasks for Spool - this section shows tasks that are related
to the currently selected spool and include:-
 Validate Spool - this runs the production checks

against the currently selected spool
 View Production Information - this displays the

production information currently associated with the
spool and pipe pieces it contains.
 Remove Machine Information - this deletes any

associated fabrication machine information for the
selected spool.
Navigation - this section is for navigation relating to the

currently selected spool and includes:-
 View Spool in Graphics - this zooms the 3D View to

the selected spool.

15.3.1 Validation
The Pipe Spools section of the form indicates the

Production Status of the spools belonging to the current
pipe. Initially production check will need to be run against
every spool in the pipe, to do this click the Validate Pipe
link label from the Pipe Tasks section of the form. To run
checks against a single pipe spool select Validate Spool.
These options run the production checks and show the
results in the lower pane of the form
The production checks run using the fabrication machines

associated with the individual pipe piece of the spool.
Consequently if no machines are associated with the pipe

piece, as is the often the case when initially validating, then
the system will check against all machines defined in the
default machine list.
When the checks have been performed the Pipe Spools section displays the results of the check for each
spool. There are three possible production status values:-
 Successful The production checks were successful
 Failed Some part of the production check failed
 Valid for production The spool had already been validated so was not rechecked.
The lower part of the form shows the result for each pipe
piece of the selected spool. A Pipe Piece list shows the
production check results per piece, and each piece has one
of the three status values associated with it.
Selecting a pipe piece from the list displays the detailed

results of the check in the Detailed Results section of the
form. The information displayed in this part of the form
depends on the results of the check.
In this example, Spool 40-B-

10-PS06 contains a bend that
has a radius of 4D.
Consequently the Production
Status will be displayed as
Failed because this radius
cannot be bent by any of the
default bending machines.
To overcome this, the radius can be changed using the

previously shown functions from Model, or in some cases
the spool can be Set to Manually Bent on the form. This
ignores all bending data completely and assumes that any
production issues will be overcome by the fabricators.

The selection of the Set to Manually Bent link label results

in the Production Status of the pipe piece changing to
Successful.
 The use of the Set to Manually Bent option has been

included in this section for completeness. It is not the
normal procedure if the customer’s environment relies
upon accurate production information. In most
circumstances the bend radius would have be changed
to suit the bending machine or changed to an elbow.
 The appearance of this data is dependent upon

whether the spool has just been validated with a
Production Status of Successful; or has already
been validated with a Production Status of Valid for
Production and the View Production Information link
label from Tasks for Spools section of the form has
been selected.
15.3.2 Examples of Various Results
15.3.2.1 Successful Checks with No Modifications Required
This is the result where the check succeeded against both

bending and flange welding machines. If applicable the
section shows which, bending machine was used and which
flanges can be pre-welded. In the example shown the pipe
piece requires bending using machine 5_NB_MACH with no
excesses, but no pre-welded flanges are present.
The Machine Insertion Direction indicates which end of

the spool is loaded on to the bending machine. This
provides valuable information in relation to whether the
excesses are required. This will either be displayed as
Clutch Head or Clutch Tail and corresponds with head/tail
of the owning branch.

15.3.2.2 Successful Checks with Modifications Required

In this example the check succeeded against the bending
but some excess material is needed to make the pipe piece
pass the checks.
As well as bending and flange welding machine information

there is a list of excesses required. In the example shown it
can be seen that the Arrive of Tube requires an excess of
234.5mm (Machine Defined).
Selecting the Arrive of

Tube or Leave of Tube link
label on the form will show a
tag in the 3D View so it can
be seen how it applies to the
pipe piece. This is
particularly use for the feed
excesses.
15.3.2.3 Failed Check with Modification Required

If the pipe piece requires excess to pass the checks, but
the auto resolve preferences have been setup not to
include excess automatically, then the check will fail.
In this case the results display the excesses required. The

suggested excesses can be accepted to make the pipe
piece pass the checks by clicking the Apply excesses link
label, or alternatively the existing route can be evaluated to
remove the excess.
This is the case if a single bending machine is set as the

default, in this case the /5_NB_MACH machine.
Alternatively the Set to Manually Bent link label could be

used to ignore the bending machine checks as shown
previously.
15.3.2.4 Non-Resolvable Failure
The validation may fail for a more serious reason in

relation to the Data Consistency of the pipe. This
should be resolved prior to continuing with the Pipe
Production Checks functions.

15.3.3 Expanding the Machine Results Panel
The Detailed Results information may be expanded to display more information by clicking on the fold-up
panel button.
15.3.4 Modifying Production Information
The production information for the pipe piece can also be modified. This is done by clicking the Modify
Production Information link label.
This is used to change the fabrication machines, and also modify the end and feed excess.
 An example where this could be used is if the feed excess has to be longer than the clamp length in
order for the pipe to be placed in a saw for removal of the excess.

15.3.5 Changing or Assigning a Machine
To change or assign a bending machine or flange welding machine select the appropriate link label. If no
machine is associated with the pipe piece then the Change Bending/Welding Machine link label will read
Assign Bending/Welding Machine.
If the tube is straight then there are no bending machine options. If there are no pre welded flanges then
there will be no flange welding machine options.
 In the current Training project there is only one machine that is capable of bending the selected pipe
piece.
Select the required machine and then click the Apply button. To cancel any changes and go back to the
previous screen, click the Back button.
After selecting a new machine click the Accept Changes link label at the
bottom of the panel.
15.3.6 Applying an User Defined End Excess
User defined end excesses can be added by

entering a value in the relevant textbox. Clicking the
Accept Changes to sets the new values.
15.3.7 Applying a User Defined Minimum Feed Excess
User defined minimum feed excess can be added by

entering a value in the Minimum feed textbox.
Clicking the Accept Changes to sets the new value.

15.3.8 Revalidating a Pipe Piece
After changing the production information the pipe piece

must be revalidated by clicking Revalidate Pipe Piece link
label. This runs the pipe production check on the pipe
piece using the new values. As before the result of the
validation will be displayed.
15.3.9 Finish Viewing the Results
To return to the main form after viewing the results of the

validation click the Finish Viewing Results link label.

15.3.10 Viewing Production Information
The production information assigned to the pipe piece of a spool can be viewed without having to go through
the validation process.
To do this click View Production Information link label from either the Pipe Tasks or Spool Tasks
sections of the form.
If the link label from Pipe Tasks section is selected, the resulting form will display all of the spools for
selection, as shown. If the link label from the Spool Tasks section is used then only the production
information for that spool is available.

15.3.11 Removing Machine Information
To remove all machine information associated with a

single pipe spool or all the spools on a pipe click the
Remove Machine Information link label from either
the Pipe Tasks or Spool Tasks sections of the
form. As before the result depends on which link
label was selected, in this case the link label below
the Pipe Tasks section was used.
15.3.12 Removing Fabrication Information
The Remove Fabrication Information link label from the Pipe Tasks section will delete all production data
by removing the PSLIST (Pipe Spool List) and the PPLIST (Pipe Piece List) from the pipe.
The Pipe Production Checks alert form is displayed asking ‘Are you sure you want to remove all pipe
spools and pipe pieces associated with the pipe?’ click the Yes button to remove or the No button to
cancel.

15.3.13 View Log
If the spool fails the validation the View Log link

label can be selected to find out additional
information. This information is presented on two
tabs Spool Generation and Validation.
For instance, there are limitations on reporting the

production check failures that can occur if numerous
default machines are selected. This is because it is
not possible for the form to display all errors on all
machines. In this case the View Log link label can
be used.
The information for Spool Generation and Validation can be saved to file using the Save button or printed
using the Print button.

Exercise 12 – Production Checks
 The use of the option from the Training Setup form at the start of this chapter added PIPE /40-B-
20 to the model. Use the Production Checks form to verify this pipe. There are several errors with
this pipe that will need to be remedied before the pipe will successfully validate.
 Make the changes in Model to ensure all spools validate successfully for PIPE /40-B-20.
 Observe which spools require end and feed excesses.
 The following pipes should validate successfully:
 /40-B-10 - (It maybe necessary to make a modification to the bend radius)
 /200-B-4
 /100-B-8
 /100-B-2
 /80-B-14
 /250-B-5
 /80-B-7
 Run Production Checks on as many of these pipes as possible.

CHAPTER 16
16 Creating Isometrics
Detail Isometric production is the subject of another course. However, since it is likely to be a requirement of
the piping designer, the basic techniques, of what is a simple operation are covered here.
Before the creation of Isometric plots the pipes should be free from clashes and data consistency errors.
 Unlike the pipe sketch functions the creation of Isometrics does not require the pipes to have been
processed by the Pipe Production Checks utility.
16.1 Creating Pipe Isometrics
Navigate to the pipe in the Model Explorer, in this case /100-B-2.
In the Isometric group, select the Pipe option from the

Pipe button options list to create an isometric sketch of the
pipe.

16.2 Creating System Isometrics
Alternatively, in the Isometric group, select the System

option from the Pipe button options list to create an
isometric sketch of the pipe and any connected pipes.
 For further information relating to the use of the Isodraft module and its administration refer to TM-1873
AVEVA Everything3D Isodraft Administration.
 Prior to the creation of the isometrics it may be necessary to split the pipes into logical section using the
Spool module. Refer to TM-1851 AVEVA Everything3D Spooler for details.

Exercise 13 – Creating Isometrics
 Create Pipe and System Isometrics for the pipes created in the previous chapters.


CHAPTER 17
17 Creating Pipe Sketches in Draw
The following chapter deals with the creation of pipe sketches that are required as an output in order to
fabricate the spools prior to installation. The sketches include dimensions and scale drawings of a pipe spool
along with tables of relevant manufacturing information.
Using the AVEVA E3D Automatic Drawing Production (ADP), pipe sketches can be produced automatically
using pipes that have been validated by the Pipe Production Checks utility in the Model application. This is
performed using the Draw module of AVEVA E3D.
17.1 Accessing the AVEVA E3D Draw Module.
On the Project tab, select the Modules option and click the Draw tile access the Draw module
A Confirm form appears, click the Yes button.
A default screen layout will be displayed comprising the Microsoft® Office Fluent™–based user interface
and an Active Properties and Properties forms.
On the Tools tab, in the Explorers group, click the Draw Explorer and Model Explorer buttons to display
the Draw Explorer and Model Explorer respectively.

17.2 Creating a Registry
In order for the pipes sketches to be stored an owning Registry (REGI) must be selected using the form, as
shown later. It may be necessary to create the Registry and name it according to the area or system being
sketched to aid navigation at a later date.
In the previous chapters the SITE being used was

/SITE-PIPING-AREA-01. Consequently Department
/DEPT-PIPING-AREA01 will be selected as the owner
for the new Registry in this example.
On the Tools tab, in the Explorers group, select the

Create option from the Registry button options list.
The Create REGI form appears allowing a suitable

name to be entered for the Registry, in this case AREA-
01-Psketches-01. Once the name has been entered
click the OK button.
The Registry will be added to the selected Department

in the Draw Explorer as shown.
The Registry Information form that appears by default

is not required for the creation of pipe sketches. Click
the Cancel button to close the form.

17.3 Creating Pipe Sketches
To create the pipe sketches, navigate to the correct position in the Model Explorer, i.e. Zone or Pipe. A list
of spools can then be obtained for the CE. On the Auto tab, in the Create group, click the Pipe Sketches
button to display the Pipe Sketches form. Failure to navigate to the correct type of element will result in an
Error form being displayed.
The Pipe Sketches form is split in to four sections:-
 Design Element to search under
 Filter the Spools using
 Search Results
 Sketch Creation Options
The name of the selected zone or pipe is displyed in

the Design Element to search under text box.
The content of the form can be altered by selecting

another element in the Model Explorer and clicking
the CE button to add the element name to the form.
There are additional filter options on the form which

are useful for defining better search criteria. For
instance, if the element selected is a Zone and it is a
requirement for the form to display sketches which
contain specific characters or have a specific status.
If the additional filters are used, the Search button
would then have to be clicked to update the Search
Results list.
The Search Results section will display the relevant

spools in accordance with the CE and any applied
search criteria.
The Sketch Creation Options allow the selection of

a suitable drawing template, owning registry and log
file.

17.3.1 Design Elements to Search Under
This is the name of the root design element, and must be either a zone or a pipe. The textbox can be
populated using the CE button or by typing in the name.
The system validates all types input. If the CE button

is used, the text box displays the name and the form
initialises.
17.3.2 Filter the Spools Using
This part of the form allows filters to be applied to

the spools under the root element according to
several criteria. Once the criteria has been selected
the Search button is clicked.
All or Part of the spool name Include spools with names matching the text the user enters, either
wholly or partially.
Production Status This offers three options via an options list, Any, Valid, and Not
Valid.
Any Matches all spools, both validated and not validated
Valid Matches pipe spools valid for production
Not Valid Matches only spools not valid for production.
Sketch Status This offers three options via an options list, Any, Created and Not
Created.
Any Matches all spools, both with and without existing

pipe sketches
Created Matches only pipe spools with existing pipe sketches.
Not Created Matches only pipe spools without existing pipe
sketches.

17.3.3 Search Results
This list is a collection of all pipe spool elements of the

root element, filtered by the criteria above. The system
processes only pipe spools selected in this list when the
Create Sketches button is clicked.
Name This is the name of the pipe spool.
Valid TRUE or FALSE, depending on whether the pipe spool has been validated in Model
using the Pipe Production Checks form.
Sketch If the sketch has been created this field displays the name of the resulting drawing, if the
sketch has not yet been created this field displays FALSE.
Drawn This field gives the date that the drawing was created. If no drawing exists the field will
display ---. If the search finds more than one drawing then it will display the number of times
the drawing has been created, i.e. 2 times, 3 times etc.
The Search Results list also has a right click menu with
following options:-
Select All This selects all pipe spools in the list.
Clear Selection This unselects all pipe spools in the

list.
Print Sketch This prints the selected sketch.
Delete Sketch This deletes the selected sketch.
 The Print Sketch and Delete Sketch options are inactive until the pipe sketch has been created.
17.3.4 Sketch Creation Options
The Sketch Creation Options are at the bottom of the

Pipe Sketches form:-
Sketch Template -This must be an existing DRWG

element that can be used as a template for the pipe
sketch drawing. The CE button allows for a quick
capture.
Create Sketches in Registry - The named element

must be an existing Registry element into which the
system puts all new pipe sketch drawings. The CE
button allows for a quick capture.
Log File The system records the progress of the creation process as text that is written to a file.
This field shows the file name the system will write to. The system overwrites the file if it
has already been used.

17.3.5 Create Sketches
The desired spools are selected from the Search

Results list and the Create Sketches button is
clicked.
The pipe sketches will be created below the selected

Registry in the Draw Explorer.
The presence of the sketches will update the Search

Results form and make the Display button active.
Clicking the Display button will open the drawing of
the selected pipe spool for viewing. Only one sheet
can be displayed at a time. However the up/down
arrows allow navigation up and down the list to
display each sketch.
Alternatively, from the Sheet level, click the Open

option from the Draw Explorer as shown.

Here is a typical example of a pipe spool sketch

Exercise 14 – Creating Pipe Sketches
 Enter the AVEVA E3D Draw module
 Create pipe sketches for the pipes validated previously.

APPENDIX A
Appendix A - Additional Flange Information
A.1 - Flange Offset Value for Slip-On Flanges
Slip on flanges have a flange offset value, this is the distance from the flange face to the end of the tube. For
the FLOF flanges used in the SP/DR07C spec this value is calculated using the wall thickness parameter.
The example below shows P1 would have a PDIST of 0 and P2 a PDIST of the Pipe Wall Thickness + 2mm
(PWALLT(1) + 2mm).
The Flange Offset is the Distance between P1 and P2
Therefore with the P2 PDIST value being (PWALLT(1) + 2mm) for a 100NB pipe with a wall thickness of
3.18mm the flange offset will be 3.18 + 2mm = 5.18 mm

The wall thickness can be checked by viewing the HWALLT Pseudo

Attribute while at the branch level.
Also the flange offset (distance between flange face and tube end) can be
checked This is the Fitlength Pseudo Attribute while at the flange level.
This is not the only method of setting the flange

offset value. In some cases the value is fixed
for each flange by using a parameter. This can
be seen for the FLSO type flanges belonging to
the SP/DR07C for example.
This value is fixed for each flange because it

does not rely on any external variable, i.e. the
wall thickness of the attached tube.
A.2 - Flange Allowance Value for ALLO Flanges
Flanges which require the end of the tube to be flared, deformed to form the raised face, need to have
additional material to allow for the deformation process. This extra tube is the flange allowance. The value of
the flange allowance is calculated using the Pipe Data Table (PDATAB). The PDATAB contains a flange
allowance parameter field which allows an expression to be added for each bore size. i.e. (10* ATTRIB
PWALLT(1)), the PDATAB holds a reference to the Wall thickness table (WTHTAB)
Consider the illustration shown below, if the wall thickness is 3.18 mm the flange allowance value would be
10 x 3/18 = 31.8 mm.
 For the flange allowance to be applied, the catalogue

component must have the CompType attribute set to
ALLO

The flange allowance can be checked by viewing the Flallowance Pseudo

Attribute while at the flange level.
The loose attribute on the flange will be automatically set to true. This can be
checked by viewing the Loose Attribute while at the flange level.
The impact of this can then be seen in Isodraft on the dimensioned view and material list. Also there will be
no welds in the Weld Table for the loose flanges.
A.3 – Additional Queries
A.3.1 – Wall Thickness Queries
Q p(Ppoint number) wall
Q p1 WALL query the wall thickness at p1
Q LWALLT Leave wall thickness of component
Q AWALLT Arrive wall thickness of component
Q HWALLT Head wall thickness from branch
Q TWALLT Tail wall thickness from branch
Q WTEREF(Ppoint number) query the wall thickness element associated with p1
Q ATWREF Arrive tube wall thickness reference
Q LTWREF Leave tube wall thickness reference
Q PWALLT(Ppoint number) wall thickness at a given Ppoint
Q LTWALL Leave tube wall thickness
Q ATWALL Arrive tube wall thickness
Q SCHED/ULE Piping Schedule taken from the associated wall thickness table
Q PCWALL Wall thickness of connected component Ppoint
Q PA WALL Pipe Arrive Wall thickness
Q PL WALL Pipe Leave Wall thickness

A.3.2 – Corrosion Allowance Queries
Q p(Ppoint number) corrosion
Q CORROS/ION Tube corrosion
Q LCORRO Leave corrosion allowance
Q ACORRO Arrive corrosion allowance
Q TCORRO Tail Corrosion from branch
Q HCORRO Head Corrosion from branch
Q PCORRO/SION(Ppoint number) Corrosion at a given Ppoint
Q LTCORR Leave tube corrosion allowance
Q ATCORR Arrive tube corrosion allowance
Q PA CORROSION Pipe arrive Corrosion
Q PL CORROSION Pipe Leave Corrosion
A.3.3 – Flange Allowance Queries
Q FLALLO/WANCE Flange Allowance

APPENDIX B
Appendix B – Model Editing / Pipe Editing / Quick Pipe Router Menus
B.1 – Model Editor – Cardinal Direction Handle Menu
The following options are available from the cardinal

direction handle menu
This presents the Move Selection

form depending on which cardinal
Enter Value direction handle is selected. This
allows an explicit value for the
displacement of the selection in the
selected direction.
This allows the identification of features with which to align the handle in the
Align with Feature…
selected direction. The selection being displaced is moved in the selected
direction until the handle is aligned.
This presents the Offset From

Feature form which allows an offset
Offset From Feature… value to be entered. The
identification of the feature from
which the offset is to be applied can
then be performed.
Snap to Point… This allows the identification of features with which to snap the selection to.
The selected direction has not relevance to the actual displacement.
Cancel
This closes the right click menu.
The following options are available from the Move Handle option:-
 Enter Value…
 Align with Feature…
 Snap to Point…
These options behave in the same manner as those described previously, but only to reposition the handle
as opposed to the selection.

B.2 – Model Editor – Rotational Handle Menu
The following options are available from the rotational handle menu
This presents the Rotate Selection

About X/Y/Z form depending on
Enter Value which rotational handle is selected.
This allows an explicit value for the
rotation of the selection about the
selected axis.
Orient to Point…
This directs the handle directly to a point feature.
Align with Direction… This allows the identification of features, usually ppoints. The handle will
then be directed to the same direction as the selected feature.
This presents the Enter Direction

For X/Y/Z Axis form depending on
Align with… which rotational handle is selected
This allows an explicit direction for
the handle to be entered.
Cancel
The following options are available from the Rotate Handle option:-
 Enter Value…
 Orient to Point…
 Align with Direction…
 Align with…
 To World - Rotates the handle to the World axes.
With the exception of To World, these options behave in the same manner as those described previously,
but only to rotate the handle as opposed to the selection.

B.3 – Pipe Editing – Handle Menu
The following options are available from the Pipe Editing handle menu:-
This presents the Constrained Move

Enter Offset… form, which allows an offset to be
entered from the current position in
the selected routing direction.
This has three options which are

context sensitive and allow an offset
Enter Distance From from one of the common features of
a pipe branch. A relevant form is
displayed allowing the value to be
entered.
Align
This allows a component to be aligned to the previous component.
This allows the identification of features with which to align the handle in the
Align with Feature…
selected direction. The selection being displaced is moved in the selected
direction until the handle is aligned.

then be performed.
Connect
This allows a component to be connected to the previous component.
This allows the selction of End of Selection and Opposite End of

Move Handle Selection. This will reposition the handle without moving the selection. The
result of the selection can be determined in relation to the direction of the
handle indicated.
This allows the selection of four possible context sensitive options to

determine the format of the information in the 3D View; From Leave / From
Arrivee / From Origin / From Direction Change / From Branch Head /
Distance Feedback
From Branch Tail / From Current Position. These relate to the datum
used for the dimension. Whilst two additional options of Show True Length
and Show Orthogonal Length determine the format, (these are more
relevant for sloping pipes).
Cancel

B.4 – Quick Pipe Router - Extend Route Handle Menu
The following options are available on the Extend Route handle before a drag.
This presents the Constrained Move

Enter Offset… form, which allows an offset to be
entered from the current position in
the selected routing direction.
This presents the Explicit Distance

form which allows an absolute
Enter Leg Length… distance value to be entered from the
previous change in direction.
Distance From Origin… This also presents the Explicit Distance form which allows an absolute
distance value to be entered from the previous component’s origin.
Extend Through Feature… This allows identification of features with which to align, along the selected
routing direction.

then be performed.

This sets the mode. When selected, no slope will be applied to the pipe leg
No Slope
when the handle is dragged.
This presents the Set Slope Angle

Slope Angle…
form which allows a slope angle to be
specified.
Orient To Point… This directs the handle directly to a point feature or rotates about the vertical
axis maintaining horizontal offset when a linear feature is identified.
Align with Direction… This allows the identification of features, usually ppoints. The handle will
then be directed to the same direction as the selected feature.
This presents the Enter Direction

Explicit Direction… For Z Axis form which allows an
explicit direction for the handle to be
entered.
This allows the selection of the type of component that is created by the
Component Choice
Quick Pipe Router when a change in direction occurs. The component can
be set to either Use Elbows or Use Bends.
This allows the selection of the format for display of the distance feedback.
This can be set to either Offset (offset from the handle’s original position),
Distance Feedback Leg Length (distance from the previous change in direction), or From
Origin (distance from the previous component’s origin). The D 'hotkey' can
be used to cycle through the options.
Show Rotation Handles
This toggles the display of the Rotation Handles.
Cancel
The following options are only available when the branch has a Slope Ref set that defines the angle of the
slope:-
Normal to Feature This allows the identification of features with which to align the handle whilst
allowing for the currently set slope.
Default Slope Up The slopes the resulting pipe up in accordance with the slope ref value when
the handle is dragged.
The slopes the resulting pipe down in accordance with the slope ref value
Default Slope Down
when the handle is dragged.
There are two additional options available when the branch has a slope ref
set. Show True Length (shows the feedback as a value along the axis of
Distance Feedback
the sloping leg) and Show Orthogonal Length (shows the values as
horizontal and vertical components)

The following options are available on the Extend Route handle on completion of a drag, i.e. when the right
mouse button has been used to drag the handle and no special actions are active.
Extend This extends the route to the current

position.
Cancel This returns the handle and selection to its

original state before the drag.
The following options are available when Feature Highlighting is active and the identified feature is the
opposing Route handle.
Extend This extends the route to the current

position.
Complete This completes the route and exits the route

mode when applicable.
Cancel This returns the handle and selection to its

original state before the drag.
B.5 – Quick Pipe Router - Rotational Handle Menu
There are two addition options available on the Rotational handle before a drag
 The other options are identical to those shown for

the Extend Route handles.
This presents the Rotation About

Horizontal/Vertical form depending
Enter Value
on which rotational handle is selected.
This allows an explicit direction for the
handle to be entered.
Intersect with Line This allows the direction to be defined from the intersection between the
direction of a selected feature and the plane of the rotation.

APPENDIX C
Appendix C – Insulation and Tracing
C.1 - Adding / Controlling Insulation
Insulation can be added at pipeline or branch level, AVEVA E3D controls the insulation from the insulation
specification that is created in the Paragon module.
The insulation can be controlled by the range of temperature

and bore to control the thickness of insulation to be added. The
image shows an extract from the Paragon module.
When a pipe is created, using the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe

form the insulation specification and temperature can be
specified for the pipeline. In this case the insulation thickness is
dependent upon the bore and temperature.
Alternatively, the thickness of the insulation can be selected

directly. In this case the temperature and bore are irrelevant for
the purpose of insulation.
Once this information exists against a routed pipe the insulation can be displayed. On the 3D View tab, in
the Settings group, click the Graphics button to display the Graphics Settings form. The Representation
tab contains an Insulation Visibility / Translucency options list allowing the translucency of the insulation to
be set.
Sometimes insulation may not be required over the total length of the branch, for example the section of a
pipe upstream of a feature may not require insulation. The insulation can be terminated at a component in
the pipe by setting the components Insulation Specification attribute (Ispec) to Nulref. This will remove
the insulation from the component and the implied pipe downstream of the component. The insulation can
be removed from further components in the pipe if required, using the same method.

C.1.1 - Controlling Insulation between Components
In this example insulation has been added to PIPE /100-C-16. The insulation is to be removed from the
branch above the penetration through STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT.
Navigate to the flange

at the head of the
branch.
From the Reselect tab of the Piping Component Editor

form select None from the Insulation options list.
Click the Yes

button on the
Confirm form.
The insulation has been removed from the flange to the

first elbow. The ATTA used for the penetration has been
ignored. To overcome this the Specification Break
(Spkbrk) attribute of the ATTA needs to be changed.
Navigate to the ATTA and from the right mouse button context sensitive menu select Attributes… Set the
Spkbrk attribute to True by clicking the check box.

This insulation has now been included between the

ATTA and the elbow.
 ATTAs can be added along the implied tube

specifically to control the boundary of the
insulation.
The gaps in insulation can also be seen on the isometric produced for the pipe. The gaps in the dashed line
show the areas where the insulation was removed.
It is also possible to edit the Stext attribute of the

ATTA to display a note on the isometric. In this case,
the Stext attribute was set to Insulation Break /
Penetration.
 The Branch contains a pseudo attribute of INLENGTH that can be reported on.

C.2 - Adding Tracing
A tracing specification is required for pipelines that may need some form of heating i.e. fresh water pipelines
exposed to the elements. This specification is set up from the Paragon module.
Tracing can be added to a pipe from the Pipe

Editor: Create Pipe or Pipe Editor: Modify
Pipe forms. From the Tracing options list select
the type of tracing required and click the Apply
button.
Pipes with Tracing can be highlighted in the

3DView by selecting the Tracing checkbox from
the Graphics Settings form.
If a piping isometric is produced the tracing on the pipe will be shown as a chain-dotted line.
 The Branch contains a pseudo attribute of TRLENGTH that can be reported on.

APPENDIX D
Appendix D – Hole Management Request and Approval Workflow
D.1 – Hole Creation/Modification Workflow
In this workflow the Originator creates the ‘virtual’ hole and then either requests it or deletes the entry.
Once requested, the Originator may cancel the request and delete the entry prior to it being reviewed.
If requested and not cancelled or deleted, the Reviewer checks the hole details and, if OK, approves the
hole, thereby creating the ‘actual’ hole.
If the Reviewer rejects the hole then the Originator can either modify the ‘virtual’ hole and re-request the
hole or cancel the request and delete the entry.
D.2 – Redundant Hole Workflow
In this workflow the ‘actual’ hole has been created. The Originator decides that the hole is now redundant
and sets its status to Redundant.
Before the Originator can delete the entry the Reviewer must agree that the hole is redundant.

D.3 – Rejected Hole Workflow
In this workflow the ‘actual’ hole has been created. The Reviewer, possibly due to changed conditions,
decides to reject the hole. The Originator has the option to:
 Modify the hole and re-request it, whereby it will go through the normal review and approval cycle.
 Cancel the request, in which case the ‘virtual’ hole details remain
 •Delete the entry, in which case the entire hole is deleted and the ‘virtual’ hole and association
deleted. The ‘actual’ hole is deleted and the panel restored to its original state.

APPENDIX E
Appendix E – Design Checker Admin Overview
The Design Checker chapter of this training guide showed how the form can be used to perform various
checks of the Model data. This appendix has been added to illustrate how the checks themselves are
constructed to enhance the understanding of the utility.
 The creation and modification of the checks is normally an administrative function. Consequently a
piping design user will only be allowed to view the information.
E.1 - Design Checker Admin Form
On the Admin tab, in the Data Checker group, click the Config
button to display the Data Checker Configuration form.
The administrator uses this form to create the Classes

and Groups that are displayed on the Checker form.
The Checks are added to the Groups, each check has

a name and an associated macro function.
 Due to the limited access rights of the pipe design

user this form is currently read only.

E.1.2 - Vent High Points Admin Detail
The detail of the Vent High Points check used in the worked
example of the Design Checker chapter is selected in a similar
fashion to how the check is selected from the Checker form:
From the relevant options list select:-
 Groups Checks for Pipe Lines
From the Checks list select Vent High Points
This updates the information at the bottom of the form listing the
Name, Description and Function of the selected check.
 If there are any rules that can be modified the Edit Rule
Data button is active.
Clicking Edit Rule Data button will open the following form.
 The asterisk * in the text

field indicates All sizes,
Fluid Ref etc. are
handled.
From the information on the form it can be seen that the Vent High Points check covers the following:
 Tee or Olet exist with a Branch outlet of 15mm or above.
 Branch must contain a Valve and a Closure
 Will check all Fluids
 Will Check All Pipes
 Will Check all pipes regardless of name
 Will show all High Points (un-ticked shows just the highest point)

E.1.3 - Drain Low Points Admin Detail
If the Drain Low Points check is selected from the Checks options list the form will display that it can only
be used to check a pipe between 15 - 50mm N.B. when the Fluid Reference is set to /FRESH-WATER.
 In the Design Checker

chapter no pipes failed this
test because none of them
had a fluid reference of
/FRESHWATER.
E.1.4 - Valve Stem Orientation Admin Detail
The detail of the Valve Stem Orientation check that was used in
the exercise of the Design Checker chapter is as follows:
From the relevant options list select:-
 Groups Checks for Pipe Componens
From the Checks list select Valve Stem Orientation.
Click Edit Rule Data button.
The check indicates that with the exception of Sea Water a valve
stem can be rotated from the vertical between 0 and 45deg. In the
case of Sea Water the Valve Stem must always be vertical.


APPENDIX F
Appendix F – Bending Machine NC Outputs
The training guide has shown how it is possible to obtain Bending Machine data in the form of bending
programs on pipe sketches. In additional to this there is often a requirement to be able to output this
information in file format for numerous pipe pieces. This is achieved using the Fabrication NC Reports
form.
F.1 - Accessing the Form
To access the form the CE must be a Site, Zone, Pipe, Pipe Spool List (PSLIST), Pipe Spool (PSPOOL),
Pipe Piece List (PPLIST), or a Pipe Piece (PPIECE).
In the Production group, click the Bending NC

Output button to display the Fabrication NC
Reports form.
The form is divided into four main sections:-
 Find Bent Pieces in: is a textbox showing

the name of the current element used for
the search.
 Filter the Pipe Pieces using: is a selection

of search criteria based on the pipe piece
name, bore range and bending machine
 Search Results is a list displaying the

results of the search based on the filters
and CE. The pipe pieces to be reported on
must be highlighted in the list.
 Report Options allows the selection of a

file name and location using the Browse
button.
 When the form is initially opened a search

is performed without any filters being
applied.
If the Site is selected as the CE when opening

the form or when the CE button clicked, a
confirm form will be displayed.

 The appearance of the form assumes that the Pipe Pieces have been named as described in section
15.2.5. Auto-naming at this stage in the work flow will require the pipes to be validated a second time.
Pipe Pieces can be selected using the cursor in

the Search Results list. The standard use of
Ctrl and Shift keys can be employed to improve
the selection.
The Select All and Clear Selection options are

also available from right click menu over the list.
Once the file name has been selected the information can be output to the file using the Create Report
button.
F.1.1 - Specifying Search Criteria
F.1.1.1- Pipe Piece Name Filter

This allows the filtering of the search to only find Pipe Pieces containing the supplied string in the name. The
use of wildcards (*) can be applied.
For example keying in *01* in to the Pipe Piece

name textbox and clicking the Search button will
achieve the result as shown.
F.1.1.2 – Bore Range Filter

This allows a range or single pipe bore to be entered to filter the search. The values entered are included in
the results.
For example to search for pipes of 80 to 150 nominal bore, enter a range
of 80 to 150 and click the Search button.
Alternatively, entering a single pipe size in both fields will result in only
pipes of that bore appearing.
F.1.1.3 – Bending Machine Filter
This allows the filtering of the search to only find

Pipe Pieces that can be bent using a particular
fabrication machine. The selection is made from
the Bending Machine options list and the
Search button is clicked.

F.2 – NC Outputs
The following criteria needs to be satisfied for valid outputs to be available:-
 The pipe must have been through Production Checks process to have a pipe piece list and
member pipe pieces.
 The pipe piece must contain a bend
 The bend must not be a ‘manual’ bend
 The pipe must be Validated
If the first two criteria are not satisfied the pipe pieces will not be shown on the form.
If the last two criteria are not satisfied the pipe pieces will appear on the form but the output created will
indicate that the criteria have not been satisfied.
If the pipe piece needs to be validated the grid will indicate this with a FALSE entry in the Valid column and
the Bending Machine column will have an Unset value.
Alternatively, if the pipe piece has been validated but the bend has been designated as a ‘manual’ bend the
grid will be indicate this with a TRUE entry in the Valid column, but the Bending Machine will again be
Unset.
Clicking the Browse button allows navigation to the desired location and entering of the file name. Click the
Save button to confirm the file name and location.
If the file name has previously been used a Confirm

Save As form is displayed.
Once a location and file name have been specified

using the Browse button and the pipes pieces have
been selected, the Create Report button becomes
active.

If the file name specified has been used previously,

clicking the Create Report button will result in the
appearance of a Confirm form. Click the Yes button to
overwrite the file.
Another Confirm form will inform that the file has been
created and ask whether it is to be viewed on screen. Click
the Yes button to view the file.
The contents of the file will

then be displayed.

AVEVA Everything3D™2.1
Structures
Creating Linear Members
www.aveva.com
GENSEC Creation Methods (1)
 GENSECs may be created as straight, curved, arc or

ring configurations, with various creation methods
for each type, available from the Create group of
the SECTIONS tab.
Copyright © 2015 AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
 The Straight button has the following options:
– Single creates one straight GENSEC.

– Continuous creates any number of GENSECs with the
end position of the first being the start position of
the second, etc.
– Repeat creates any number of GENSECs using Single
mode by repeating the command.
 The Curved button has the following options:
– Free Definition creates a curved GENSEC with as

many points as required and variable curve angles
– Fixed Angle creates a curved GENSEC with as many
points as required and the same fixed curve angles
 The Arc button has the following options:
– Centre + Sweep requires a centre point, diameter (or

radius), start angle and sweep angle
– Ends + Radius requires a start point, end point and a
point to define the arc direction
– Three Point requires three points through which the
arc passes
– Semi-Circle requires a start and end point and a
point to define the arc direction
 The Ring button has the following options:
– Centre + requires a centre point and a diameter (or

radius)
– Three Point requires three points through which the
arc passes
– Two Point requires two points through which the arc
passes. The second point defines the ring diameter
GENSEC Creation (1)
 Select the Profile Specification, Generic Type and

Profile from the options lists in the Defaults group
of the SECTIONS tab.
GENSEC Creation (2)
 Set the profile Justification line using options list.

– The new steel profile catalogue has new Pline names
 Set the Material and Class, if appropriate.

– Class represents a new attribute, StruClassification,
on a GENSEC. The attribute values are set in Lexicon.
GENSEC Creation (3)
 Clicking the appropriate button in the Create

group or selecting the required creation method
from the button, displays a command prompt in
the 3D view adjacent to the cursor.
– Note: Straight button clicked
 The Start point may be picked graphically or by

entering values in the E, N and U textboxes. The
textboxes show the current cursor position as it is
moved across the 3D view.
GENSEC Creation (4)
 If a value is entered into, say, the E textbox,

pressing the Tab key locks the value is and the N
textbox is highlighted. Making a graphical pick at
this point will only affect the Northing value
– Note: the U value will be the current LCS for
graphical picks
 N and U values may be entered in a similar way.
GENSEC Creation (5)
 When the Start point prompt is displayed, the

down arrow icon after the prompt indicates that
there are options available. Pressing the down
cursor key displays the options below the prompt.
– Pressing the appropriate key for the option or

clicking on the appropriate tile selects the option and
returns to the prompt sequence. Pressing the Esc key
cancels the option selection.
– Note: options may change for different prompts in
the sequence.
GENSEC Creation (6)
 When a valid Start point has been entered the

prompt changes to End point and a ‘ghost’ of the
selected profile is displayed. Dynamic hints (which
may be switched off) give dimensional feedback for
the Start point.
 Ortho mode (F8 key) may be toggled to restrict the

cursor movement to the U and V axes of the LCS.
GENSEC Creation (7)
 The End point is specified in the same way as the

Start point.
 Once a valid End point has been specified the
GENSEC is created.
Connecting GENSECs (1)
 GENSECs are connected automatically during the

creation process provided Automatic mode is
enabled, a suitable snap point is obtained and the
owning member is highlighted.
 If GENSECs are not connected when created then

the Connect button may be used to connect two
GENSECs together.
 Connecting GENSECs does not require a Pline rule

to be set to obtain correct trimming, effectively,
Pline rules are now part of the ‘system’.
 Only Plines with the Cconnect attribute set to ANY
are used for automatic trimming on connections.
 If a connected GENSEC, or a multiple selection of
connected GENSECs, is modified, e.g. moved, Spec.
Ref. changed, Beta angle changed, etc., connectivity
is maintained in accordance with some simple
rules. This is known as Dynamic Connectivity.
 An understanding of the affects of the Jfree
attribute (joint dominance) setting on a FIXING is
required to fully appreciate Dynamic Connectivity.
 Connecting two GENSECs together creates a

JLDATU/PLDATU/FIXING hierarchy construct below
the owning GENSEC. This replaces the SNOD/SJOI
construct used for SCTN elements.
 Cross ‘markers’ are displayed at the PLDATU and

JLDATU positions.
Structural Snapping Modes (1)
 In addition to the Elements and Graphics snaps on

the Object Snapping Settings form, there are three
snapping ‘modes’ which are particular to Structural
modelling, i.e. Projected Start/End, Significant
snaps and Distance Snap.
 The modes may also
be toggled from the
Status bar.
 Projected Snaps
– Normally an Item snap to the start or end of a GENSEC
would snap to the actual start or end point.
– Projected Snaps mode modifies the Item snap at the start
and end points of a GENSEC to the JLDATU position on the
owning member.
 Significant snaps
– This mode enables other JLDATU elements on the
same GENSEC to be used as snap points, whereas
only the start and end points would available.
 Significant snaps also affects other snaps.

– For example, with Significant Snaps on, Item
Midpoint is measured between significant snaps
rather than start and end points.
 Distance Snap
– This snap mode works in conjunction with other
snaps.
– The snap mode may be enabled and a distance
specified on the Object Snapping Settings form:
– Distance Snap may be toggled on from the

PowerWheel.
 When on, Distance Snap displays another input

textbox on appropriate commands in the 3D view.
 The textbox is accessed using the up arrow key

and a new distance may be entered.
 If used in conjunction with, say, Item or Item
Midpoint snap the requested distance is added to
the indicated snap point:
Pline Filtering (1)
 Plines can be selected and filtered from the P-line

Filters tab on the Object Snapping Settings form.
 The form displays the 14 ‘Standard’ Plines
applicable to all profiles in the E3D2.1 steel profile
catalogue and ‘System’ Plines which are Gtype
specific and only applicable to some profiles.
 Additional ‘Custom’ Plines may be added to the
list, for example Plines from ‘old’ or client
catalogues, by entering a PKEY and Description at
the bottom of the form.
 The Visible checkbox next to each Pline
determines whether it is visible, when appropriate,
in the 3D view.
Pline Filtering (2)
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Everything3D™2.1
Structures
Joints and Fittings
Joints (1)
 Sample joints that work with the new steel profiles

are provided in a new Joints and Fittings Catalogue.
 The sample joints not only show different techniques
for creating joints, including catalogue and template
joints but may provide a useful start for small clients.
 A joint specification is applied to an existing FIXING
element, automatically created when connecting
GENSECs, using the Joint button in the Modify group
of the SECTIONS tab.
Joints (2)
 At the Select gensecs prompt owning GENSECs are

selected.
 Pressing the Return key ends the selection and
displays spherical markers at the FIXING positions
with a Select joints prompt.
Joints (3)
 Joints are selected by selecting the spherical markers

which highlights them in red.
 Pressing the Return key ends the selection and

displays the Modify Joint Specification form.
Joints (4)
 The number of joints selected is

displayed at the top of the form
and the user prompted to select a
Specification from the options list.
 Selecting a
Specification
displays the
available Joint
Groups
Joints (5)
 Selecting the relevant Joint Group

displays the available Joints with a
short description.
 Selecting a Joint
displays the
Design
Parameters, if
any, at the
bottom of the
form where they
may be edited.
Joints (6)
 Clicking the Apply button applies the Specification

Reference to all selected joints.
 Clicking the Detail button

on the form displays an
image of the joint giving all
parameters and design
parameters, indicated by
the icon.
Joints (7)
 Design Parameters may also be modified from the

Properties grid.
 When a joint is placed at either end of a member, the

FIXING is automatically modified to ensure the joint
is orientated correctly at both ends.
End Datums (1)
 If a joint is required at the an unconnected end of a

GENSEC, e.g. a baseplate joint, an End Datum
(ENDATU) is created at a selected end of the GENSEC
and a selectable joint applied.
 Clicking the End Datum button in the Connections
group of the SECTIONS tab displays the prompt Pick
sections end(s).
 Either or both ends of the GENSEC may be selected.
End Datums (2)
 After selecting the required end(s), pressing the

Return key creates the ENDATU and FIXING
elements, displays a yellow spherical marker and
displays the End Datum form.
End Datums (3)
 The joints are restricted to suitable

joints.
 Selecting a Joint Group and Joint
and modifying Design Parameters,
are similar to Modifying Joint
Specification functionality.
 Clicking the Apply button creates
the joint on the selected end of the
GENSEC.
End Datums (4)
 Note: A GENSEC can only own two ENDATUs, one

at each end.
Section Fittings (1)
 Sample section fittings that work with the new steel

profiles are provided in a new Joints and Fittings
Catalogue.
 The sample joints not only show different techniques
for creating section fittings but may provide a useful
start for small clients.
 Section fittings are created on a single GENSEC using
the Fitting button in the Create group of the
SECTIONS tab.
 At the Select section prompt an

owning GENSEC is selected.
 Once selected the Section Fitting
form is displayed. This form
operates in the same way as the
Modify Joint Specification form
described earlier.
 Selecting a Fitting Group and a
Fitting displays the Design
Parameters, if any, at the bottom of
the form.
 Clicking the Apply button displays the prompt Select

P-line. The Plines are displayed in white on the
highlighted GENSEC and moving the cursor over a
Pline highlights and labels it.
– Note: Plines visibility is dependant on the P-line filters

settings on the Object Snapping Settings form.
 Once the Pline has been selected, a ‘ghost’ of the

fitting is placed at the GENSEC start, identified by a
cube marker, and a prompt Specify distance
displayed.
 A distance along the GENSEC may be entered in the

prompt textbox.
 or the distance may be specified graphically by
dragging the fitting along the Pline.
 Section fittings may be modified using the Properties

Grid or by clicking the Fitting button in the Modify
group and following the prompt sequence to display
the Modify Fixing form, which is similar to the
Create Fixing form.
Panel Fittings (1)
 Sample panel fittings are provided in a new Joints

and Fittings Catalogue.
 Panel fittings are created using the Fitting button in
the Create group of the PLATES tab.
 At the Pick panel prompt a

PANEL is selected.
Panel Fittings (2)
 Once selected the Create Fitting

form is displayed. This form
operates in the same way as the
Create Fixing form described
earlier.
 Selecting a Fitting Group and a
Fitting displays the Design
Parameters, if any, at the bottom of
the form.
Panel Fittings (3)
 Clicking the Apply button displays a ‘ghost’ of the

fitting on the panel with distance and angle feedback
from the panel origin.
 A position may be
specified graphically
or values entered into
the U: (N wrt panel)
and V: (E wrt panel)
textboxes.
 Command options enable the angle and justification
of the fitting to be modified.
Panel Fittings (4)
 Panel fittings may be modified using the Properties

Grid or by clicking the Fitting button in the Modify
group and following the prompt sequence to display
the Modify Fitting form, which is similar to the
Create Fitting form.

E3D Training File PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E3D Training File PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHAPTER 1

Pipe Router will automatically:

 Position piping components such as valves.

 Create a simple pipe route

 Use Routing Points to control the pipe route

 Route pipes along Routing Planes and Pipe Racks

 Create and use simple Routing Rules

© Copyright 2014. 7 www.aveva.com

1.4 Course Structure

1.5 Using this Guide

Button clicks are indicated by bold turquoise text.

Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.

 Refer to other documentation

Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.

© Copyright 2014 8 www.aveva.com

1.6 Setting Up the Training Course

Click the Model tile.

© Copyright 2014 9 www.aveva.com

This page has been intentionally left blank.

© Copyright 2014 10 www.aveva.com

 To have a clear understanding of the AVEVA E3D Cabling System application.

 To be able to create Cableways and Cableway branches.

 To be able to create electrical connections for equipment items.

 To be able to create and route a cable using various methods of routing.

 To be able to use the Cableway data checker utility.

 To be able to apply Cableway material to the Cableway branch.

 To be able to create and manage cable tray penetrations.

1.4 Course Structure

1.5 Using this guide

Button clicks are indicated by bold dark turquoise text.

Information the user has to key-in will be in bold red text.

Annotation for trainees benefit:

© Copyright 2013 www.aveva.com

 Refer to other documentation

Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font.

1.6 Setting up the Training Course

MDB: A-CABLE (MDB for User

Click the Model button

Check the Setup Training Course checkbox.

Click the Apply button.

This page is intentionally left blank

2 Cable Tray Design – Basic Concepts

Although a branch only has two ends, it may own components

These simple concepts enable any number of cable tray

2.1 Accessing the Cable Tray Application

2.2 Cable Tray Specifications

2.3 Setting the Appropriate Specification

2.4 Creating the Cable Tray Hierarchy

Set the Name to ZONE-CTRAY-POWER-AREA03 and

Click the OK button.

2.5 Cable Tray Creation Form

Set the Name to CTRAY-AREA03-POWER.

The form displays the current default specification. This can be

Clicking the Attributes… button displays

Set the Tray Width to 600mm

Click the OK button.

Click the OK button on the Create Cable

The Create Cable Tray Branch form is automatically populated with

 Setting branch head and tail positions is discussed in section

2.6 Cable Tray Branches

Branches serve two purposes:

2.7 Cable Tray Branch Heads and Tails

The attributes for heads of branches are: -